JP7597149B2 - Gaming Machines - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines.

Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as types of gaming machines. In these gaming machines, an internal lottery is held when a specific lottery condition is met, and a bonus is awarded to the player depending on the result of the internal lottery.

Specifically, in slot machines, when the start lever is operated with medals as gaming media bets, an internal lottery is conducted and the reels begin to spin. If the stop switch is operated while the reels are spinning, the reels stop spinning. If the reels stop in response to the results of the internal lottery, a bonus according to the result is awarded (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2008-295707 A

Here, it is necessary to improve the entertainment value of the gaming machines mentioned above, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

The present invention was made in consideration of the circumstances exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can increase the enjoyment of gaming.

The present invention relates to
A plurality of rotating bodies on which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in a circumferential direction;
A display unit that allows some of the patterns on each of the rotating bodies to be viewed;
A start operation means for starting rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the start operation means is operated;
A stop operation means for stopping the rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the stop operation means is operated;
a drive control means for starting rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the start operation means is operated and for stopping the rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the stop operation means is operated;
a lottery means for holding a lottery to determine whether or not to award a special benefit to a player based on an operation of the start operation means;
a bonus awarding means for awarding a bonus corresponding to a predetermined result when a lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position visible through the display unit;
A gaming machine comprising:
The game state includes a first game state and a second game state which is more advantageous to a player than the first game state,
a means for transitioning a gaming state from the first gaming state to the second gaming state when a lottery result by the lottery means becomes a predetermined specific transition result and a predetermined transition condition is established thereafter ;
a specific setting means for performing specific setting such that, when the lottery result of the lottery means becomes the specific transition result, a specific performance that allows a player to recognize that the specific transition result has occurred is executed after the winning game that has become the specific transition result and before the transition to the second gaming state;
a first means for executing a first specific effect as the specific effect in a specific game after the winning game and before the transition to the second game state when a first operation is performed by a player in a specific situation after the specific setting is performed;
A second means for preventing the first specific effect from being executed in the specific game when a second operation different from the first operation is performed by a player before the execution of the first specific effect in the specific situation;
Equipped with
After the second means determines that the first specific performance is not to be executed, the first specific performance cannot be executed before the transition to the second game state.
After the second means determines that the first specific performance is not to be executed, a second specific performance that is different from the first specific performance and that allows a player to recognize that the specific transition result has been achieved is executed.
The second specific effect can be ended by a player's operation,
The second operation is characterized in that it is an operation different from the operation of stopping the rotation of the rotating body by the stop operation means .

The present invention makes it possible to increase the enjoyment of games.

1 is a front view of a slot machine according to an embodiment. 1 is an oblique view of the slot machine with the front door closed. 1 is an oblique view of the slot machine with the front door open. FIG. FIG. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing the arrangement of symbols on each reel. 1 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the symbols visible through the display window and the pay lines. 1 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the symbols visible through the display window and the pay lines. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the winning modes and the benefits provided. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the winning modes and the benefits provided. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the winning modes and the benefits provided. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the main control device. 2 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device; 13 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing by the main control device. 4 is a flowchart showing normal processing by the main control device. 13 is a flowchart showing a lottery process. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a lottery table for a normal gaming state. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a reach pattern. 13 is a flowchart showing a reel control process. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the operation sequence of the stop buttons and the winning patterns that are achieved. FIG. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining reel stop control. 13 is a flowchart showing RT state processing. A figure showing an example of a lottery table for the first RT state. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the operation sequence of the stop buttons and the winning patterns that are achieved. FIG. A figure showing an example of a lottery table for the second RT state. A figure showing an example of a lottery table for the third RT state. 13 is a flowchart showing bonus state processing. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the operation sequence of the stop buttons and the winning patterns that are achieved. FIG. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a lottery table for BB state. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing the transition relationship between states. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing an overview of a display mode. 13 is a flowchart showing a lottery result handling process. 13 is a flowchart showing the first specific role processing. 13 is a flowchart showing the second specific role processing. 13 is a flowchart showing the third specific role processing. 13 is a flowchart showing a process for a specialized zone. A diagram to explain the main results of a lottery related to an instruction function and the setting differences in winning probabilities. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a mode selection table for transitioning between display modes. FIG. 13 shows an example of a premonition game number table. A figure showing an example of an additional game number lottery table. A figure showing an example of an add-on lottery table. 13 is a flowchart showing a mode change notification process. An explanatory diagram showing an overview of the push order notification presentation performed on the auxiliary display unit. A flowchart showing the push order processing. 13 is a flowchart showing a winning result response process. 13 is a flowchart showing a game number management process. 13 is a flowchart showing an end determination process. FIG. 2 is a diagram for explaining an overview of an indication monitor and a section display. 13 is a flowchart showing a first section display process. 13 is a flowchart showing a second section display process. 13 is a flowchart showing a performance setting process by a sub-side display control device. 13 is a flowchart showing a bet time effect setting process. 13 is a flowchart showing a start-up performance setting process. 13 is a flowchart showing the process for notifying the order of pressing. A flowchart showing the setting process for the added effects. 13 is a flowchart showing a process for setting effects at the time of each stop operation. A diagram showing the relationship between notification timing and additional performance. 13 is a flowchart showing a process for setting effects when all stops are performed. A flowchart showing the bonus performance setting process. 13 is a flowchart showing the process for notifying the transition trigger role. 13 is a flowchart showing a continuous performance setting process. 11A to 11C are diagrams illustrating an example of a display presentation by an auxiliary display unit. 11A to 11C are diagrams illustrating an example of a display presentation by an auxiliary display unit. 11A to 11C are diagrams illustrating an example of a display presentation by an auxiliary display unit. 11A to 11C are diagrams illustrating an example of a display presentation by an auxiliary display unit. 11A to 11C are diagrams illustrating an example of a display presentation by an auxiliary display unit. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an example of a continuous performance. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an example of a continuous performance. 13 is a flowchart showing an add-on notification process. This is a diagram to explain the relationship between the actual number of remaining games in the advantageous zone and the displayed number of remaining games. A figure showing an example of a later-addition lottery table. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of an additional notification timing table. 13 is a flowchart showing a process for notifying a following vehicle. 13 is a flowchart showing a BB winning process. FIG. 1A is a diagram showing an example of a freeze type allocation table, and FIG. 1B is an explanatory diagram for explaining an example of a freeze effect. 13 is a flowchart showing a VB mode winning process. 13 is a flowchart showing a rotation effect process. 13 is a flowchart showing a freeze release process. A flowchart showing the reach eye push order notification process. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the flow of a game regarding a freeze effect. 13 is a flowchart showing a freeze release process in the first modified example. 13 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the flow of a game related to notification. FIG. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a mode of freezing release in Modification 2. 13A is a flowchart showing a reel control process in the second embodiment, and FIG. 13B is a flowchart showing a reach symbol stop determination process. 13A is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process, and FIG. 13B is a flowchart showing an adjustment switch response process. 13 is a flowchart showing a freeze release process. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the flow of a game regarding a freeze effect. 13 is a flowchart showing a performance setting process in the first modified example. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an example of a first notification and a second notification. 13A is a flowchart showing a reel control process in the third embodiment, and FIG. 13B is a flowchart showing a freeze release process. 13A is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process, and FIG. 13B is a flowchart showing an adjustment switch response process. (a) is a flowchart showing the freeze recovery process, (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining an example of operation when the execution of the freeze effect is released, and (c) is an explanatory diagram for explaining an example of operation when the execution of the freeze effect is not released. 13 is a flowchart showing a performance setting process. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the flow of a game regarding a freeze effect. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a freeze effect according to the fourth embodiment. 13A is a flowchart showing the BB winning process, and FIG. 13B is a flowchart showing the first specific role process. 13 is a flowchart showing the sixth freeze effect processing. 13 is a flowchart showing the process for notifying the transition trigger role. 13 is a flowchart showing a continuous performance setting process. 13 is a flowchart showing a process for setting effects when all stops are performed. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the flow of a game when continuous performance is executed. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the flow of a game when continuous performance is executed.

First Embodiment
An embodiment of the present invention, which is applied to a reel type gaming machine, specifically a slot machine, will be described in detail below with reference to the drawings. Fig. 1 is a front view of a slot machine 10, Fig. 2 is a perspective view of the slot machine 10 with a front door 12 closed, Fig. 3 is a perspective view of the slot machine 10 with the front door 12 open, Fig. 4 is a rear view of the front door 12, and Fig. 5 is a front view of a cabinet 11.

As shown in Figures 1 to 5, the slot machine 10 has a housing 11 that forms its outer shell. The housing 11 is generally formed in a box shape with an open front, and is attached to the so-called island equipment by nailing it when installing it in an amusement hall.

A front door 12 is attached to the front side of the housing 11 so as to be openable and closable. That is, the housing 11 is provided with a pair of upper and lower support shafts 13a, 13b on the left side when viewed from the front, and the front door 12 is provided with bearings 14a, 14b at positions corresponding to the support shafts 13a, 13b. When the support shafts 13a, 13b are inserted into the bearings 14a, 14b, the front door 12 is supported rotatably around an opening and closing axis extending in the vertical direction connecting the support shafts 13a, 13b with respect to the housing 11, and the front open side of the housing 11 can be opened or closed by rotating the front door 12. The front door 12 is locked and cannot be opened by a locking device 20 provided on its back side. A key cylinder 21 integrated with the locking device 20 is provided at the upper right end side of the front door 12, and the locked state is released by a predetermined key operation on the key cylinder 21.

A game panel 25 that notifies the player of the game status is provided at the upper center of the front door 12. The game panel 25 has three vertically long display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R arranged side by side, and the inside of the slot machine 10 can be seen through each of the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R. The display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R may be combined into one common display window.

As shown in FIG. 3, the inside of the housing 11 is divided into two parts, an upper part and a lower part, by a partition plate 30, and a reel unit 31 constituting a variable display means is attached to the upper part of the partition plate 30. The reel unit 31 is provided with a left reel 32L, a center reel 32M, and a right reel 32R each formed in a cylindrical (annular) shape. Each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R is supported so that it can rotate with its central axis being the axis of rotation of the reel. The axes of rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R are arranged on the same axis extending in a substantially horizontal direction, and each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R corresponds one-to-one to each display window 26L, 26M, and 26R. Therefore, a part of the surface of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R is visible through the corresponding display window 26L, 26M, and 26R. Furthermore, when reels 32L, 32M, and 32R rotate forward, the surfaces of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are displayed through display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R as if they are moving from top to bottom.

Here, we will briefly explain the configuration of the reel unit 31.

Each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is connected to a stepping motor, and each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R can be rotated individually, i.e., independently, by driving each stepping motor. The stepping motor is set to rotate once by giving a drive signal (hereinafter also referred to as an excitation pulse) of, for example, 504 pulses, and the rotational position of the stepping motor, i.e., the rotational position of the reel, is controlled by this excitation pulse. In addition, reel index sensors for detecting that the reel has rotated once are installed on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in the reel unit 31. When the reel index sensor detects that the reel has rotated once, it outputs a detection signal to the main control device 101, which will be described later, each time it detects that the reel has rotated once. Therefore, the main control device 101 can check and correct the angular position of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R for each rotation based on the detection signal of the reel index sensor and the number of excitation pulses output before the detection signal is input.

On the outer periphery of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, multiple symbols are drawn in the long side direction (rotation direction) as identification information. More specifically, 21 symbols are drawn at equal intervals. Therefore, to switch from one symbol to the next symbol at a specified position, it is necessary to output 24 excitation pulses (= 504 pulses ÷ 21 symbols). Furthermore, the main control device 101 can determine which symbols are visible from the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R and stop a specified symbol at a position visible from the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R based on the number of excitation pulses output after the detection signal of the reel index sensor is input.

Next, we will explain the symbols depicted on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R.

Figure 6 shows the arrangement of symbols on the left reel 32L, center reel 32M, and right reel 32R. As shown in the figure, 21 symbols are arranged in a row on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. Numbers from 0 to 20 are also assigned to each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, but these numbers are numbers used by the main control device 101 to identify the symbols that are visible through the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R, and are not actually assigned to the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. However, these numbers will be used in the following explanation.

There are 11 types of symbols: "Red Bell" symbol (e.g., the 7th symbol on the left reel 32L), "White Bell" symbol (e.g., the 20th symbol on the left reel 32L), "First Replay" symbol (e.g., the 19th symbol on the left reel 32L), "Second Replay" symbol (e.g., the 6th symbol on the left reel 32L), "Red 7" symbol (e.g., the 10th symbol on the left reel 32L), "Watermelon" symbol (e.g., the 8th symbol on the left reel 32L), "Cherry" symbol (e.g., the 4th symbol on the left reel 32L), "Black BAR" symbol (e.g., the 18th symbol on the left reel 32L), "White BAR" symbol (e.g., the 17th symbol on the left reel 32L), "LUCKY" symbol (e.g., the 5th symbol on the left reel 32L), and "Youth" symbol (e.g., the 0th symbol on the left reel 32L). As shown in FIG. 6, the number and arrangement of the various symbols are completely different on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R.

Each display window 26L, 26M, 26R is formed so that of the 21 symbols on the corresponding reel, only three symbols are visible in their entirety. Therefore, when each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is stopped, 3 x 3 = 9 symbols are visible through the display window 26L, 26M, 26R.

In the slot machine 10, the game results of each game are announced using a total of three combinations of symbols, one for each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, among the symbols that can be seen. As described above, 3 x 3 = 9 symbols are visible, and as combinations of these three symbols, for example, as shown in FIG. 7, there are combinations of symbols that stop on the upper line L1 connecting the upper symbols of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, combinations of symbols that stop on the middle line L2 connecting the middle symbols of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, and combinations of symbols that stop on the lower line L3 connecting the lower symbols of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. There are also combinations of symbols that stop on a downward-right line L4 that connects the upper pattern of the left reel 32L, the middle pattern of the middle reel 32M, and the lower pattern of the right reel 32R, and combinations of symbols that stop on an upward-right line L5 that connects the lower pattern of the left reel 32L, the middle pattern of the middle reel 32M, and the upper pattern of the right reel 32R. There are also combinations of symbols that stop on a curved line L6 that connects the upper pattern of the left reel 32L, the middle pattern of the middle reel 32M, and the middle pattern of the right reel 32R. The above lines L1 to L5 are lines that form a straight line when the symbols are lined up, and the curved line L6 is a line that bends when the symbols are lined up. There are other combinations of symbols that stop on lines that bend, other than the curved line L6, but we will not explain them here.

Of these lines L1 to L6, some are activated and some are not, depending on the number of medals bet. When symbols stop in a specified combination on an activated line, i.e., an activated line, a win is achieved and a bonus is awarded in which a specified number of medals, which serve as gaming media, are paid out, or a bonus is awarded in which the gaming state is changed. On the other hand, when symbols stop in a specified combination on an inactivated line, a win is not achieved and the bonus is not awarded.

In this slot machine 10, there are cases where only the downward-right line L4 is the active line as shown in FIG. 8(a), cases where the two combination lines of the lower line L3 and the downward-right line L4 are the active lines as shown in FIG. 8(b), and cases where only the bent line L6 is the active line as shown in FIG. 8(c). More specifically, when three medals are bet and the game is started, only the downward-right line L4 is the active line, and when two medals are bet and the game is started, the lower line L3 and the downward-right line L4 are the active lines. Also, when one medal is bet and the game is started, only the bent line L6 is the active line. The three combination lines of the upper line L1, the middle line L2, and the upward-right line L5 are not the active lines. Hereinafter, a game started with three medals bet is also called a 3-bet game, a game started with two medals bet is also called a 2-bet game, and a game started with one medal bet is also called a 1-bet game.

Figures 9 to 11 show the correspondence between winning combinations of symbols and the benefits that will be awarded if a winning combination is achieved.

The small prize winnings that result in medal payouts include the 1st small prize winning to the 32nd small prize winning.

When the "red bell" or "white bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "red bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "red bell" or "white bell" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on an active line, the first small win is achieved. When the first small win is achieved, 9 medals are paid out in a 3-bet game, and 15 medals are paid out in a 2-bet game.

Although the winning symbol combinations for the 2nd small prize winning to the 26th small prize winning are different, in a 3-bet game, the winning pattern is that the "red bell" symbol or "white bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "white BAR" symbol, "red 7" symbol, "cherry" symbol, "white bell" symbol or "LUCKY" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "white BAR" symbol, "youth" symbol, "white bell" symbol, "red 7" symbol or "second replay" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the top line L1, in other words, the "bell" symbols on each reel 32L, 32M and 32R stop on the top line L1. For example, if the "red bell" or "white bell" symbol on the left reel 32L stops on the top row, the "cherry" symbol on the middle reel 32M stops on the middle row, and the "white BAR" symbol on the right reel 32R stops on the bottom row, the eighth small win is achieved. As shown in Fig. 6, the "red bell" symbol is arranged on the middle reel 32M in a position (number 12) adjacent to the "cherry" symbol (number 11) on the upstream side, and the "red bell" symbol is arranged on the right reel 32R in a position (number 20) one symbol away from the "white BAR" symbol (number 18) on the upstream side. Therefore, when the 8th small win occurs on the downward-right line L4, the "red bell" or "white bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "red bell" symbol on the center reel 32M, and the "red bell" symbol on the right reel 32R will stop on the upper line L1. When the 2nd to 26th small wins occur, 3 medals are paid out in a 3-bet game, and 14 medals are paid out in a 2-bet game.

The 27th minor prize is determined by the stopping pattern of the left reel 32L as a specified reel among the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. Specifically, the 27th minor prize is won when the "cherry" pattern of the left reel 32L stops in the upper or lower row. In this case, the stopping patterns of the center reel 32M and the right reel 32R do not affect the winning judgment. In other words, regardless of the stopping patterns of the center reel 32M and the right reel 32R, the 27th minor prize is won when the "cherry" pattern of the left reel 32L stops in the upper row or stops, that is, when the "cherry" pattern or the "second replay" pattern stops on the winning line. When the 27th minor prize is won, 3 medals are paid out in a 3-bet game, and 15 medals are paid out in a 2-bet game.

The 28th minor win occurs when the "cherry" symbol on the left reel 32L stops on the top or bottom row, and the "cherry" symbols stop all together on the downward-right line L4. More specifically, the 28th minor win occurs when the "cherry" symbol or the "second replay" symbol stops on the left reel 32L, the "red bell" symbol, the "white bell" symbol or the "cherry" symbol stops on the middle reel 32M, and the "cherry" symbol, the "first replay" symbol or the "second replay" symbol stops on the right reel 32R. When the 28th minor win occurs, 3 medals are paid out in a 3-bet game, and 14 medals are paid out in a 2-bet game.

To further explain the relationship between the 27th and 28th small wins, when the "cherry" or "second replay" symbols on the left reel 32L stop, the 27th small win is achieved regardless of the symbols stopped on the middle reel 32M and right reel 32R, but depending on the symbols stopped on the middle reel 32M and right reel 32R, the 28th small win may be achieved instead of the 27th small win. In other words, although the winning patterns that result in the 27th small win include the winning patterns that result in the 28th small win, the 27th and 28th small wins are clearly distinguished when making the winning judgment.

The 29th minor win occurs when the "watermelon" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "watermelon" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "watermelon" symbol on the right reel 32R all stop on an active line. In other words, if the sloping right line L4 is the active line, the 29th minor win occurs when the "watermelon" symbols all stop sloping right. When the 29th minor win occurs, 5 medals are paid out in a 3-bet game, and 14 medals are paid out in a 2-bet game.

The 30th small win occurs when the "watermelon" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "watermelon" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "watermelon" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the top line L1. More specifically, the 30th small win occurs when the "watermelon" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "red bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "red bell" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on an active line. When the 30th small win occurs, 5 medals are paid out in a 3-bet game, and 14 medals are paid out in a 2-bet game.

When the "Black BAR", "Young Man", "Watermelon" and "First Replay" symbols on the left reel 32L, the "Red Bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M and the "Red Bell" or "White Bell" symbols on the right reel 32R stop on an active line, the 31st minor win is achieved. When the 31st minor win is achieved, 9 medals are paid out in a 3-bet game and 15 medals are paid out in a 2-bet game.

For the 32nd to 35th small prizes, if they are achieved in a 3 bet game, 3 medals will be paid out, and in a 2 bet game, 14 medals will be paid out.

The 36th minor prize occurs when, for example, the player operates the stop switches 42-44 to aim for the "watermelon" symbol on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R, and the "watermelon" symbols on the left reel 32L and center reel 32M, or the left reel 32L and right reel 32R, stop on an active line, while the "watermelon" symbols on the remaining reels do not stop on an active line, resulting in a so-called "watermelon tenpai miss" winning outcome. When the 36th minor prize occurs, 3 medals are paid out in a 3-bet game, and 15 medals are paid out in a 2-bet game.

When the "Red Bell" or "White Bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "Black BAR", "Watermelon" and "Cherry" symbols on the middle reel 32M, and the "Red Bell", "White Bell" and "Youth" symbols on the right reel 32R stop on an active line, the 37th minor win is achieved. As shown in FIG. 6, the left reel 32L has the "Red Bell" symbol (No. 7) and the "Second Replay" symbol located adjacent to it (No. 6) downstream, and the "First Replay" symbols located adjacent to the main "White Bell" symbols (No. 3, No. 12, No. 15 and No. 20) and the downstream positions (No. 2, No. 11, No. 14 and No. 19). On the right reel 32R, the "1st replay" or "2nd replay" symbols are arranged in adjacent positions (3, 6, 16, 0) to the main "red bell" symbols (2, 5, 12, 20), and the "1st replay" symbol is arranged in adjacent position (11) to the upstream side of the "white bell" symbol (10). Therefore, when the 37th small win is established on the right-downward line L4, the "bell" and "replay" symbols are mainly in tenpai on the left reel 32L and the right reel 32R, while the "bell" and "replay" symbols on the center reel 32M do not stop, resulting in a so-called double tenpai stop result. When the 37th small win is established, 3 medals are paid out in a 3-bet game, and 15 medals are paid out in a 2-bet game.

When the "White BAR", "Young Man", "Watermelon" and "First Replay" symbols on the left reel 32L, the "Red Bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "First Replay", "Watermelon" and "Black BAR" symbols on the right reel 32R stop on an active line, the 38th small win is achieved. In a 3-bet game, if the player operates the left stop switch when the No. 4 "Cherry" symbol on the left reel 32L reaches the top to bottom row, the 38th small win is achieved, and the "Red Bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "Red Bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "Red Bell" or "White Bell" symbols on the right reel 32R stop on the middle line L2. If the 38th minor win is achieved, 3 medals will be paid out in a 3-bet game, and 15 medals will be paid out in a 2-bet game.

When the "red bell" or "white bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "red bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "black BAR" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on an active line, the 39th small win is achieved. The 39th small win is a winning mode that can only be achieved in a 3-bet game. When the 39th small win is achieved, 9 medals are paid out.

When the "red bell" or "white bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "red bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "red 7" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on an active line, the 40th small win is won. The 40th small win is a winning mode that can only be achieved in a 3-bet game. When the 40th small win is achieved, 9 medals are paid out.

When the "watermelon" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "black BAR" symbol or the "cherry" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "watermelon" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on an active line, the 41st minor win is achieved. When the 41st minor win is achieved, 3 medals are paid out in a 3-bet game, and 14 medals are paid out in a 2-bet game.

The winning combinations that grant the replay privilege, which allows the player to play the next game without inserting a medal, include the 1st replay winning combination to the 11th replay winning combination. When the 2nd replay winning combination is achieved, the game state transitions to the 1st RT state, when the 3rd replay winning combination is achieved, the game state transitions to the 2nd RT state, and when the 4th or 5th replay winning combination is achieved, the game state transitions to the 3rd RT state.

State transition winnings that only result in a transition of the game state include the 1st BB winning, the 2nd BB winning, and the CB winning.

When the "red 7" symbols on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R stop on an active line, a first BB win is achieved, and when the "white BAR" symbols on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R stop on an active line, a second BB win is achieved. When these BB wins are achieved, the game state transitions to the BB state. When the "red bell" or "white bell" symbols on the left reel 32L, the "red bell" symbol on the center reel 32M, and the "watermelon", "first replay", and "black BAR" symbols on the right reel 32R stop on an active line, a CB win is achieved. When a CB win is achieved, the game state transitions to the CB state.

In addition, there are some winning combinations that will cause the game state to transition to the first RT state, although they are not winning combinations. Specifically, when the "red bell" or "white bell" symbols on the left reel 32L, the "white BAR", "LUCKY", "red 7", "white bell" and "cherry" symbols on the center reel 32M, and the "watermelon" and "first replay" symbols on the right reel 32R stop on an active line, the game state transitions to the first RT state. In addition, if the "Red Bell" or "White Bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "Red Bell" symbol on the center reel 32M, and the "White BAR", "Youth", "White Bell", "Red 7", and "Second Replay" symbols on the right reel 32R stop on an active line, the game state will also transition to the first RT state. Hereinafter, the combination of the above symbols will be referred to as the transition result.

A start lever 41 is provided on the lower left side of the game panel 25, which is operated to start the rotation of each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. The start lever 41 constitutes a start operation means or a start operation means that is operated to start the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, i.e., to start the variable display of the patterns. When the start lever 41 is operated with a predetermined number of medals inserted, each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R starts to rotate.

Button-shaped stop switches 42-44 are provided to the right of the start lever 41 and are operated to individually stop each of the spinning reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. Each stop switch 42-44 is located directly below the display window 26L, 26M, and 26R that corresponds to the reel 32L, 32M, and 32R to be stopped.

Stop detection sensors 42a to 44a (FIG. 12) are connected to the stop switches 42 to 44, respectively, and the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a are connected to the main control device 101, which will be described later. The main control device 101 then determines that the stop switches 42 to 44 have been operated based on the detection signals from the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a. Specifically, when the stop switches 42 to 44 are not operated, the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a output a detection signal of a LOW signal, and when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated, the detection signal switches from a LOW signal to a HIGH signal. The main control device 101 determines that the stop switches 42 to 44 have been operated by determining this signal switch. When the main control device 101 determines that the stop switches 42 to 44 have been operated, it controls the reel corresponding to the operated switch to stop spinning.

That is, when the left stop switch 42 is operated, the left reel 32L stops spinning, when the middle stop switch 43 is operated, the middle reel 32M stops spinning, and when the right stop switch 44 is operated, the right reel 32R stops spinning. The stop switches 42 to 44 constitute a stop operation means that is operated to stop the variable display of the symbols based on the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R.

A medal insertion port 45 for inserting medals is provided below and to the right of the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R. The medal insertion port 45 constitutes an input means for inputting game media. In addition, considering that the medal insertion port 45 involves the action of the player directly inserting medals, it can also be said to constitute a direct input means for directly inputting game media.

The medals inserted through the medal insertion port 45 are guided to either the storage passage 47 or the discharge passage 48 by a selector 46 as a passage switching means provided on the back of the front door 12. More specifically, the selector 46 is provided with a medal passage switching solenoid 46a, and when the medal passage switching solenoid 46a is not energized, the medals are guided to the discharge passage 48 side, and when the medal passage switching solenoid 46a is energized, the medals are guided to the storage passage 47 side. The medals guided to the storage passage 47 are guided to a hopper device 51 stored inside the housing 11. On the other hand, the medals guided to the discharge passage 48 are guided to a medal tray 50 from a medal discharge port 49 provided on the lower front surface of the front door 12, and are returned to the player.

The hopper device 51 is composed of a storage tank 52 that stores medals, and a payout device 53 that pays out medals to players. The payout device 53 rotates a medal payout rotating plate (not shown) to discharge medals to an opening 48a provided in the discharge passage 48, and pays out the medals to a medal receiving tray 50 through the discharge passage 48. In addition, a reserve tank 54 is provided to the right of the hopper device 51 to prevent medals from being stored in the storage tank 52 by more than a predetermined amount. Inside the storage tank 52 of the hopper device 51, a guide plate 52a is provided to discharge medals from the storage tank 52 to the reserve tank 54. Therefore, if medals are stored above the height at which the guide plate 52a is provided, the medals will be stored in the reserve tank 54.

A button-shaped return switch 55 is provided below the medal insertion port 45. If the return switch 55 is operated when a medal inserted into the medal insertion port 45 becomes stuck in the selector 46, the selector 46 is mechanically linked and operated, and the medal stuck in the selector 46 is returned from the medal ejection port 49.

A first credit insertion switch 56 is provided on the lower left side of the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R for inserting three credited virtual medals as game media at a time. A second credit insertion switch 57 is provided to the right of the first credit insertion switch 56, and a third credit insertion switch 58 is provided to the left of the first credit insertion switch 56. The second credit insertion switch 57 is for inserting one virtual medal, and the third credit insertion switch 58 is for inserting two virtual medals at a time. The credit insertion switches 56 to 58, together with the medal insertion slot 45, constitute an input means for inputting game media. In addition, while the medal insertion slot 45 involves the action of the player directly inserting medals, the credit insertion switches 56 to 58 only involve the action of inserting virtual medals based on the stored memory. Considering this, it can also be said that they constitute an indirect input means for indirectly inputting game media.

Between the first credit input switch 56 and the second credit input switch 57, there is provided an effect switch 66 that is operated when an effect occurs. In other words, to the left of the effect switch 66, there are the first credit input switch 56 and the third credit input switch 58, and to the right of the effect switch 66, there is the second credit input switch 57.

A settlement switch 59 is provided to the left of the start lever 41. In other words, this slot machine 10 has a credit function that stores and stores as virtual medals any surplus inserted medals up to a predetermined maximum value (equivalent to 50 medals) or medals paid out when a prize is won, and when the settlement switch 59 is operated while virtual medals are stored and stored, the virtual medals are paid out from the medal outlet 49 as real medals. In this case, when focusing on the function of paying out credited virtual medals as real medals, the settlement switch 59 can also be said to constitute a settlement operation means for actually paying out the stored and stored game media.

Below the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R of the game panel 25 are a credit display section 60 that displays the number of credited virtual medals, a remaining payout number display section 61 that displays the number of medals remaining to be paid out until the BB state ends, and a payout number display section 62 that displays the number of medals paid out when a win occurs. These display sections 60 to 62 are made up of seven-segment displays, but can of course be replaced with liquid crystal displays or the like.

Below the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R on the game panel 25 and to the right of the payout number display unit 62, there is provided an instruction monitor 68 having a push order indicator that notifies the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44, and a zone indicator that indicates an advantageous zone in which the player can play in an advantageous situation by changing the winning rate of minor roles by notifying the operation order. The instruction monitor 68 will be described in detail later.

At the top of the front door 12, there are provided an upper lamp 63 that lights up or flashes as the game progresses, a pair of left and right speakers 64 that play various sound effects as the game progresses and notify the player of the game status, and an auxiliary display unit 65 that gives the player various information. The auxiliary display unit 65 is for executing various display effects as the game progresses, and since the game using each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R can be considered to be performed by the main display unit, it is referred to as the auxiliary display unit 65 in this embodiment. At the back of the auxiliary display unit 65, there is provided a display control device 81 for driving the upper lamp 63, the speaker 64, and the auxiliary display unit 65.

Inside the housing 11, a power supply box 70 is provided to the left of the hopper device 51. The power supply box 70 houses the power supply device 91 inside and is equipped with a power switch 71, a reset switch 72, a setting key insertion hole 73, and the like. The power switch 71 is an activation switch for supplying power to each part including the main control device 101. The reset switch 72 is a switch for resetting an error state of the slot machine 10. The setting key insertion hole 73 is for the hall manager or the like to adjust the medal output. In other words, the hall manager or the like can set the winning probability (setting value) of the slot machine 10 by inserting the setting key into the setting key insertion hole 73 and turning it ON. The reset switch 72 is operated not only when resetting an error state but also when changing the winning probability of the slot machine 10.

Above the reel unit 31, a main control device 101 that controls the game is attached to the cabinet 11.

Next, the electrical configuration of the slot machine 10 will be explained based on the block diagrams in Figures 12 and 13.

The main control device 101 is equipped with a microcomputer centered around the CPU 102, which is an arithmetic processing means. In addition to the power supply device 91, the CPU 102 is connected to a clock circuit 103 that outputs a rectangular wave of a predetermined frequency, an input/output port 104, and the like via an internal bus. This main control device 101 functions as the main board built into the slot machine 10.

On the input side of the main control device 101, there are the reel unit 31 (more specifically, a reel index sensor that individually detects when each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R has made one rotation), a start detection sensor 41a that detects the operation of the start lever 41, stop detection sensors 42a to 44a that individually detect the operation of each of the stop switches 42 to 44, an inserted medal detection sensor 45a that detects medals inserted through the medal insertion slot 45, a payout detection sensor 51a that detects medals paid out from the hopper device 51, a first credit insertion detection sensor 52a that individually detects the operation of the first credit insertion switch 56, and a second credit insertion detection sensor 53a that detects the operation of the first credit insertion switch 56. 6a, a second credit insertion detection sensor 57a that individually detects the operation of the second credit insertion switch 57, a third credit insertion detection sensor 58a that individually detects the operation of the third credit insertion switch 58, a settlement detection sensor 59a that detects the operation of the settlement switch 59, a reset detection sensor 72a that detects the operation of the reset switch 72, a setting key detection sensor 73a that detects when a setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion hole 73 and turned ON, and other sensors are connected, and signals from these various sensors are output to the CPU 102 via the input/output port 104.

The power supply unit 91 is connected to the input side of the main control unit 101 via the input/output port 104. The power supply unit 91 is equipped with a power supply unit 91a that supplies driving power to the main control unit 101 and each electronic device of the slot machine 10, a power outage monitoring circuit 91b, and the like.

The power supply unit 91a is connected to a commercial power source (external power source) in, for example, an amusement hall. Then, based on the external power supplied from the commercial power source, it generates operating power for the main control device 101, the display control device 81 described below, and the like, and supplies the generated operating power to the main control device 101, the display control device 81, and the like.

The power failure monitoring circuit 91b monitors the power supply cut-off state and generates a power failure signal not only during a power failure (external power cut-off state) but also when the power supply is cut off by the power switch 71. For this reason, the power failure monitoring circuit 91b monitors the stabilized drive voltage of 12 volts DC in this example output from the power supply unit 91a, and is configured to determine that the power supply has been cut off when this drive voltage drops to less than 10 volts, for example, and output a power failure signal. The power failure signal is supplied to both the CPU 102 and the input/output port 104, and the CPU 102 recognizes this power failure signal and executes the power failure processing described below. The power failure signal is also configured to be supplied to the display control device 81.

The power supply unit 91a is configured to output a stabilized voltage of 5 volts to be used as a drive voltage in control systems such as the main control unit 101, even if the output voltage drops below 10 volts. The time for which this stabilized voltage is output is sufficient to allow the main control unit 101 to execute power outage processing.

The output side of the main control device 101 is connected via an input/output port 104 to the reel unit 31 (more specifically, the stepping motor for rotating each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R), the medal passage switching solenoid 46a provided on the selector 46, the hopper device 51, the credit display unit 60, the remaining number of coins to be paid out display unit 61, the number of coins to be paid out display unit 62, the instruction monitor 68, the display control device 81, and an external centralized terminal board 121 that can transmit information to a hall management device (not shown), etc.

The above-mentioned CPU 102 includes a ROM 105 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the CPU 102, a RAM 106 that secures a working area for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 105, and various counters, such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data transmission/reception circuit, and other processing circuits required for the slot machine 10, as well known in the art (not shown). The ROM 105 and RAM 106 form a main memory as a storage means, and the programs for executing various processes are stored in the above-mentioned ROM 105 as part of the control programs.

RAM 106 is configured to be able to retain (back up) data by receiving backup voltage from power supply device 91 even after power to slot machine 10 is cut off. RAM 106 is provided with a backup area in addition to memory for temporarily storing various data, a winning flag storage area 106a for storing the results of a winning combination lottery, a stop information storage area 106b for storing stop information used when controlling the stop of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, and a status information storage area 106c for storing game status such as BB status.

The backup area is an area for storing the value of the stack pointer at the time of power interruption (including power interruption by operating the power switch 71; the same applies below) in the event that the power is interrupted due to a power outage or the like, and when the power outage is resolved (including power on by operating the power switch 71; the same applies below), the state of the slot machine 10 can be restored to the state before power was interrupted based on the information in the backup area. Writing to the backup area is performed by the power outage processing (see Figure 14) when the power is interrupted, and the values written to the backup area are restored during main processing when the power is turned on.

The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the CPU 102 is configured to receive a power outage signal from the power outage monitoring circuit 91b when the power is cut off due to a power outage or the like. When the power is cut off, an NMI interrupt process is immediately executed as a power outage flag generation process.

As shown in FIG. 13, the display control device 81 is equipped with a microcomputer centered around a CPU 181, which is a calculation processing means. The CPU 181 includes a ROM 182 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the CPU 181, and a RAM 183 for securing a working area for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 182.

The display control device 81 is provided with input/output ports (not shown), with the main control device 101 connected to the input side and the upper lamps 63, speaker 64, and auxiliary display unit 65 connected to the output side. The display control device 81 drives and controls the upper lamps 63, speaker 64, and auxiliary display unit 65 based on various commands input from the main control device 101. In other words, the display control device 81 is a sub-board that performs auxiliary control in relation to the main control device 101, which is the main board that manages the overall game. In other words, by providing a sub-board for sounds, lamps, and displays that are indirectly related to the game, the burden on the main board is reduced.

The display control device 81 is connected to an input side of the display control device 81 with a performance switch 66 (more specifically, a performance switch detection sensor that detects the operation of the performance switch 66). The display control device 81 may also be configured to drive and control the various display units 60 to 62, 68.

Next, the control processes executed by the CPU 102 of the main control device 101 will be described. The processes of the CPU 102 can be broadly divided into main processes that are started when the power is turned on, timer interrupt processes that are started periodically (every 1.49 msec in this embodiment), and NMI interrupt processes that are started when a power outage signal is input to the NMI terminal. Below, we will explain the processes related to the progress of the game among these processes, i.e., timer interrupt processes, and normal processes performed in the main processes.

Figure 14 is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process that is periodically executed by the main control unit 101, and a timer interrupt is generated by the CPU 102 of the main control unit 101, for example, every 1.49 msec.

First, in the register save process shown in step S101, the values of all registers in the CPU 102 that are used in normal processing, which will be described later, are saved to a backup area in the RAM 106. In step S102, it is confirmed whether the power outage flag is set, and if the power outage flag is set, the process proceeds to step S103, where power outage processing is executed.

Here is an overview of how power outages are handled.

When the power supply is cut off due to a power outage or the like, a power outage signal is output from the power outage monitoring circuit 91b of the power supply device 91, and the power outage signal is input to the main control device 101 via the NMI terminal. When the power outage signal is input, the main control device 101 immediately executes an NMI interrupt process and sets a power outage flag in a power outage flag storage area provided in the RAM 106.

In the power failure process, first, it is determined whether the transmission of the command has been completed, and if the transmission has not been completed, this process is terminated and the process returns to the timer interrupt process, and the transmission of the command is terminated. If the transmission of the command has been completed, the value of the stack pointer of the CPU 102 is saved in the backup area of the RAM 106. After that, the output state of the output port in the input/output port 104 is cleared, and all actuators (not shown) are turned off. Then, a RAM judgment value for judging whether the data in the RAM 106 is normal or not when the power failure is resolved is calculated and saved in the backup area, thereby prohibiting subsequent access to the RAM. After the above process is performed, an infinite loop is entered in preparation for the power being completely cut off and processing being unable to be executed. Note that, in consideration of the case where the power failure flag is erroneously set due to noise, for example, a check is made as to whether a power failure signal is being output until the infinite loop is entered. If the power failure signal is not being output, it means that the power failure state has been recovered, so writing to the RAM 106 is permitted, the power failure flag is reset, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process. If the power failure signal continues to be output, the infinite loop is entered as it is. Incidentally, even in an infinite loop, it checks whether the power outage signal is being output, and if the power outage signal is no longer being output, it transitions to the main process.

Returning to the explanation of the timer interrupt process, if the power outage flag is not set in step S102, various processes from step S104 onwards are carried out.

That is, in step S104, a watchdog timer clear process is performed to initialize the value of the watchdog timer for monitoring the occurrence of a malfunction. In step S105, an interrupt end declaration process is performed to enable the CPU 102 itself to set the next timer interrupt. In step S106, a stepping motor control process is performed to drive the stepping motors that are the reel drive motors for each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R to rotate. In step S107, a sensor monitoring process is performed to read the status of various sensors such as the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a, the inserted medal detection sensor 45a, and the payout detection sensor 51a connected to the input/output port 104 (see FIG. 12), and to monitor whether the read results are normal or not. In step S108, a timer calculation process is performed to subtract the values of each counter and timer. In step S109, a counter process is performed to output the results of counting the number of medals bet and the number of medals paid out to the external centralized terminal board 121.

In step S110, a command output process is performed to send various commands, such as a lottery result command, to the display control device 81. In step S111, a segment data setting process is performed to set the segment data to be displayed in the credit display unit 60, the remaining number of coins to be paid display unit 61, and the number of coins to be paid display unit 62. In step S112, a segment data display process is performed to supply the segment data set in the segment data setting process to each display unit 60 to 62, 68 and display the corresponding numbers, symbols, etc. In step S113, a port output process is performed to output data corresponding to the I/O device from the input/output port 104. In step S114, the values of each register that were saved to the backup area in the previous step S101 are restored to the corresponding register in the CPU 102. Thereafter, in step S115, an interrupt permission process is performed to permit the next timer interrupt, and this series of timer interrupt processes is terminated.

Next, the normal processing that performs the main control related to the game will be explained based on the flowchart in Figure 15.

First, in step S201, an interrupt permission process is performed to permit the next timer interrupt. In step S202, a pre-start process is performed to enable play. In the pre-start process, the system waits until the display control device 81 and other devices have finished initializing. When the initialization of the display control device 81 and other devices has finished, the system performs the game management process shown in steps S203 to S215.

As part of the game management process, in step S203, various game information and other data (e.g., random number values used in the previous game) stored in the RAM 106 are cleared. Then, in step S204, a start waiting process is performed.

In the start waiting process, it is determined whether any replay winning was achieved in the previous game. If any replay winning was achieved, an automatic insertion process is performed to automatically insert virtual medals in the same number as the previous bet number, and the start waiting process is terminated. Specifically, for example, if a replay winning is achieved in a 3-bet game, a process to automatically insert three virtual medals is performed, and if a replay winning is achieved in a 1-bet game, a process to automatically insert one virtual medal is performed.

In the automatic insertion process, virtual medals are inserted without reducing the number of virtual medals displayed on the credit display unit 60. In other words, if any replay win was achieved in the previous game, the player can play the current game without reducing the number of medals he owns and without inserting any medals.

If no replay win has been achieved, a sensor abnormality checking process is performed to check whether any abnormality has occurred in the sensor reading results obtained in the sensor monitoring process step S107 of the timer interrupt process, and if an abnormality has occurred, an abnormality occurrence process is performed to put the slot machine 10 into an error state and notify the occurrence of the error. This error state is maintained until the reset switch 72 is operated. If the sensor reading results are normal, a determination is made as to whether the settlement switch 59 has been operated, and if the settlement switch 59 has been operated, a medal return process is performed to pay out the same number of medals as the credited virtual medals.

When the medal return process is being carried out, a command indicating that the process is being carried out or has started is set and sent to the display control device 81. This allows the display control device 81 to know that the medal return process is being carried out, and the auxiliary display unit 65 displays text such as "Settlement in progress" and the speaker 64 outputs a predetermined sound effect. This notification allows the player to know that the medal return process (settlement process) is being carried out. This notification continues until the medal return process is completed.

After the medal return process is completed or if the settlement switch 59 has not been operated, it is determined whether medals have been inserted or the credit insertion switches 56-58 have been operated between the previous start waiting process and the current start waiting process, and if either has been done, a medal insertion process is carried out to change the number of bets, etc., and the start waiting process ends. Also, if neither medals have been inserted nor the credit insertion switches 56-58 have been operated between the previous start waiting process and the current start waiting process, the start waiting process ends as is.

After the start waiting process is completed, in step S205, it is determined whether the number of medals bet has reached the specified number. In this slot machine 10, the specified number in the CB state is set to "2", and the specified numbers in game states other than the CB state (specifically, the normal game state, the first RT state, the second RT state, the third RT state, and the BB state) are set to "1" and "3". In other words, in the CB state, a positive determination is made in step S205 on the condition that the number of medals bet is "2", and in other states than the CB state, a positive determination is made in step S205 on the condition that the number of medals bet is "1" or "3". In other words, in game states other than the CB state, if medals have not been bet, or if medals have been bet but the number of medals is "2", a negative determination is made in step S205. If the number of medals bet has not reached the specified number, the process returns to the start waiting process of step S204, and the process from the sensor abnormality confirmation process onwards is performed.

If the number of bets has reached the specified number, the mode transition notification process is executed in step S206. Such mode transition notification process will be described in detail later.

After the processing of step S206 has been performed, a bet command including information on the processing result of step S206 and information on the number of bets that was determined to be positive in step S205 is set as an output target to the display control device 81, which acts as a sub-control device. The command set here is output to the display control device 81 in step S110 in the timer interrupt processing. The processing of the display control device 81 that receives the bet command will be explained in detail later.

After executing the process of step S207, it is determined in step S208 whether the start lever 41 has been operated. If the start lever 41 has not been operated, the process returns to the start waiting process of step S204, and the process from the sensor abnormality confirmation process onwards is carried out.

On the other hand, when the start lever 41 is operated, it means that a start command has been issued to start the game, since the game can be started when the start lever 41 is operated under the condition that a prescribed number of medals have been bet. In such a case, in step S209, an effective line setting process is performed to set the combination line corresponding to the number of bets as an effective line. That is, in a 3-bet game, only the right-downward line L4 is set as an effective line, and in a 2-bet game, the lower line L3 and the right-downward line L4 are set as effective lines. Also, in a 1-bet game, the bent line L6 is set as an effective line. In step S210, the medal passage switching solenoid 46a is switched to a non-excited state to prohibit bet acceptance. After that, the lottery process in step S211, the reel control process in step S212, the medal payout process in step S213, the RT state process in step S214, and the bonus state process in step S215 are executed in order, and then the process returns to step S203.

Next, the lottery process in step S211 will be explained based on the flowchart in FIG. 16.

In step S301, a random number is obtained to be used when determining whether a winning combination has been achieved. In this slot machine 10, when the start lever 41 is operated, the hardware circuitry latches the value of the free-run counter at that time. The free-run counter generates random numbers between 0 and 65535, and the CPU 102 stores the value latched by the hardware circuitry in the RAM 106 after confirming the operation of the start lever 41. With this configuration, it is possible to quickly obtain a random number when the start lever 41 is operated, and it is possible to avoid problems such as synchronization. The hardware circuitry of this slot machine 10 is configured to latch the value of the free-run counter each time the start lever 41 is operated.

After obtaining the random number, in step S302, a lottery table is selected to determine whether the winning combination has been achieved. The slot machine 10 has six game states, broadly categorized as a normal game state, a first RT state, a second RT state, a third RT state, a BB state, and a CB state, and a lottery table is set for each game state.

That is, in step S302, the current gaming state of the slot machine 10 is determined based on the number of bets and the setting flag set in the state information storage area 106c, and a lottery table corresponding to the number of bets and the gaming state is selected. For example, if the number of bets is "3" and the setting flag is not set in the state information storage area 106c, it is determined that the current gaming state is the normal gaming state, and a lottery table for the normal gaming state is selected. In addition, in this slot machine 10, six winning probabilities from "Setting 1" to "Setting 6" are prepared in advance, and it is possible to set which winning probability is used to execute the internal processing by inserting the setting key into the setting key insertion hole and turning it on, and performing a predetermined operation. In step S302, when the setting state is "Setting 1", a lottery table with the lowest expected value of medal payout is selected, and when the setting state is "Setting 6", a lottery table with the highest expected value of medal payout is selected.

Here we provide additional information about the process for setting the winning probability.

The winning probability setting process is executed in the main process that is started by the main control device 101 when the power is turned on. More specifically, the winning probability setting process is started after the initialization process when the power is turned on in a state where the setting key detection sensor 73a detects that the setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion hole and turned ON. In the winning probability setting process, the setting value is updated by one for each operation of the start lever 41 as a predetermined operation, and for example, the setting value is updated so that "setting 1" → "setting 2" → "setting 3" → "setting 4" → "setting 5" → "setting 6" → "setting 1" every time the start lever 41 is operated once. Note that each setting value is displayed, for example, on the credit display unit 60, and the display is updated each time the setting value is updated. Then, based on a decision operation such as turning OFF the setting key detection sensor 73a or operating the first credit insertion switch 56, the setting value at that time is set as the current setting value, and the winning probability setting process is terminated. Based on the termination of the winning probability setting process, the display of the credit display unit 60 is also terminated. The setting value set in the winning probability setting process is stored in RAM 106 until the next winning probability setting process is started. In step S302, a lottery table selection process is performed based on the stored setting value.

The lottery table will be briefly explained. Figure 17 is a lottery table for the normal game mode selected in the normal game mode of "Setting 3". The lottery table has index values IV set, and each index value IV is uniquely associated with a winning combination and has a point value PV set.

After the lottery table is selected, in step S303, the index value IV is set to 1, and in the following step S304, a judgment value DV is set to be used when judging whether the hand is a win or a loss. In this judgment value setting process, the point value PV corresponding to the current index value IV is added to the current judgment value DV to set a new judgment value DV. Note that in the initial judgment value setting process, the random number value acquired in step S301 is set as the current judgment value DV, and the point value PV corresponding to the current index value IV (1) is added to this random number value to set the new judgment value DV.

After that, in step S305, the winning combination corresponding to the index value IV is judged. In the winning combination judgment, it is judged whether the judgment value DV exceeds 65535. If it exceeds 65535, it is judged in step S306 whether the first BB, the second BB, or the CB is won. Specifically, it is judged whether the index value IV (IV = 32 to 52) including any of the first BB, the second BB, or the CB is judged in step S305 in a positive manner. If the judgment in step S306 is positive, a process is performed in step S307 to set the corresponding bonus winning flag (first BB winning flag, second BB winning flag, CB winning flag) in the winning flag storage area 106a. If the judgment in step S306 is negative, or after the processing in step S307 is performed, a process is performed in step S308 to set the winning flag of each small winning combination corresponding to the index value IV judged in a positive manner in step S305 in the winning flag storage area 106a. For example, if the judgment value DV exceeds 65535 when IV=32, the 1st BB winning flag is set in step S307, and the 28th small win flag, the 33rd small win flag, and the 35th small win flag are set in step S308. Also, if the judgment value DV exceeds 65535 when IV=15, winning flags indicating that the 30th and 41st small wins have been won are set in the winning flag storage area 106a in step S308.

Incidentally, if the winning flag that has been set is not a winning flag indicating that the first BB has been won (first BB winning flag) or a winning flag indicating that the second BB has been won (second BB winning flag), the winning flag set in the winning flag storage area 106a is reset after the game in which the corresponding selection flag is set ends (see S203 in normal processing). On the other hand, if the winning flag is a first BB winning flag or a second BB winning flag, these winning flags are reset on the condition that the corresponding winning has been achieved. In other words, the first BB winning flag and the second BB winning flag may be valid over multiple games.

In addition, in steps S306 to S308 when the 1st BB winning flag or the 2nd BB winning flag is carried over, if a combination other than the 1st BB, 2nd BB, or CB is won, the corresponding winning flag is set, and if a combination other than the 1st BB, 2nd BB, or CB is not won, the corresponding winning flag is not set.

That is, for example, in a state where the 1st BB winning flag is carried over, if the judgment value DV exceeds 65535 when the index value IV = 32, the 1st BB winning flag is not set, and the 28th small win flag, the 33rd small win flag, and the 35th small win flag are set. Also, in a state where the 1st BB winning flag is carried over, if the judgment value DV exceeds 65535 when the index value IV = 33, for example, the 2nd BB winning flag is not set, and the 28th small win flag, the 33rd small win flag, and the 35th small win flag are set.

It is also possible to prepare a separate lottery table for when the first BB winning flag or the second BB winning flag is carried over, and perform lottery processing using the separately prepared lottery table when the first BB winning flag or the second BB winning flag is carried over. In this case, it is preferable to set each index value IV and point value PV in the separately prepared lottery table so that the first BB, second BB, and CB are not won.

If the judgment value DV does not exceed 65535 in step S305, this means that the hand corresponding to the index value IV has not been won. In this case, the index value IV is incremented by 1 in step S309, and in the following step S310, it is determined whether or not there is a hand corresponding to the index value IV, i.e., whether or not there is a target for which a win/loss judgment should be made. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the index value IV incremented by 1 exceeds the maximum value of the index value IV set in the lottery table. If there is a target for which a win/loss judgment should be made, the process returns to step S304, and the judgment of the hand continues. At this time, in step S304, the point value PV corresponding to the current index value IV is added to the judgment value DV used to judge the win/loss of the previous hand (i.e., the current judgment value DV) to obtain a new judgment value DV, and in step S305, the hand is judged to be a win/loss based on the judgment value DV.

When the winning combination is judged using the lottery table shown in Figure 17, the probability of winning a normal replay (probability of winning when IV = 1) is about 1 in 7.3, the probability of winning a strong cherry (probability of winning when IV = 13) is about 1 in 300, and the probability of winning a weak cherry (probability of winning when IV = 14) is about 1 in 183. The probability of winning a strong watermelon (probability of winning when IV = 15) is about 1 in 300, the probability of winning a weak watermelon (probability of winning when IV = 16) is about 1 in 218, the probability of winning Chance A (probability of winning when IV = 17) is about 1 in 252, and the probability of winning Chance B (probability of winning when IV = 18) is about 1 in 252. The probability of winning the middle bell (probability of winning when IV = 19) is approximately 1 in 32,800, and the probability of winning the no-question bell (probability of winning when IV = 20) is approximately 1 in 65,500. The probability of winning the forward push bell 1, forward push bell 2, pinch push bell 1, and pinch push bell 2 (probability of winning when IV = 21 to 24) is approximately 1 in 43.7, and the probability of winning the middle push bell 1, middle push bell 2, right push bell 1, and right push bell 2 (probability of winning when IV = 25 to 28) is approximately 1 in 21.8. The probability of winning a strong cherry overlap 1 (probability of winning when IV = 32) is about 1 in 21,800, the probability of winning a strong cherry overlap 2 (probability of winning when IV = 33) is about 1 in 21,800, the probability of winning a weak cherry overlap 1 (probability of winning when IV = 34) is about 1 in 32,800, and the probability of winning a weak cherry overlap 2 (probability of winning when IV = 35) is about 1 in 32,800. The probability of winning a strong watermelon overlap 1 (probability of winning when IV = 36) is about 1 in 32,800, and the probability of winning a strong watermelon overlap 2 (probability of winning when IV = 37) is about 1 in 32,800. The probability of winning a weak watermelon overlap 1 (probability of winning when IV = 38) is about 1 in 65,500, and the probability of winning a weak watermelon overlap 2 (probability of winning when IV = 39) is about 1 in 65,500. The probability of winning Chance A Duplicate 1, Chance A Duplicate 2, Chance B Duplicate 1, and Chance B Duplicate 2 (probability of winning when IV = 40 to 43) is approximately 1 in 32,800. The probability of winning Middle Bell Duplicate 1 and Middle Bell Duplicate 2 (probability of winning when IV = 44, 45) is approximately 1 in 21,800. The probability of winning Special Lip A Duplicate 1 (probability of winning when IV = 46) is approximately 1 in 1,010, and the probability of winning Special Lip A Duplicate 2 (probability of winning when IV = 47) is approximately 1 in 1,310. The probability of winning Special Lip AB Duplicate 1 (probability of winning when IV = 48) is approximately 1 in 1,010, and the probability of winning Special Lip AB Duplicate 2 (probability of winning when IV = 49) is approximately 1 in 1,310. The probability of winning 1st BB or 2nd BB alone (probability of winning when IV = 50, 51) is approximately 1 in 32,800. The probability of winning CB (probability of winning when IV = 52) is approximately 1 in 19.9. Also, the probability of not winning any of the roles is approximately 1 in 1.96.

In addition, in the lottery table for the normal game mode, 0 is set for the point values PV of IV = 2 to 12, 29 to 31, and 53 to 56. Therefore, in the normal game mode, these index values IV do not result in a win.

After the winning flag is set in step S308, or if it is determined in step S310 that there are no judgment targets to be judged, this means that the judgment of the winning or losing role has been completed. In such a case, the process proceeds to step S311, and a lottery result response process is performed. In the lottery result response process, processing is performed to determine whether or not to shift the game state depending on the results of the lottery in steps S301 to S310, and processing is performed to notify the player of the push order role. In addition, in the lottery result response process, a freeze lottery process is performed to determine whether or not to execute a freeze effect that disables the operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 for a specified period of time. The lottery result response process will be explained in detail later.

After executing the process of step S311, a lottery result command is set in step S312. Here, the lottery result command is a command sent to the display control device 81 to inform the result of the winning/losing role determination. However, in normal processing, various commands such as the lottery result command are simply set in the ring buffer, and no command is sent to the display control device 81. The command is sent to the display control device 81 in the command output process (step S110) of the timer interrupt process described above.

Then, in step S313, a stop information setting process is executed to set symbols that can be stopped on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R based on the lottery result of the current game. In the stop information setting process, stop symbol information corresponding to a winning combination is set based on the winning flag set in steps S306 to S308. For example, when a strong cherry is won (won when IV=13) and the strong cherry winning flag is set, the stop symbol information is set so that symbols corresponding to the 28th small combination, the 32nd small combination, the 35th small combination, and the 1st BB winning are allowed to be stopped on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R. In addition, when a strong cherry overlap 1 is won (won when IV=32) and the strong cherry winning flag and the 1st BB winning flag are set, the stop symbol information is set so that symbols corresponding to the 28th small combination, the 33rd small combination, the 35th small combination, and the 1st BB winning are allowed to be stopped on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R.

In addition, in the stop information setting process of step S313, the stop symbol information is set so that when the first BB and the second BB are won, the symbols corresponding to the reach symbol can be stopped on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. The reach symbol is a symbol (stop symbol) that does not stop when the first BB and the second BB are not won, but stops only when the first BB and the second BB are won, and is a miss symbol that does not correspond to any winning combination. Therefore, from the player's perspective, when the symbols on the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R corresponding to the reach symbol stop within each of the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R, the winning of the first BB and the second BB is confirmed. In this sense, the reach symbol stop can be said to be a confirmation performance of the first BB and the second BB.

Now, referring to FIG. 18, an example of a reach pattern when only the downward-right line L4 is set as the active line will be described. Note that the numbers in parentheses in FIG. 18 indicate the symbol numbers. In this embodiment, multiple reach patterns including reach pattern A and reach pattern B are set.

As shown in Figure 18(a), reach pattern A is a stopping result in which the seventh "red bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the second "LUCKY" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the sixth "second replay" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the activated line L4. When viewed from the player's perspective, this reach pattern A is a stopping result in which the fifth "LUCKY" symbol on the left reel 32L, the second "LUCKY" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the eighth "red 7" symbol on the right reel 32R line up on an upward sloping line to the right. As shown in FIG. 18(b), reach pattern B is a stop result in which the 13th "Youth" symbol on the left reel 32L, the 16th "Watermelon" symbol on the center reel 32M, and the 15th "Youth" symbol on the right reel 32R all stop on the pay line L4.

In this embodiment, reach eyes other than reach eyes A and reach eyes B are provided, and the slot machine 10 is provided with three or more types of reach eyes. In other words, the above-mentioned reach eyes A and reach eyes B are some of the reach eyes set as the stopping symbol information. Information regarding the reach eyes is stored in a reach eye information storage area of the ROM 105, and in step S313, the information stored in this area is referenced to set the stopping symbol information regarding the reach eyes.

Returning to the explanation of the lottery process in FIG. 16, in step S314, when multiple stoppable symbol information is set in step S313, a priority setting process is executed to set the priority order. For example, when multiple roles out of the small role, replay, and bonus roles are won, the following priority order is set. When a small role and a bonus are won, the priority order is set so that the small role win takes priority, and when a small role win cannot be won, a bonus win takes priority. When a replay and a bonus are won, the priority order is set so that the replay win takes priority.

For example, if Strong Cherry Duplicate 1 is won and the stop symbol information corresponding to the 28th, 33rd, 35th, and 1st BB wins is set, the priority is set so that the 28th, 33rd, and 35th small wins take precedence over the 1st BB win. Also, if Special Replay A Duplicate 1 is won and the stop symbol information corresponding to the 9th replay and 1st BB wins is set, the priority is set so that the 9th replay win takes precedence over the 1st BB win. And, for example, if the 1st BB win is carried over and a normal replay is won and the stop symbol information corresponding to the 1st BB win and 1st replay win is set, the priority is set so that the 1st replay win takes precedence over the 1st BB win.

Here, if a replay is won, the winning symbol combination is set so that one of the winning replays is guaranteed to win. In other words, if a replay is won, a replay win is guaranteed and there will be no missed wins. Therefore, if the stop symbol information for replays and bonuses is set, one of the set replays will always win and a bonus win will never be achieved.

In addition, when multiple small wins or multiple replays overlap to win, which symbol corresponding to the small win or replay will stop on the active line depends on the timing of the stop operation. For example, if a strong watermelon is won and the stop symbol information corresponding to the 30th and 41st small wins is set, as described above, the target symbol on the left reel 32L is the same as the "watermelon" symbol for the 30th and 41st small wins. Therefore, depending on the timing of the stop operation of the left reel 32L, it is not determined which small win will be established. On the other hand, the target symbols on the middle reel 32M and the right reel 32R are both "red bell" symbols for the 30th small win, and "cherry" and "black BAR" symbols for the middle reel 32M and "watermelon" symbols for the 41st small win. For example, in a 3-bet game, if the middle stop switch 43 is operated to stop on the middle reel 32M when the 4th "watermelon" symbol to the 7th "red bell" symbol reach the middle row, it is possible to stop both the 7th "red bell" symbol, which is the target symbol for the 30th minor win, and the "black BAR" symbol, which is the target symbol for the 41st minor win, in the middle row on the active line. In this case, in this embodiment, the stop symbol information is set so that the symbol with the least number of slips is stopped first. As a result, in the above case, the stop drive control is performed so that the "red bell" symbol stops in the middle row, the 41st minor win is not achieved, and the 30th minor win is possible.

On the other hand, if the middle stop switch 43 is operated to stop when the 8th "black BAR" to 12th "red bell" symbols on the middle reel 32M reach the middle row, it is possible to stop the 8th "black BAR" and 11th "cherry" symbols, which are the target symbols for the 41st minor win, and the 12th "red bell" symbol, which is the target symbol for the 30th minor win, in the middle row. In this case, the stop symbol information is set to prioritize stopping symbols with fewer slips, so the 8th "black BAR" or 11th "cherry" symbol stops in the middle row, the 30th minor win is not achieved, and the 41st minor win is possible.

The same is true for the right reel 32R, and depending on the timing of the stop operation of the right stop switch 44, the stop symbol information is set so that the symbol with the least number of slips between the "red bell" symbol, which is the target symbol for the 30th minor win, and the "watermelon" symbol, which is the target symbol for the 41st minor win, stops on the lower row, which is the active line. Note that, if the right stop switch 44 is stopped at the timing when the 6th "first replay" symbol and the 7th "black BAR" symbol reach the active position on the right reel 32R, neither the "watermelon" symbol nor the "red bell" symbol can be stopped, and in this case, neither of the minor wins are achieved, resulting in a so-called missed win.

After executing the process of step S314, the first section display process is executed in step S315, and then the lottery process ends. The first section display process is a process related to the display control of the indication monitor 68, and this process will be described in detail later.

Next, the reel control process in step S212 will be explained based on the flowchart in FIG.

In the reel control process, first, in step S401, a spin effect process is performed. The spin effect process is a process for performing an effect using reel control during an invalid period, based on the result of the freeze lottery performed in the lottery result response process in step S311 above. The spin effect process will be described in detail later. In the following step S402, a spin start process is performed to start the rotation of each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R.

In the spin start process, it is checked whether a predetermined wait time (for example, 4.1 seconds) has elapsed since the reels started spinning in the previous game, and if not, it waits until the wait time has elapsed. If the wait time has elapsed, the wait time for the next game is reset, and a motor control initialization process is performed to set spin start information in the motor control storage area provided in the RAM 106. By performing this process, the stepping motor acceleration process is started in the stepping motor control process (step S106) of the timer interrupt process, and each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R starts spinning. For this reason, even if the player bets a specified number of medals and operates the start lever 41, each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R may not start spinning immediately. After that, it waits until each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R spins at a constant speed at a predetermined speed, and the spin start process is terminated. In addition, when the rotation speed of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R reaches a constant speed, the CPU 102 lights up the lamps (not shown) of each stop switch 42-44 to notify the player that it is possible to issue a stop command.

Following the spin start process, in step S403, it is determined whether any of the stop switches 42 to 44 has been operated. If none of the stop switches 42 to 44 have been operated, the process waits until any of the stop switches 42 to 44 have been operated. If it is determined that any of the stop switches 42 to 44 have been operated, the process proceeds to step S404, where it is determined whether the stop switch corresponding to the spinning reel has been operated, i.e., whether a stop command has been generated. If a stop command has not been generated, the process returns to step S403, where it waits until any of the stop switches 42 to 44 have been operated. If a stop command has been generated, a stop command command is set in step S405. Here, the stop command command is a command sent to the display control device 81 to allow the display control device 81 to know which stop switch has been operated to generate the stop command. If a stop command command has been set, the stop control process shown in steps S406 to S412 is performed to stop the spinning reel.

In step S406, the symbol number of the reaching symbol that has reached the base position (lower in this embodiment) at the timing when the stop switch is operated is confirmed. Specifically, the symbol number of the reaching symbol that has reached the base position is confirmed by the number of excitation pulses output from the time when the detection signal of the reel index sensor is input. In the following step S407, the number of slips of the reel to be stopped this time is calculated based on the stop information stored in the stop information storage area 106b. In this slot machine 10, five stop modes are prepared as stop modes for stopping each reel 32L, 32M, 32R when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated: a stop mode in which the reaching symbol that has reached the base position is stopped as it is, a stop mode in which the corresponding reel is stopped after sliding for one symbol, a stop mode in which the corresponding reel is stopped after sliding for two symbols, a stop mode in which the corresponding reel is stopped after sliding for three symbols, and a stop mode in which the corresponding reel is stopped after sliding for four symbols. Therefore, in step S407, the slip count is calculated as one of the values from 0 to 4 based on the stop information stored in the stop information storage area 106b.

Then, in step S408, the calculated slip count is added to the symbol number of the reached symbol to determine the symbol number of the stopped symbol that will actually stop at the base position. In step S409, it is determined whether the symbol number of the reached symbol of the reel that should be stopped this time is equal to the symbol number of the stopped symbol, and if so, in step S410, a reel stop process is performed to stop the rotation of the reel. Then, in step S411, it is determined whether all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped. If all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have not stopped, in step S412, a second stop information setting process is performed, and the process returns to step S403.

The second stop information setting process is a process for changing the stop information stored in the stop information storage area 106b of the RAM 106 after the reels have stopped. In the second stop information setting process, the stop information is changed based on the winning flag that has been set and the stop results of the stopped reels. In this slot machine 10, for example, when a win occurs when IV=24 to 31, that is, when a win occurs on forward push bell 1, forward push bell 2, pinch push bell 1, pinch push bell 2, center push bell 1, center push bell 2, right push bell 1, and right push bell 2 (hereinafter, these are also collectively referred to as "push order bells") (see FIG. 17), the second stop information setting process is performed to change the winning mode established by the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 that generated the stop command.

Figure 20 is an explanatory diagram showing the correspondence between winning roles, the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44, and the winning form that is achieved. For example, if the center push bell 1 is won, the stop information is set so that the second, seventh, or ninth small role win is achieved when the left stop switch 42 is operated first, the stop information is set so that the first small role win is achieved when the middle stop switch 43 is operated first, and the stop information is set so that the second, seventh, or ninth small role win is achieved when the right stop switch 44 is operated first. However, even if the stop information is set in this way, the corresponding win may not be achieved depending on the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44.

The arrangement of symbols on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R will be briefly described. In this slot machine 10, in a game state other than the CB state (3-bet game), the reels 32L, 32M, 32R can be stopped after sliding a maximum of four symbols from the timing when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated, and only the right-downward line L4 is set as an active line. Therefore, when the same symbols are arranged on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R with an interval of four symbols or less, when a winning symbol is formed, the winning symbol can be stopped on the active line regardless of the timing of the operation of the stop switch 43. On the other hand, for symbols arranged so that a section of five symbols or more is formed, the player needs to operate the stop switches 42 to 44 while aiming at the symbol in order to stop it on the active line.

As an example, a case will be described in which the center push bell 1 is won and the left stop switch 42, the center stop switch 43, and the right stop switch 44 are operated in that order. In such a case, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are controlled to stop in order to achieve the second small win, the seventh small win, or the ninth small win.

The second minor winning symbols on the left reel 32L are the "red bell" symbol and the "white bell" symbol. The "red bell" symbol and the "white bell" symbol also function as the seventh minor winning symbol and the ninth minor winning symbol. The second minor winning symbols (the seventh minor winning symbols and the ninth minor winning symbols) are arranged on the left reel 32L so that the interval between them is four symbols or less. Therefore, when the left stop switch 42 is operated first, the "red bell" symbol or the "white bell" symbol stops on the top row regardless of the operation timing. For example, when the left stop switch 42 is operated at the timing when the "cherry" symbol number 4 on the left reel 32L has reached the middle row, the "red bell" symbol number 7 stops on the top row as shown in FIG. 21(a). As a result, there is still room for the second, seventh, or ninth small win to occur on the downward-sloping right line L4.

The second small win symbol on the middle reel 32M is a "white BAR" symbol. On the middle reel 32M, the "white BAR" symbol is only located at the 18th position. The seventh small win symbol on the middle reel 32M is a "red 7" symbol. On the middle reel 32M, the "red 7" symbol is only located at the 14th position. And the ninth small win symbol on the middle reel 32M is a "cherry" symbol. On the middle reel 32M, the "cherry" symbol is only located at the 11th position. Therefore, depending on the operation timing of the middle stop switch 43, the second small win symbol, the seventh small win symbol, or the ninth small win symbol may stop on an active line, or none of the second small win symbol, the seventh small win symbol, or the ninth small win symbol may stop on an active line.

Specifically, if the middle stop switch 43 is operated when any one of the "First Replay" symbols (No. 13) to the "First Replay" symbols (No. 17) has reached the bottom row, the "White BAR" symbol, which is the second small win symbol, stops in the middle row. As a result, there is room for the second small win symbol to be established on the right-downward line L4. If the middle stop switch 43 is operated when any one of the "Second Replay" symbols (No. 9) to the "First Replay" symbols (No. 13) has reached the bottom row, the "Red 7" symbol, which is the seventh small win symbol, stops in the middle row, as shown in FIG. 21(b). As a result, there is room for the seventh small win symbol to be established on the right-downward line L4. If the middle stop switch 43 is operated when any one of the "White Bell" symbols (No. 6) to the "Youth" symbols (No. 10) has reached the bottom row, the "Cherry" symbol, which is the ninth small win symbol, stops in the middle row. If the middle stop switch 43 is operated at any other time, the second, seventh, and ninth minor win symbols cannot be stopped in the middle row even if the middle reel 32M is stopped after sliding four symbols. If the middle stop switch 43 is operated at such a time, the number 2 "LUCKY" symbol or the number 6 "white bell" symbol will stop in the middle row.

When the 7th minor winning symbol on the middle reel 32M stops in the middle row, the second stop information setting process changes the stop information so that the 7th minor winning symbol can be achieved.

The seventh minor winning symbol on the right reel 32R is a "white bell" symbol. On the right reel 32R, the "white bell" symbol is only located at the number 10 position. Therefore, depending on the timing of the operation of the right stop switch 44, the seventh minor winning symbol may or may not stop on the active line. Specifically, if the right stop switch 44 is operated when any of the "first replay" symbol (number 6) to the "white bell" symbol (number 10) has reached the bottom row, the "white bell" symbol, which is the seventh minor winning symbol, stops on the bottom row, as shown in FIG. 21(c). As a result, the seventh minor winning symbol is established on the right downward line L4. If the right stop switch 44 is operated at any other time, the "watermelon" symbol or the "first replay" symbol stops on the bottom row. For example, if the right stop switch 44 is operated when the No. 3 "Second Replay" symbol reaches the bottom row, the No. 4 "Watermelon" symbol stops at the bottom row, as shown in FIG. 21(d). The combination of the "Red Bell" symbol, the "Red 7" symbol, and the "Watermelon" symbol from the left is a transition result, as shown in FIG. 11.

When the 9th minor winning symbol on the middle reel 32M stops in the middle row, the second stop information setting process changes the stop information so that the 9th minor winning symbol can be achieved.

The 9th minor symbol on the right reel 32R is a "Youth" symbol. On the right reel 32R, the "Youth" symbol is located at the 15th position. Therefore, depending on the operation timing of the right stop switch 44, the 9th minor symbol may or may not stop on the active line. Specifically, if the right stop switch 44 is operated at a timing when any of the "First Replay" symbol (11th) to the "Youth" symbol (15th) has reached the bottom row, the "Youth" symbol, which is the 9th minor symbol, stops at the bottom row. As a result, the 9th minor symbol wins on the right downward line L4. If the right stop switch 44 is operated at any other timing, the "Watermelon" symbol or the "First Replay" symbol stops at the bottom row. The combination of the "White Bell" symbol ("Red Bell" symbol), the "Cherry" symbol, and the "Watermelon" symbol ("First Replay" symbol) from the left is a transition result as shown in FIG. 11.

When the second small win symbol on the middle reel 32M stops in the middle row, the second stop information setting process changes the stop information so that the second small win can be achieved.

The second small win symbol on the right reel 32R is a "white BAR" symbol. On the right reel 32R, the "white BAR" symbol is located at the 18th position. Therefore, depending on the timing of the operation of the right stop switch 44, the second small win symbol may or may not stop on the active line. Specifically, if the right stop switch 44 is operated when any of the "watermelon" symbol at 14 to the "white BAR" symbol at 18 has reached the bottom row, the "white BAR" symbol, which is the second small win symbol, stops at the bottom row. As a result, the second small win is established on the right downward line L4. If the right stop switch 44 is operated at any other time, the "watermelon" symbol or the "first replay" symbol stops at the bottom row. From the left, the combination of the "white bell" symbol ("red bell" symbol), the "white BAR" symbol, and the "watermelon" symbol ("first replay" symbol) is a transition result, as shown in Figure 11.

If the second, seventh and ninth minor win symbols on the middle reel 32M do not stop in the middle row, i.e. if the "LUCKY" or "white bell" symbols on the middle reel 32M stop in the middle row, the second stop information setting process changes the stop information so that the "watermelon" or "first replay" symbol stops in the lower row.

The "watermelon" and "first replay" symbols are arranged on the right reel 32R so that the distance between each of the "watermelon" and "first replay" symbols is four symbols or less. Therefore, when the right stop switch 44 is operated, the "watermelon" or "first replay" symbol stops on the lower row regardless of the timing of the operation. The combination of the "white bell" symbol ("red bell" symbol), "LUCKY" symbol ("white bell" symbol), and "watermelon" symbol ("first replay" symbol) from the left is a transition result as shown in FIG. 11.

In this way, if center push bell 1 is won and the left stop switch 42 → center stop switch 43 → right stop switch 44 are operated in that order, the second small win will be made, the seventh small win will be made, the ninth small win will be made, or the transition result will stop.

Next, we will explain an example in which the center push bell 1 is won and the center stop switch 43, left stop switch 42, and right stop switch 44 are operated in that order. In such a case, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are controlled to stop in order to achieve the first small win.

On the middle reel 32M, the "red bell" symbols, which are the first minor symbol, are arranged so that the distance between each "red bell" symbol is four symbols or less. Therefore, when the middle stop switch 43 is operated first, the "red bell" symbols will stop in the middle row regardless of the timing of the operation.

On the left reel 32L, the first minor symbols, the "red bell" and "white bell", are arranged so that the distance between each of the first minor symbols is four symbols or less. Therefore, when the left stop switch 42 is operated second, the "red bell" or "white bell" symbol stops on the top row regardless of the timing of the operation.

On the right reel 32R, the first minor winning symbols, the "red bell" symbol and the "white bell" symbol, are arranged so that the distance between the first minor winning symbols is four symbols or less. Therefore, when the right stop switch 44 is operated third, the "red bell" symbol or the "white bell" symbol stops on the bottom row regardless of the timing of the operation.

As described above, if center push bell 1 is won and the center stop switch 43, left stop switch 42, and right stop switch 44 are operated in that order, the first small prize will be won regardless of the timing of the operations.

If the push order bell is won, and the stop switches 42-44 are operated in one or two pre-defined operating sequences, the first small prize will be won regardless of the timing of the operation, and if the stop switches 42-44 are operated in any other operating sequence, a small prize will be won or the transition result will stop on an active line depending on the timing of the operation. Incidentally, if the middle bell is won, the 38th small prize will be won regardless of the operating sequence and timing, and if the no-question bell is won, the first small prize will be won regardless of the operating sequence and timing.

In addition, when a reach pattern is set as the stop symbol information, the stop control process is performed as follows. As described above, in this embodiment, the number of slips from when the stop operation is performed until the symbols stop can be set to a maximum of four symbols. For example, if the stop switch 42 is operated within the period from when the first "white bell" symbol on the left reel 32L reaches the base position until the fifth "LUCKY" symbol reaches it, the fifth "LUCKY" symbol stops on the lower row of the left reel 32L (display window 26L). In addition, if the stop switch 43 is operated within the period from when the 18th "white BAR" symbol on the center reel 32M reaches the base position until the first "youth" symbol reaches the base position, the first "youth" symbol stops on the lower row of the center reel 32M (display window 26M). Furthermore, if the stop switch 44 is operated within the period from when the second "red bell" symbol on the right reel 32R reaches the base position until the sixth "first replay" symbol reaches the base position, the sixth "first replay" symbol will stop on the lower row of the right reel 32R (display window 26R). As a result, as shown in FIG. 18(a), the seventh "red bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the second "LUCKY" symbol on the center reel 32M, and the sixth "second replay" symbol on the right reel 32R will stop on the pay line L4, and the reach eye A will stop.

If the stop switches 42 to 44 are not operated within the above period, the system performs stop control so that the reach eye A is not stopped, but the out-of-range eye corresponding to the operation timing of each stop switch 42 to 44 is stopped. In other words, the reach eye A is not stopped regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44, but is stopped only when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated at a specific operation timing.

Similarly, for reach pattern B shown in FIG. 18(b), the reel will only stop if stop switch 42 is operated within the period from when the seventh "red bell" symbol on the left reel 32L reaches the base position until the eleventh "first replay" symbol reaches the base position, stop switch 43 is operated within the period from when the eleventh "cherry" symbol on the center reel 32M reaches the base position until the fifteenth "red bell" symbol reaches the base position, and stop switch 44 is operated within the period from when the eleventh "first replay" symbol on the right reel 32R reaches the base position until the fifteenth "young man" symbol reaches the base position.

Incidentally, even if the stop switches 42 to 44 are not operated within the above period, if the operation timing matches the operation timing for a reach eye other than reach eye A and reach eye B, the reach eye corresponding to that operation timing will stop. Note that a miss that stops when operated with an operation timing that does not correspond to any reach eye is a miss that can also stop during normal times (when a bonus has not been won or is not in a carryover state).

Returning to the description of the reel control process in FIG. 19, if it is determined in step S411 that all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped, a payout determination process is performed in step S413. The payout determination process is a process for setting the number of medals to be paid out, with one of the conditions being that the winning combination is lined up on an active line. In the payout determination process, a combination of symbols formed on an active line is derived from the symbol numbers of the symbols stopped on the lower row of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R, and it is determined whether or not a winning combination is established on the active line. If a winning combination is established, it is further determined whether or not the winning combination corresponds to the winning flag set in the winning flag storage area 106a. If the winning combination corresponds to the winning flag, the winning combination and the payout number corresponding to the winning combination are set in the payout information storage area provided in the RAM 106. On the other hand, if the winning combination does not correspond to the winning flag, the slot machine 10 is put into an error state and an error occurrence notification process is performed. This error state is maintained until the reset switch 72 is operated.

After the payout determination process, the freeze release process is performed in step S414. The freeze release process includes processes such as canceling the execution of the freeze effect set in the freeze lottery process executed in the lottery result response process in step S311 (FIG. 16). In the following step S415, a winning result response process is performed. The winning result response process includes processes such as transitioning the game state based on the winning result. The freeze release process and the winning result response process will be explained in detail later.

After the winning result processing is performed, the second section display processing is executed in step S416. The second section display processing is processing related to the display control of the instruction monitor 68, and this processing will be explained in detail later. After that, in step S417, a winning result command is set so that the display control device 81 knows the winning combination in the current game, and the reel control processing is terminated.

Next, we will provide an overview of the medal payout process in step S213.

In the medal payout process, it is determined whether the payout number set in the payout information storage area is 0. If the payout number is 0, it means that the previous payout determination process determined that no small winning combination was achieved. In such a case, it is determined whether any of the first replay winning combination to the eighth replay winning combination was achieved, based on the winning combination set in the payout determination process. If none of the replay winning combinations was achieved, the medal payout process is terminated as is, and if any of the replay winning combinations was achieved, a replay setting process is performed to set the game state to a replay state, and the medal payout process is terminated. Note that in the start waiting process (step S204) described above, if it is determined that the current game state is a replay state, an automatic insertion process is performed.

On the other hand, if the payout number set in the payout information storage area is not 0, the system pays out medals in the same number as the payout number, and ends the medal payout process. Specifically, when the credit counter count value has not reached the upper limit (the number of medals stored is 50), the system adds the payout number to the credit counter count value, and displays the added value on the credit display unit 60. When the credit counter count value has reached the upper limit, or when the credit counter count value reaches the upper limit during the addition of the payout number, the system drives the medal payout rotating plate, and pays out medals from the hopper device 51 to the medal tray 50 via the medal discharge port 49. In addition, the medal payout process also performs a process of changing the payout number displayed on the payout number display unit 62 in accordance with the payout of medals. In addition, when the current game state is BB state, the system subtracts the payout number from the value of the remaining payout number counter described later, and subtracts the remaining payout number displayed on the remaining payout number display unit 61.

Next, the RT state processing in step S214 will be explained based on the flowchart in Figure 22.

In step S501, it is determined whether the transition result has stopped on the winning line. If the transition result has stopped, the process proceeds to step S502, where it is determined whether the current game state is a normal game state. If the current game state is a normal game state, the first RT setting flag is set in the state information storage area 106c of the RAM 106 in step S503. Then, this process is terminated. If it is determined in step S501 that the transition result has not stopped on the winning line, the process proceeds to step S504, where it is determined whether the second replay winning has been established based on the winning combination set in the previous payout determination process. If the second replay winning has been established, the RT setting flag set in the state information storage area 106c is cleared in step S505, and the first RT setting flag is set in step S503. Then, this process is terminated. Furthermore, if the transition result stops on a pay line in a game state other than the normal game state, the RT setting flag set in the state information storage area 106c is cleared in step S505, and the first RT setting flag is set in step S503, and this process ends.

If the first RT setting flag is set in step S503, the game state transitions to the first RT state. Then, in step S302 of the lottery process (Figure 16), it is determined that the current game state is the first RT state based on the fact that the first RT setting flag is set in the state information storage area 106c, and a lottery table for the first RT state is selected.

Figure 23 is a lottery table for the first RT state selected in the first RT state of "setting 3". When compared to the lottery table for the normal game state (see Figure 17), the lottery table for the first RT state has different point values PV for IV = 1 to 5, and the same point values PV are set for the other index values IV. For this reason, when using this lottery table to determine whether a combination is a win or lose, the probability of winning when IV = 6 to 56 is equal to the respective winning probabilities in the normal game state, the probability of winning when IV = 1 is approximately 1 in 67.0, and the probability of winning when IV = 2 to 5 is approximately 1 in 32.8. The probability of not winning any combination is approximately 1 in 1.94.

Here, as shown in FIG. 23, if a win occurs when IV=1, a normal replay win occurs; if a win occurs when IV=2, a first promotion replay 1 win occurs; if a win occurs when IV=3, a first promotion replay 2 win occurs; if a win occurs when IV=4, a first promotion replay 3 win occurs; and if a win occurs when IV=5, a first promotion replay 4 win occurs. The probability of winning when IV=1 to 5 is about 1 in 7.30. The probability of winning a normal replay under normal gaming conditions is also about 1 in 7.30. In other words, when the gaming condition transitions to the first RT condition, the odds of winning small roles, replays, and bonuses are the same as in the normal gaming condition, while the winning mode in which the replay privilege is awarded changes to one different from that in the normal gaming condition. More specifically, in the normal game state, only the first replay win, which does not transition the game state, is achieved, and in the first RT state, in addition to the first replay win, the third replay win, which transitions to the second RT state, is achieved.

In the second stop information setting process (step S409), in addition to the above-mentioned case where the push order bell is won, the stop information is set so as to change the winning pattern that is established depending on the operation sequence of the stop switches 42 to 44 that generated the stop command, even if the first promotion replay 1 to the first promotion replay 4 are won.

Figure 24 (a) is an explanatory diagram showing the correspondence between winning roles, the operation sequence of the stop switches 42 to 44, and the winning form that is achieved. Unlike when the push order bell is won, when the first promotion replay 1 to first promotion replay 4 are won, the first replay win or the third replay win is always achieved regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44. For the first promotion replay 1 to first promotion replay 4, one of the six operation sequences is associated with the third replay, and the other operation sequences are associated with the first replay.

In addition, in the first promotion replays 2 to 4, in addition to the first replay and the third replay, the sixth replay, seventh replay, and eighth replay are also allocated as winning roles. However, these sixth replay to eighth replay are not associated with any of the six operation sequences described above. Therefore, even if the sixth replay to eighth replay are winning in the first promotion replays 2 to 4, they will not win regardless of the operation sequence of the stop switches 42 to 44.

More specifically, for each of the first promotion replays 1 to 4, the first promotion replay 1 is assigned the first replay and the third replay, the first promotion replay 2 is assigned the sixth replay in addition to the first replay and the third replay, the first promotion replay 3 is assigned the seventh replay in addition to the first replay and the third replay, and the first promotion replay 4 is assigned the eighth replay in addition to the first replay and the third replay, but for any of the first promotion replays 1 to 4, the winning replay is either the first replay or the third replay. This is to make it difficult to understand the operation sequence that results in the third replay winning. That is, for example, if there is only one type of first promotion replay, then there will also be only one type of operation sequence corresponding to the third replay win, and when the first promotion replay is won, it may be possible to intentionally achieve the third replay win. Note that this relationship is not limited to the relationship between the first promotion replays 1 to 4, and the same can be said for other overlapping roles.

Returning to the explanation of the RT state processing, if it is determined in step S504 that the second replay winning combination has not been achieved, the process proceeds to step S506, where it is determined whether or not the third replay winning combination has been achieved, based on the winning combination set in the previous payout determination process. If the third replay winning combination has been achieved, the RT setting flag set in the state information storage area 106c is cleared in step S507, and the second RT setting flag is set in step S508, and this process ends.

If the second RT setting flag is set in step S508, the game state transitions to the second RT state. Then, in step S302 of the lottery process (Figure 16), it is determined that the current game state is the second RT state based on the fact that the second RT setting flag is set in the state information storage area 106c, and a lottery table for the second RT state is selected.

Figure 25 is a lottery table for the second RT state selected in the second RT state of "setting 3". When compared to the lottery table for the first RT state (see Figure 23), the lottery table for the second RT state has different point values PV for IV = 1 to 10, 55, and 56, and the same point value PV is set for the other index values IV. Here, the second RT state normal replay with IV = 55 is a normal replay role that can be won when the game state is the second RT state, and the reach-eye replay with IV = 56 is a replay role that functions as a reach-eye when the VB mode is won, which will be described later.

When the lottery table in FIG. 25 is used to determine whether a winning combination will result, the probability of winning when IV=11-54 is equal to the probability of each combination in the first RT state, the probability of winning when IV=1 is 0, there is no winning when IV=2-5, the probability of winning when IV=6-8 is approximately 1 in 10.5, the probability of winning when IV=9 and 10 are approximately 1 in 7.00, the probability of winning when IV=55 is approximately 1 in 21.8, and the probability of winning when IV=56 is approximately 1 in 33.6. The probability of losing and not winning any combination is approximately 1 in 150.

In other words, when the game transitions to the second RT state, the probability of a miss is lower compared to the normal game state and the first RT state, which gives the player an advantage. In addition, in the second RT state, in addition to the first re-play winning event that does not transition the game state, the second re-play winning event that transitions to the first RT state, and the fourth and fifth re-play winning events that transition to the third RT state are also possible. Furthermore, in the second RT state, the eleventh re-play winning event that does not transition the game state and is a reach point in VB mode is also possible.

In the second stop information setting process (step S412 in FIG. 19), in addition to the above-mentioned cases where the first promotion replay 1 to first promotion replay 4 are won, the stop information is set so as to change the winning pattern that is established depending on the operation sequence of the stop switches 42 to 44 that generated the stop command, even when the fall replay 1 to fall replay 3, second promotion replay 1, second promotion replay 2, or reach eye replay are won.

Figure 24 (b) is an explanatory diagram showing the correspondence between winning roles, the operation sequence of the stop switches 42 to 44, and the winning mode that is established. If Fall Replay 1 to Fall Replay 3 are won, the first replay win or the second replay win is always established regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44. If Second Promotion Replay 1 is won, the first replay win, the fourth replay win, or the fifth replay win is always established regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44. If Second Promotion Replay 2 is won, the first replay win or the fourth replay win is always established regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44. Also, if Reach Eye Replay is won, the first replay win or the eleventh replay win is always established regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44.

The numbers attached to the 4th replay in the diagram correspond to the symbol combination when the 4th replay win is established. "1" corresponds to the symbol combination that results in a scatter, and "2" corresponds to the symbol combination that results in a red 7, red 7, and black BAR stopping in the middle row (see FIG. 11). For example, if the left stop switch 42 is operated first when the 2nd promotion replay 1 is won, the symbol combination that results in a scatter will stop and the 4th replay win will be established, or the symbol combination that results in a red 7, red 7, and black BAR stopping in the middle row will stop and the 4th replay win will be established.

Returning to the explanation of the RT state processing, if it is determined in step S506 that the third replay winning has not been achieved, the process proceeds to step S509, where it is determined whether the fourth replay winning or the fifth replay winning has been achieved based on the winning combination set in the previous payout determination process. If the fourth replay winning or the fifth replay winning has not been achieved, the process ends as is. If the fourth replay winning or the fifth replay winning has been achieved, the RT setting flag set in the state information storage area 106c is cleared in step S510, and the third RT setting flag is set in step S511, and the process ends.

If the third RT setting flag is set in step S511, the game state transitions to the third RT state. Then, in step S302 of the lottery process, it is determined that the current game state is the third RT state based on the fact that the third RT setting flag is set in the state information storage area 106c, and a lottery table for the third RT state is selected.

Figure 26 is a lottery table for the third RT state selected in the third RT state of "setting 3". When compared with the lottery table for the second RT state (see Figure 25), the lottery table for the third RT state has different point values PV for IV = 1, 9-12, 55, 56, and the same point values PV are set for the other index values IV. For this reason, when such a lottery table is used to determine whether a winning combination is a hit or miss, the probability of winning when IV = 2-8, 13-54 is equal to the respective winning probabilities in the second RT state, and winning is not possible when IV = 9, 10, 55, 56, the probability of winning when IV = 1 is approximately 1 in 13.2, and the probability of winning when IV = 11, 12 is approximately 1 in 7.00. The probability of winning when IV=1 in the third RT state (probability of winning a normal replay) is the sum of the probability of winning when IV=55 in the second RT state (probability of winning a normal replay) and the probability of winning when IV=56 (probability of winning a reach-eye replay). The probability of not winning any role is approximately 1 in 150.

In other words, when the game state transitions to the third RT state, the odds of winning small prizes, replays, and bonuses are the same as in the second RT state, but the winning mode for granting the replay bonus changes to one different from that in the second RT state. More specifically, in the third RT state, in addition to the first replay winning, which does not transition the game state, and the second replay winning, which transitions to the first RT state, the sixth replay winning, the seventh replay winning, and the eighth replay winning, which does not transition the game state, and the third replay winning, which transitions to the second RT state, are possible.

In the second stop information setting process (step S412 in FIG. 19), even if BAR Replay 1 or BAR Replay 2 is won, the stop information is set to change the winning pattern that is established depending on the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 that generated the stop command.

Figure 24(c) is an explanatory diagram showing the correspondence between winning roles, the operation sequence of stop switches 42-44, and the winning mode that is achieved. If BAR Replay 1 is won, regardless of the operation timing of stop switches 42-44, one of the first replay winning, sixth replay winning, seventh replay winning, or third replay winning will always be achieved. If BAR Replay 2 is won, regardless of the operation timing of stop switches 42-44, one of the first replay winning, sixth replay winning, eighth replay winning, or third replay winning will always be achieved.

Next, the bonus state processing in step S215 will be explained based on the flowchart in Figure 27.

First, in step S601, it is determined whether the current gaming state is a bonus state, i.e., whether the current gaming state is a BB state or a CB state. If it is not a bonus state, the bonus determination process shown in steps S602 to S613 is performed.

In the bonus determination process, in step S602, it is determined whether any of the first BB winning flag, second BB winning flag, or CB winning flag is set. If any of the winning flags is set, the process proceeds to step S603, and it is determined whether a CB winning has occurred based on the winning combination set in the previous payout determination process. If a CB winning has occurred, in step S604, a CB setting flag is set in the state information storage area 106c. In step S605, a remaining payout counter for counting the number of medals remaining that can be paid out during the bonus state, which is provided in the state information storage area 106c, is set to 15. By performing the processes of steps S604 to S605, the game state transitions to the CB state.

Here is a brief explanation of CB and CB states.

When the "Red Bell" or "White Bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "Red Bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "Watermelon", "First Replay" or "Black BAR" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on an active line, a CB win occurs. The CB symbols are arranged on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R so that there is a gap of 4 symbols or less between each CB symbol. Therefore, when a CB win occurs, the CB win occurs regardless of the order and timing of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44.

When the CB setting flag is set in the state information storage area 106c, the main control device 101 determines that the game state is in the CB state. Then, in step S205 of the normal process, it determines whether the number of medals bet has reached "2" instead of "3", and in the active line setting process (step S209 in FIG. 15), it sets the lower line L3 and the right-downward line L4 as active lines.

In step S302 of the lottery process (FIG. 16), a lottery table for the CB state is selected. Although the illustration of the lottery table for the CB state is omitted, in the lottery table for the CB state, the point value PV for IV=1 to 52 is set to "0", and the point value for IV=53 to 56 is set to "16384" (see FIG. 17, etc. for the correspondence between IV and winning roles). Therefore, in the CB state, the probability of winning CB small/medium role 1 (probability of winning when IV=53) is approximately 1 in 4.00, and the probability of winning CB small/medium role 2 (probability of winning when IV=54) is approximately 1 in 4.00. No losing events occur.

Figure 28 (a) is an explanatory diagram showing the correspondence between winning roles, the operation sequence of the stop switches 42 to 44, and the winning mode that is established. Although detailed explanation is omitted, regardless of the operation sequence and operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44, regardless of whether CB small/medium role 1 to CB small/medium role 2 are won, some small role winning is always established. Since the CB state is a two-bet game, when the 1st small role winning, the 27th small role winning, the 31st small role winning, the 36th small role winning to the 38th small role winning are established, 15 medals are paid out, and when the 2nd small role winning to the 26th small role winning, the 28th small role winning to the 30th small role winning, the 32nd small role winning to the 35th small role winning are established, 14 medals are paid out. In other words, when the state transitions to the CB state, 14 or 15 medals are always paid out.

In addition to or in addition to CB as a winning combination and the CB state as a game state, a single bonus (SB) that allows one game (JAC game) to be played as a winning combination, and an SB state to which a transition occurs based on the winning of the single bonus (winning) may be provided.

Returning to the explanation of the bonus state processing, if it is determined in step S603 that a CB win has not been achieved, this means that a bonus win flag other than CB has been set. In such a case, the RT setting flag set in the state information storage area 106c is cleared in step S608, and it is determined in step S609 whether a 1st BB win or a 2nd BB win has been achieved.

If any of the BB wins is achieved, the BB win flag set in the win flag storage area 106a of the RAM 106 is cleared in step S610, and the BB setting flag is set in the state information storage area 106c in step S611. After that, in step S612, the remaining payout counter is set to 216, and the remaining payout display unit 61 is caused to display 216. The number set in step S612 corresponds to the upper limit payout number in the BB state, and the BB state is ended on the condition that medals paid out in the BB state equal to or more than this number have been paid out.

By performing the processing of steps S610 to S612, the game state transitions to the BB state. Then, in step S302 of the lottery process (FIG. 16), it is determined that the current game state is the BB state based on the fact that the BB setting flag is set in the state information storage area 106c, and the corresponding lottery table for the BB state is selected.

Figure 29 shows a lottery table for the BB state, which is selected in the BB state to which the first BB or second BB transition occurs. In the lottery table for the BB state, the point value PV for IV = 1 to 28, 32 to 56 is set to "0", and the point value for IV = 29 to 31 is set to "21845". Therefore, in the BB state, the probability of winning the first role in BB (probability of winning when IV = 29) is approximately 1 in 1.11, the probability of winning the second role in BB (probability of winning when IV = 30) is approximately 1 in 20.0, and the probability of winning the third role in BB (probability of winning when IV = 31) is approximately 1 in 20.0. The probability of not winning any role is approximately 1 in 65,500.

The winning probability of the first role in BB, the second role in BB, and the third role in BB is the same for the first BB and the second BB. The winning probability of the first role in BB, the second role in BB, and the third role in BB is the same regardless of the trigger for the transition to the BB state of the first BB or the second BB. For example, the winning probability of the third role in BB in the first BB based on the winning of one special lip A overlap is the same as the winning probability of the third role in BB in the first BB based on the winning of one special lip AB overlap. In other words, in either BB state, the lottery process is performed by referring to a common BB state lottery table.

Figure 28 (b) is an explanatory diagram showing the correspondence between winning roles, the operation sequence of the stop switches 42 to 44, and the winning mode that is established. As described above, the first small role winning is a winning mode that can be established regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44. Therefore, if the first role in BB is won, regardless of the operation sequence and operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44, either the first small role winning, the 39th small role winning, or the 40th small role winning will always be established. In addition, the 9th replay winning is also a winning mode that can be established regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44. Therefore, if the second role in BB is won, regardless of the operation sequence and operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44, the 9th replay winning will always be established.

Which of the third roles in the BB that allows the 9th and 10th replay wins depends on the operation timing of the stop switches 42-44. When the stop operation of the stop switches 42-44 is performed, if both are winnable, the stop drive control is performed so that the replay with the fewer slips wins. More specifically, the combinations of symbols that allow the 9th and 10th replays to win are the same for the center reel 32M and the right reel 32R, that is, the "1st replay" symbol and the "2nd replay" symbol, but are different for the left reel 32L. That is, on the left reel 32L, the target symbols for the 9th replay are the "red bell" symbol and the "white bell" symbol, while the target symbols for the 10th replay are the "young man" symbol and the "watermelon" symbol.

For example, in a 3-bet game, if the left stop switch 42 is operated to stop when the 4th "cherry" symbol through the 7th "red bell" symbol on the left reel 32L reach the top row, both the 7th "red bell" symbol, which is the target symbol for the 9th replay, and the 8th "watermelon" symbol, which is the target symbol for the 10th replay, can be stopped in the top row on the active line, but in this case, the stop drive control is performed to stop the 7th "red bell" symbol, which has the fewer slips, in the top row. As a result, a 9th replay win can be achieved instead of a 10th replay win. In addition, when the left stop switch 42 is stopped when the 9th "red 7" symbol to the 12th "white bell" symbol reach the top of the left reel 32L, the reel is controlled so that the 12th "white bell" symbol stops at the top instead of the 13th "youth" symbol, making it easier to win with the 9th replay than the 10th replay. In other words, to win with the 10th replay, the left stop switch 42 must be stopped when the 0th "youth" symbol, the 8th "watermelon" symbol, and the 13th "youth" symbol reach the top of the left reel 32L, and if it is stopped at any other time, the 9th replay will win.

Because the BB state is a 3-bet game, if the first role is won during the BB, and the first, 39th, and 40th small roles are won, 9 medals will be paid out. Also, if the second role is won during the BB, the 9th replay win is won, and even if the third role is won during the BB, the 9th replay win is often won. In other words, in the BB state, either the bell win of the first small role or the replay win of the 9th replay is frequently won. If a replay win is won, no medals are paid out, but instead a replay is awarded, and the next game can be played without medals. Since the probability of a miss in the BB state is about 1 in 65,500, the BB state can be said to be a game state in which 9 medals are paid out with a very high probability.

If the result of step S609 is negative and no BB wins have been achieved, a carryover command is set in step S613. The carryover command is a command sent to the display control device 81 to inform the display control device 81 that a bonus win has not been achieved in the bonus winning game and that a so-called carryover state has occurred. This carryover command is output to the display control device 81 in the command output process of the timer interrupt process (step S110 in FIG. 14).

Here, in this embodiment, in games played in the carryover state, winning other bonuses is restricted. More specifically, in the lottery table for the normal game state (FIG. 17), if a player wins an overlapping role with a bonus (first BB, second BB, CB) with IV=32 to 49, the winning flags corresponding to these bonuses are not set. Therefore, for example, if a player wins an overlapping role with each of the small roles with IV=32 to 49 or a replay, the winning flags for these small roles and the replay are set, but the winning flags corresponding to the bonuses are not set, and only the winning of the small role is valid. In other words, the carryover state can be said to be a state in which the selection of bonuses is restricted.

If the game state has transitioned to the CB state or the BB state, a positive determination is made in step S601, and an end determination process is performed in step S614. In the end determination process, it is determined whether the value of the remaining payout counter has reached 0, and if it has reached 0, a process is performed to clear the CB setting flag or the BB setting flag. Furthermore, in the end determination process, if the BB setting flag is cleared, an end flag is set to indicate that the BB state has ended in this game. The end determination process will be described in detail later.

As shown in steps S602 to S614, when the CB is won and the CB winning is established, the CB setting flag is set without clearing the RT setting flag. Therefore, when the CB setting flag is cleared, that is, when the CB state ends, the game state when the CB winning is established will be returned to. For example, when the CB winning is established under the normal game state, the game state will be returned to the normal game state after the CB state ends, and when the CB winning is established under the third RT state, the game state will be returned to the third RT state after the CB state ends. On the other hand, when the first BB and the second BB are won, the RT setting flag is cleared in step S608 regardless of whether the corresponding BB winning is established or not. Therefore, when the BB setting flag is cleared, that is, when the BB state ends, the game state will be transitioned to the normal game state even if the first BB winning is established under the second RT state. By the way, if the player transitions to the CB state, he or she can expect to receive an increase of 13 (=15-2) or 25 (=14-2+15-2) medals by the time the CB state ends. If the player transitions to the BB state, he or she can expect to receive an increase of approximately 144 (=9x24-3x24) medals by the time the BB state ends.

By the way, if you win the 2nd or 3rd BB role in BB state and a replay is awarded, the remaining payout counter will not be decremented. In other words, the number of times you win the 2nd or 3rd BB role in BB state does not affect the number of medal increases you can expect in BB state.

When none of the first BB winning flag, second BB winning flag, and CB winning flag are set (step S602 is NO), when none of the first BB winning, second BB winning, and CB winning are established and a carryover command is set (step S613 is executed), when a predetermined value is set in the remaining payout counter in steps S605 and S612, and when an end determination process is performed in step S614, the process proceeds to step S606 and a status command is set. Here, the status command is a command sent to the display control device 81 to allow the display control device 81 to grasp the game status at the end of the game (i.e., the game status of the next game), and in step S606, a status command corresponding to the setting flag set in the status information storage area 106c is set. After setting the status command, in step S607, an external signal setting process is performed to set an external signal to be output from the external centralized terminal board 121 to the outside of the slot machine 10. Then, this process ends.

<Overview of game state transitions and display modes>
Here, the transition of the gaming state will be described with reference to Figure 30. Note that the CB state is not shown in the figure.

If the game state is BB state, when the number of medals paid out in that BB state reaches 216, the BB state ends and the game state transitions to the normal game state.

When the game state is the normal game state, the game state transitions to the first RT state when the transition result stops on a winning line, and the game state transitions to the BB state when a BB win is achieved. The transition result stops on a winning line when a miss occurs in a game in which the push order bell is won. In the lottery process using the lottery table for the normal game state, the first promotion replays 1 to 4, which trigger a transition to the second RT state, and the second promotion replays 1 and 2, which trigger a transition to the third RT state, are not won, so there is no transition from the normal game state to the second RT state or the third RT state (see Figure 17).

When the game state is the first RT state, the game state transitions to the second RT state by the establishment of the third replay winning. The third replay winning is established when any of the first promotion replay 1 to first promotion replay 4 is won and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in a specified operating sequence (see FIG. 24(a)). In the lottery process using the lottery table for the first RT state, the second promotion replays 1 and 2, which trigger the transition to the third RT state, are not won, so there is no transition from the first RT state to the third RT state.

In addition, if a BB win is not achieved in a game in which a BB win flag is set, i.e., if the BB win flag is carried over, the game state will transition to the normal game state, and if a BB win is achieved in a game in which a BB win flag is set, the game state will transition to the BB state.

When the game state is in the second RT state, the game state transitions to the third RT state by the establishment of the fourth replay winning or the fifth replay winning. In addition, when the second replay winning is established and when the transition result stops on the valid line, the game state transitions to the first RT state. The fourth replay winning and the fifth replay winning are established when the second promotion replay 1 or the second promotion replay 2 is won and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in a predetermined operation sequence (see FIG. 24(b)). The second replay winning is established when any of the fall replays 1 to 3 is won and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in a predetermined operation sequence (see FIG. 24(b)). The transition result stops on the valid line when a miss occurs in the game in which the push order bell is won. In addition, if a BB win is not achieved in a game in which a BB win flag is set, i.e., if the BB win flag is carried over, the game state transitions to the normal game state, and if a BB win is achieved in a game in which a BB win flag is set, the game state transitions to the BB state.

When the game state is in the third RT state, the game state transitions to the second RT state by the establishment of the third replay winning. In addition, when the second replay winning is established and when the transition result stops on the winning line, the game state transitions to the first RT state. The third replay winning is established when BAR Replay 1 or BAR Replay 2 is won and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in a predetermined operation sequence (see FIG. 24(c)). The second replay winning is established when any of Fall Replay 1 to Fall Replay 3 is won and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in a predetermined operation sequence (see FIG. 24(b)). The transition result stops on the winning line when a miss occurs in the game where the push order bell is won. In addition, if the corresponding BB win is not achieved in the game in which the winning flag is set, i.e., if the BB winning flag is carried over, the game state transitions to the normal game state, and if the corresponding BB win is achieved in the game in which the BB winning flag is set, the game state transitions to the BB state.

In this slot machine 10, the main control device 101 manages six types of game states: normal game state, first RT state, second RT state, third RT state, BB state, and CB state, and also manages five types of display modes, broadly classified as normal mode, challenge mode (the so-called chance zone), attack mode (the so-called ART state, including the added-on specialization zone), VB mode (the so-called pseudo bonus, including the added-on specialization zone), and BB mode.

Figure 31 shows the transition between display modes.

The BB mode is a display mode that is entered when the first BB win or the second BB win is achieved, and ends when the BB state ends. In other words, the BB mode is a display mode that corresponds to the BB state. Therefore, when entering the BB mode, the player can expect an increase of approximately 144 medals.

When transitioning from normal mode or challenge mode to BB mode, a lottery to transition to challenge mode and a lottery to transition to attack mode may be held in that BB mode. If the transition lottery to attack mode is won, the mode will transition to attack mode after the BB mode ends, and if the transition lottery to challenge mode is won, the mode will transition to challenge mode after the BB mode ends. If neither transition lottery is won, the mode will transition to normal mode after the BB mode ends. If transitioning from attack mode to BB mode, the mode will return to attack mode after the BB mode ends. If transitioning from VB mode to BB mode, the mode will return to VB mode after the BB mode ends.

Normal mode is a display mode in which the operation order of the stop switches 42-44 is not announced when the push order bell is won, or when 1st promotion replay 1 to 1st promotion replay 4, fall replay 1 to fall replay 3, 2nd promotion replay 1, 2nd promotion replay 2, BAR replay 1, and BAR replay 2 (hereinafter collectively referred to as "push order replays") are won. In normal mode, a lottery for transition to challenge mode and a lottery for transition to attack mode are held. If the lottery for transition to challenge mode is won, the mode transitions from normal mode to challenge mode, and if the lottery for transition to attack mode is won, the mode transitions from normal mode to attack mode. There is no transition to VB mode from normal mode.

Normal mode corresponds to each of the game states of normal game state, first RT state, second RT state, third RT state, and CB state. However, in normal mode, when the push order bell is won and when the push order replay is won, the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is not notified, so it rarely transitions to the second RT state or the third RT state, and it almost always corresponds to the normal game state or the first RT state. In normal mode, if the game state at that time is the normal game state or the first RT state, you can expect to lose about 1.59 medals for each game played, and if the game state at that time is the second RT state or the third RT state, you can expect to lose about 0.06 medals for each game played.

In the challenge mode, like the normal mode, the operation sequence of the stop switches 42 to 44 is not notified when the push order bell or push order replay is won. In the challenge mode, a lottery is held to switch to the attack mode. However, the probability of winning the lottery to switch to the attack mode in the challenge mode is set higher than the probability of winning the lottery to switch to the attack mode in the normal mode. In other words, the challenge mode is set as a mode in which the operation sequence is not notified like the normal mode, but it is easy to switch to the attack mode. If the lottery to switch to the attack mode is won, the mode switches from the challenge mode to the attack mode. If the game is played a predetermined number of times (e.g., 10 times) without winning the above-mentioned transition lottery, the mode switches from the challenge mode to the normal mode. There is no transition from the challenge mode to the VB mode.

The challenge mode corresponds to each of the game states of the normal game state, the first RT state, the second RT state, the third RT state, and the CB state. However, in the challenge mode, since the operation sequence of the stop switches 42 to 44 is not notified when a push order replay is won, it rarely transitions to the second RT state or the third RT state, and it almost always corresponds to the normal game state or the first RT state. In the challenge mode, if the game state at that time is the normal game state or the first RT state, it can be expected that approximately 1.59 medals will be lost for each game played, and if the game state at that time is the second RT state or the third RT state, it can be expected that approximately 0.06 medals will be lost for each game played.

The attack mode is a display mode in which the operation sequence of the stop switches 42 to 44 is announced both when the push order bell is won and when the push order replay is won. The attack mode is made up of four attack modes, the first attack mode to the fourth attack mode, which have different probabilities of transitioning to the VB mode, and the probability of transitioning to the VB mode is higher in each attack mode than in the normal mode. If the transition lottery to the VB mode is won, the mode transitions from the attack mode to the VB mode. If the game is played a predetermined number of times (e.g. 50 times) without winning the transition lottery to the VB mode, the mode transitions from the attack mode to the normal mode.

The first attack mode to the fourth attack mode are set to have different probabilities of winning the lottery to transition to VB mode. More specifically, the probability of winning the lottery to transition to VB mode is set to be highest for the fourth attack mode and lowest for the first attack mode, and the probability of winning the lottery to transition to VB mode is set to increase in the order of the first attack mode, the second attack mode, the third attack mode, and the fourth attack mode.

The attack mode corresponds to each of the game states of the normal game state, the first RT state, the second RT state, the third RT state, and the CB state. However, in the attack mode, the operation sequence of the stop switches 42 to 44 is notified in both the case of winning the push order bell and the case of winning the push order replay, so if the player operates the stop switches 42 to 44 in the notified operation sequence, it corresponds to approximately the second RT state. In the attack mode, if the game state at that time is the normal game state or the first RT state, it is expected that the number of medals will increase by about 0.61 for each game played, and if the game state at that time is the second RT state or the third RT state, it is expected that the number of medals will increase by about 1.90 for each game played. Since the attack mode continues for at least 50 games after the game state transitions to the second RT state, when the attack mode is entered, the player can expect an increase of about 100 medals.

VB mode, like attack mode, is a display mode in which the operation sequence of the stop switches 42 to 44 is announced when the push order bell is won and when the push order replay is won. The difference between VB mode and attack mode is that when the second promotion replay 1 or second promotion replay 2 is won, the attack mode announces the operation sequence for achieving the first replay win, whereas the VB mode announces the operation sequence for achieving the fourth replay win or the fifth replay win (see FIG. 24(b)).

The VB mode corresponds to each of the game states of the normal game state, the first RT state, the second RT state, the third RT state, and the CB state. However, in the VB mode, the operation sequence of the stop switches 42 to 44 is notified in both the case of winning the push order bell and the case of winning the push order replay, and the operation sequence for establishing the fourth replay prize or the fifth replay prize in the case of winning the second promotion replay 1 or the second promotion replay 2 is notified. Therefore, the VB mode corresponds to the third RT state when the player operates the stop switches 42 to 44 in the notified operation sequence. In the VB mode, if the game state at that time is the normal game state or the first RT state, it is expected that the number of medals will increase by about 0.61 for each game, and if the game state at that time is the second RT state or the third RT state, it is expected that the number of medals will increase by about 1.90 for each game. In VB mode, the game state continues for at least 25 games after transitioning to the third RT state, so if the game state transitions to VB mode, the player can expect to gain approximately 50 more medals.

Regarding the transition of display modes when the number of medals owned by a player increases, the general flow is to transition from normal mode to challenge mode, from challenge mode to attack mode, and then back from attack mode to normal mode. In attack mode, a lottery is held to transition to VB mode, so if a loop occurs in which attack mode transitions to VB mode and then back to attack mode, the player can expect to increase the number of medals owned.

As mentioned above, when comparing normal mode and challenge mode, the probability of winning the lottery to switch to attack mode is set to be higher in challenge mode than in normal mode. Therefore, challenge mode is also called a chance zone that creates hope for switching to attack mode.

In addition, the attack mode is set to the first attack mode to the fourth attack mode, and the probability of winning the lottery for transition to the VB mode differs for each attack mode. When transitioning from the normal mode or the challenge mode to the attack mode, the mode basically transitions to the first attack mode. In the first attack mode, a lottery for transition to the VB mode is held, and a lottery for transition to the second attack mode is held. If the lottery for transition to the second attack mode is won, the mode transitions to the second attack mode, and the probability of winning the lottery for transition to the VB mode increases. In the second attack mode, a lottery for transition to the VB mode is held, and a lottery for transition to the third attack mode is held. If the lottery for transition to the third attack mode is won, the mode transitions to the third attack mode, and the probability of winning the lottery for transition to the VB mode increases. In the third attack mode, a lottery for transition to the VB mode is held, and a lottery for transition to the fourth attack mode is held. If you win the lottery to transition to the 4th attack mode, you will transition to the 4th attack mode, and your chances of winning the lottery to transition to the VB mode will increase.

Therefore, when transitioning to attack mode, the attack mode is promoted from first attack mode → second attack mode → third attack mode → fourth attack mode, increasing the probability of transitioning to VB mode, making it easier for a loop between attack mode and VB mode to occur.

As described above, the slot machine 10 is configured so that the player can increase the number of medals owned in each of the display modes, attack mode, VB mode, and BB mode. In addition, in conjunction with each display mode, multiple RT states and multiple states such as BB state and CB state are switched back and forth depending on the winning of each replay or the stopping of the transition result. As described above, when the push order replay is won or the push order bell is won, the corresponding replay winning is achieved or the transition result is stopped depending on the operation sequence of the stop switches 42 to 43. Also, in the attack mode and VB mode, when the push order bell is won, the operation sequence that can achieve the first minor role winning is announced, so that the player can expect to increase the number of medals owned.

The display mode configuration is explained below.

The configurations related to the display modes are broadly divided into (1) processing related to the lottery for switching between display modes, (2) processing for switching the game state based on the results of the lottery for switching between display modes, (3) processing for switching the display mode based on the winning result, and (4) processing related to the notification effects on the sub side. Each will be explained in order below.

<Processing for lottery for switching display modes>
<Lottery result processing>
The process related to the display mode transition lottery in (1) is performed in the lottery result response process (step S312) of the lottery process (FIG. 16) by the main control device 101. Hereinafter, the lottery result response process will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

In step S701, it is determined whether the 1st BB win flag or the 2nd BB win flag has already been set prior to the current game, and whether the current game is in a carryover state from the 1st BB or the 2nd BB.

If a negative judgment is made in step S701, the process for switching display modes, etc., of steps S702 to S710 is executed. On the other hand, if a positive judgment is made in step S701 and the bonus is in a carryover state, the process for switching display modes, etc. is not executed. In other words, while the bonus is in a carryover state, the execution of the process for switching display modes, etc. is restricted.

Specifically, if a negative judgment is made in step S701, a judgment is made in step S702 as to whether or not the current game state is a normal game state or a first RT state. If a positive judgment is made in step S702, a judgment is made in step S703 as to whether or not an attack mode win flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106. The attack mode win flag is a flag that is set when the attack mode transition lottery is won and is cleared when transitioning to the attack mode. If a negative judgment is made in step S703, a first specific role process is executed in step S704.

<First specific role processing>
The first specific role processing will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

Here, the first specific role processing is performed when the player is in the normal game state or the first RT state and has not won the attack mode. The display mode in this case corresponds to the normal mode or the challenge mode. In the first specific role processing, a transition lottery is performed to determine whether or not the display mode should be transitioned to the challenge mode, and a transition lottery is performed to determine whether or not the display mode should be transitioned to the attack mode. In addition, in the first specific role processing, if the current display mode is the challenge mode, a process is performed to add to the number of continued games in the challenge mode.

That is, in step S801, it is determined whether the current display mode is in challenge mode or not. If it is not in challenge mode, it means that the current display mode is normal mode. If the determination in step S801 is negative, in step S802, a normal time table is obtained from the various table storage area 105a of the ROM 105 as a table for the attack mode lottery. On the other hand, if the determination in step S801 is positive, in step S803, a challenge mode table is obtained from the various table storage area 105a of the ROM 105 as a table for the attack mode lottery. For the normal time table and the challenge mode table, the probability of transitioning to the attack mode is set according to the type of lottery result (winning role).

Specifically, the mode lottery table stored in the various table storage area 105a is set so that the probability of winning each mode transition lottery varies depending on the current display mode and the type of game result that triggers the lottery.

Here, as shown in FIG. 37, the game results that trigger the mode transition lottery are set as follows: strong cherry, weak cherry, strong watermelon, weak watermelon, Chance A, Chance B, middle bell, strong cherry overlap 1, weak cherry overlap 1, strong watermelon overlap 1, weak watermelon overlap 1, Chance A overlap 1, Chance B overlap 1, middle bell overlap 1, special lip A overlap 1, special lip A overlap 2, single BB 1, and single BB 2 (hereinafter, these are collectively referred to as "transition trigger roles"). These transition trigger roles are set so that there is a setting difference in the winning probability, and the point value PV is set so that generally setting 1 has the lowest winning probability and setting 6 has the highest winning probability. Incidentally, even for non-trigger roles that do not involve a mode transition lottery, such as 2 strong cherry overlaps, 2 weak cherry overlaps, 2 strong watermelon overlaps, 2 weak watermelon overlaps, 2 chance A overlaps, 2 chance B overlaps, 2 middle bell overlaps, 1 special lip AB overlap, and 2 special lip AB overlaps, there are set differences in the probability of winning.

It is optional whether or not to set differences in the probability of winning the transition trigger role and the non-trigger role. For example, the point value PV set for the probability of winning the transition trigger role is the same regardless of the set value, and the transition rate for each mode transition may be the same regardless of the set value.

In the lottery table for transition to attack mode obtained in step S802 or step S803, the probability of winning the transition lottery is set according to the type of transition trigger role. As shown in FIG. 38, for example, when the transition trigger role is a strong cherry, the normal time table has a 45% probability of winning the transition lottery to attack mode, while the challenge mode table has a 90% probability of winning the transition lottery to attack mode, so that it is set up so that it is easier to win the transition lottery to attack mode in the challenge mode than in the normal mode. Also, when the transition trigger role is a strong cherry, the probability of winning the transition lottery to attack mode is higher in both the normal time table and the challenge mode table than when the transition trigger role is a weak cherry, and it is set up so that the lower the winning probability (appearance rate) in each game, the easier it is to win the transition lottery to attack mode.

After the table for the attack mode transition lottery is acquired in step S802 or step S803, the attack mode lottery process is executed in step S804. In this process, the lottery counter is acquired from the various counter area 106e of the RAM 106, and the lottery counter is compared with the lottery table acquired in step S802 or step S803 to perform the lottery for transition to the attack mode.

In step S805, based on the processing result of step S804, it is determined whether or not the lottery for transition to attack mode has been won. If the lottery for transition to attack mode has been won, in step S806, it is determined whether or not the currently won attack mode is super attack mode. Super attack mode is an attack mode that starts after passing through the add-on specialization zone. For example, if the initial number of games in normal attack mode is 50, in super attack mode, the attack mode starts with the initial number of games of 50 plus the number of games added in the add-on specialization zone. Therefore, the degree of advantage for the player differs between normal attack mode and super attack mode, and super attack mode is more advantageous for the player than attack mode.

The lottery for transition to Super Attack Mode is held when the lottery for transition to Attack Mode is won (when the lottery process of step S804 is won), and this lottery is held based on a lottery table for transition to Super Attack Mode that is set according to the transition trigger role and the type of display mode. As shown in FIG. 38, the lottery table for Super Attack Mode is set so that it is easier to win the lottery for transition to Super Attack Mode when winning Attack Mode during Challenge Mode than when winning Attack Mode during Normal Mode, thereby ensuring the superiority of Challenge Mode.

For example, in normal mode, the probability of winning the lottery to transition to Attack mode when a strong watermelon is obtained is 60%, and 5% of those who win the lottery will enter Super Attack mode, so essentially, 57% of those who win a strong watermelon during normal mode will transition to Attack mode, and 3% will transition to Super Attack mode. On the other hand, in Challenge mode, the probability of winning the lottery to transition to Attack mode when a strong watermelon is obtained is 50%, and 50% of those who win the lottery will enter Super Attack mode, so essentially, 25% of those who win a strong watermelon during Challenge mode will transition to Attack mode, and 25% will transition to Super Attack mode, making the transition rate to Super Attack mode higher than in normal mode. Furthermore, the probability of winning the lottery to transition to Super Attack Mode differs depending on the transition trigger role; for example, when comparing strong cherries and strong watermelons, in normal mode the probability of winning the lottery to transition to Super Attack Mode is the same for both strong cherries and strong watermelons (5% probability of winning), but in Challenge Mode the probability of winning the lottery to transition to Super Attack Mode is set to be higher for strong watermelons than for strong cherries.

If it is determined in step S806 that the Super Attack Mode has been won, the process of setting the Specialized Zone Winning Flag is executed in step S807.

If the determination in step S806 is negative, or after the processing in step S807 has been executed, the processing to set the attack mode winning flag is performed in step S808. In other words, when the attack mode is won, the attack mode winning flag is set, and in some cases (when the super attack mode is won), the specialized zone winning flag is set.

In the next step S809, it is determined whether any of the first BB winning flag, the second BB winning flag, and the CB winning flag (bonus winning flag) is set. If it is determined that the bonus winning flag is not set, the process proceeds to steps S810 to S813. In steps S810 to S813, processing for setting the premonition mode is performed. The premonition mode is a mode in which a winning suggestion effect that suggests that an attack mode or a challenge mode has been won is likely to occur, and after each game in the premonition mode, a winning notification that an attack mode or a challenge mode has been won is made. The premonition mode continues for 0 to 32 games, and the number of games that the premonition mode continues is set to be different depending on the type of the attack mode or the challenge mode that has been won and whether or not a bonus has been won at the same time. Note that if the attack mode or the challenge mode has been won at the same time as the bonus, the bonus winning notification is made after the premonition mode, and after the bonus state ends, a notification that the attack mode or the challenge mode has been won is made. Also, if the number of premonition games is set to 0, the winning notification will be made without going through the premonition mode.

Specifically, in step S810, a process is performed to obtain the premonition game number table from the various table storage area 105a of the ROM 105. As shown in FIG. 39, in the premonition game number table, the number of premonition games to be selected is set to be different depending on the current display mode (normal mode or challenge mode) and whether or not a bonus has been won at the same time. Specifically, when the current display mode is the normal mode and when the attack mode is won, if the bonus has not been won at the same time, 1 to 5 games are selected with an 80% probability, and 6 to 10 games are selected with an 20% probability. On the other hand, even if the current display mode is the normal mode, if the attack mode and the bonus have been won at the same time, 1 to 5 games are selected with an 10% probability, 6 to 10 games are selected with an 20% probability, 11 to 20 games are selected with an 50% probability, and 21 to 32 games are selected with an 20% probability. In other words, when the display mode is the normal mode, if the bonus has been won at the same time, a longer premonition game number is more likely to be selected than if the bonus has not been won at the same time. In other words, if a bonus is not won at the same time, the attack mode win will be announced a relatively short number of games after the attack mode winning game. On the other hand, if the current display mode is challenge mode, 0 games will be selected as the premonition game count regardless of whether a bonus is won at the same time. In other words, in this case, the premonition mode will not be set, and the attack mode win will be announced in the game following the winning game.

In addition, when the Super Attack Mode (attack mode with added special zone) is won during normal mode, if the bonus is not won at the same time, 1 to 5 games are selected with a 70% probability, and 6 to 10 games are selected with a 30% probability. On the other hand, when the Super Attack Mode is won during normal mode, if the bonus is won at the same time, 1 to 5 games are not selected, 6 to 10 games are selected with a 20% probability, 11 to 20 games are selected with a 30% probability, and 21 to 32 games are selected with a 50% probability. In other words, even when the Super Attack Mode is won, if the bonus is won at the same time, a longer number of premonition games is more likely to be selected than when the bonus is not won at the same time, and when the bonus is not won at the same time, the Super Attack Mode is announced with a relatively short number of games from the Super Attack Mode winning game. Even when the Super Attack Mode is won, if the current display mode is the challenge mode, 0 games is selected as the premonition game number regardless of whether the bonus is won at the same time or not. In other words, in this case, the premonition mode will not be set, and a winning notification for the Super Attack mode will be made in the game following the winning game.

In addition, when a bonus is won at the same time, the number of premonition games that are likely to be selected may differ depending on the type of overlapping role. For example, a combination of a replay (9th replay) and a bonus, such as Special Replay A Overlap 1 or Special Replay A Overlap 2, may be configured to more easily select a longer premonition mode than a combination of a minor role (strong cherry, weak cherry, etc.) and a bonus, such as Strong Cherry Overlap 1 or Weak Cherry Overlap 1, or the opposite relationship may be used.

In step S811, a process is performed to select the number of games to be played in the premonition mode this time based on the premonition game number table obtained in step S810 and the counter for selection obtained from the various counter area 106e of RAM 106. Then, in step S812, a process is performed to input the premonition game number to the premonition counter provided in the various counter area 106e of RAM 106. The premonition counter is a counter that is decremented by one for each game, and when the premonition counter reaches 0, the premonition mode ends and a winning notification is issued to inform the player that they have won the selection to transition to attack mode, etc.

In step S813, a process is executed to set the premonition command as an output target to the display control device 81, which is the sub-control device. The premonition command includes information on the lottery result that triggered the premonition mode (the display mode and game state to be transitioned to after the premonition mode) and the number of premonition games. The process on the display control device 81 side based on receiving the premonition command will be explained in detail later.

If it is determined in step S809 that the bonus win flag is set, or after executing the process of step S813, the process proceeds to step S814, where BB win processing is executed to notify the BB win. In the BB win processing, processing is performed to set the number of premonition games to be played when notifying the BB win, a freeze lottery process to select whether or not to execute a freeze effect, and a setting process when a freeze effect is executed. The BB win processing will be explained in detail later. After executing step S814, the first specific role processing is terminated.

If it is determined in step S805 that the lottery for transition to the attack mode has not been won, the process proceeds to step S815. In step S815, a challenge mode lottery process is executed. In the challenge mode lottery process, a table for the challenge mode lottery is obtained from the various table storage area 105a of the ROM 105, and a counter for the lottery is obtained from the various counter area 106e of the RAM 106. In the table for the challenge mode lottery, the probability of transition to the challenge mode is set according to the type of transition trigger role (Figure 38). For example, between a strong cherry and a weak cherry, the probability of transition to the challenge mode is set higher for a strong cherry than for a weak cherry.

The case where step S815 is performed includes a case where the display mode is the challenge mode. In this case, the challenge mode lottery process is also performed in step S815, and the lottery table is a common table for the normal mode and the challenge mode. Note that, as in steps S801 to S803, the lottery table may be different depending on whether or not the game is in the challenge mode.

In step S816, it is determined whether or not the challenge mode has been selected based on the processing result of step S815. If it is determined that the challenge mode has been selected, it is determined in step S817 whether or not the current display mode is the challenge mode. If it is the normal mode and not the challenge mode, in step S818, a process is executed to set a challenge mode selection flag in the various flags storage area 106d of the RAM 106.

In the following step S819, it is determined whether or not the bonus win flag is set. If the bonus win flag is set, the process proceeds to the BB win process in step S814, and if the bonus win flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S820.

In steps S820 to S823, the setting process for the premonition mode is performed in the same manner as in steps S810 to S813. That is, in step S820, the premonition game number table is obtained, in step S821, a lottery process for the premonition game number is performed, in step S822, the premonition game number is set, and in step S823, the premonition command is set.

In the premonition game number table obtained in step S820, as shown in FIG. 39, if the challenge mode is won alone, games 1 to 5 are selected with a 90% probability, and games 6 to 10 with a 10% probability. On the other hand, if the challenge mode is won simultaneously with a bonus, games 1 to 5 are selected with a 20% probability, games 6 to 10 with a 30% probability, and games 11 to 20 with a 50% probability. In other words, even when the challenge mode is won, if the bonus is also won simultaneously, a longer premonition game number is more likely to be selected than if the bonus is not won simultaneously, and if the bonus is not won simultaneously, the challenge mode win is notified a relatively short number of games from the challenge mode winning game.

In addition, regarding the number of premonition games, regardless of whether or not a bonus is won at the same time, a longer number of premonition games is more likely to be selected for the attack mode than for the challenge mode, and a longer number of premonition games is more likely to be selected for the super attack mode than for the attack mode, and if a display mode that is advantageous to the player is won, a longer number of premonition games is more likely to be selected. In addition, if a bonus is not won at the same time, a premonition game number of 10 games or less is selected, and if the premonition mode continues for 11 games or more, it is confirmed that a bonus and a premonition game have been won at the same time. In addition, even if a bonus and a premonition game are won at the same time, if the challenge mode and the bonus are won at the same time, a premonition game number of 20 games or less is selected, while if the attack mode or the super attack mode and the bonus are won at the same time, a premonition game number of 21 games or more is also selected, and if the premonition mode continues for 21 games or more, it is confirmed that it is a bonus + attack mode or super attack mode. In this way, the fun of predicting the winning content in relation to the number of premonition games is added.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, when a transition trigger role is won but the attack mode, challenge mode, etc. is not won, or when a non-trigger role is won, the mode may transition to the pseudo premonition mode. This process will be described later, but the number of games set as the pseudo premonition mode is anywhere from 1 game to 20 games. Therefore, if the winning suggestion effect occurs frequently over 21 games or more, it is confirmed that the premonition mode or pseudo premonition mode to which the mode has transitioned is the premonition mode.

If it is determined in step S817 that the player has been selected to play in challenge mode again during the challenge mode, processing for adding additional games to the challenge mode is performed in steps S824 to S827. That is, in step S824, it is determined whether or not the bonus win flag is set. If the bonus win flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S825, where a lottery process for the number of games to be added to the challenge mode is performed.

Here, "adding" refers to adding the number of continuing games in challenge mode or attack mode, and the number of added games corresponds to the value to be added to the number of continuing games. In step S825, the value to be added to the number of continuing games in challenge mode is determined by lottery.

Specifically, in the lottery process for the number of added games, a table for lottery of the number of added games in the challenge mode is obtained from the various table storage area 105a of the ROM 105, and a counter for the lottery is obtained from the various counter area 106e of the RAM 106. The table for lottery of the number of added games in the challenge mode is set so that the number of added games increases according to the type of game result that triggers the lottery. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 40, for example, a strong cherry adds 2 to 20 games in the challenge mode, with the average number of added games being 15 games. Also, a weak cherry adds 5 to 30 games, with the average number of added games being 10 games. Although a larger number of games may be selected for weak cherries than for strong cherries, the average number (expected number of added games) is set so that a larger number of games is selected for strong cherries.

In step S826, a process of adding the number of games in the challenge mode is performed. In this process, a process of adding a value corresponding to the number of added games drawn in step S825 to a counter that manages the number of continued games in the challenge mode (more specifically, a challenge mode continuation counter provided in the various counter area 106e of the RAM 106) is performed. Then, in step S827, a process of setting the add-on command as an output target to the display control device 81 is performed, and then this first specific role process is terminated. The add-on command contains information that an add-on has occurred, the number of added games, and the target for the add-on (challenge mode or attack mode). The process on the display control device 81 side that receives the add-on command will be explained in detail later, but the display control device 81 performs an add-on notification (add-on performance) as a notification of the information contained in the add-on command based on the reception of the add-on command.

If the bonus win flag is set in step S824, the process proceeds to step S828. In step S828, the challenge mode addition flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106, and then the process proceeds to step S814. The challenge mode addition flag is a flag that allows the CPU 102 to know that the condition for adding the number of games in the challenge mode has been met. As will be described in detail later, if the bonus ends while the challenge mode addition flag is set, the challenge mode is added at the end of the bonus. In other words, the game for which the addition notification is made is set to differ depending on whether or not a bonus is won at the same time.

Returning to the explanation of the lottery result response process (FIG. 32), if a negative judgment is made in step S702 or a positive judgment is made in step S703, the process proceeds to step S705. In step S705, it is judged whether or not the current game state is the second RT state. If it is the second RT state, it is judged whether or not the VB mode winning flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106 in step S706. The VB mode winning flag is a flag that is set when the VB mode transition lottery is won and is cleared when transitioning to the VB mode. If a negative judgment is made in step S706, the second specific combination process is executed in step S707. Also, if a negative judgment is made in step S705, it is judged whether or not the bonus state is in progress in step S708. If it is not in the bonus state or if a positive judgment is made in step S706, the third specific combination process is executed in step S709.

<Second specific role processing>
The second specific combination processing will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

Here, the second specific role processing is performed when the player is in the second RT state and has not won the VB mode. The display mode in this case corresponds to the attack mode. In the second specific role processing, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not the display mode should be switched to the VB mode or the add-on specialization zone. The add-on specialization zone indicates a state in which the number of continued games in the attack zone is highly likely to be added over multiple games. In addition, in the second specific role processing, a lottery is performed to promote the rank of the attack mode, and processing for adding the number of continued games in the attack mode is performed.

That is, in step S901, a process is performed to determine the rank of the attack mode. As already explained, in this embodiment, four attack mode ranks are provided, from the first attack mode to the fourth attack mode, and the probability of transitioning to the VB mode differs for each rank. Therefore, in step S901, it is determined whether the rank of the current attack mode is the first attack mode, the second attack mode, or the fourth attack mode.

In step S902, a VB mode lottery table corresponding to the rank of the attack mode grasped in step S901 is obtained from the various table storage area 105a of the ROM 105. In the VB mode lottery table, the probability of transition to the VB mode is set according to the type of game result that triggers the lottery. As shown in FIG. 38, for example, between strong cherry 1 and weak cherry, the probability of transition to the VB mode is set higher for strong cherry 1 than for weak cherry. In addition, in the VB mode lottery table for each rank, the probability of transition to the VB mode is generally different, and it is set so that the probability of transition to the VB mode is higher for the second attack mode than for the first attack mode, the probability of transition to the VB mode is higher for the third attack mode than for the second attack mode, and the probability of transition to the VB mode is higher for the fourth attack mode than for the third attack mode.

In step S903, a VB mode transition lottery is performed using the table acquired in step S902 and the lottery counter acquired from the various counter area 106e of RAM 106. Then, in step S904, it is determined whether the lottery result in step S903 corresponds to a win in VB mode. Note that in this embodiment, when a VB mode transition lottery is performed using a combination with a bonus as a transition trigger role, the transition lottery to the VB mode is not won. In other words, the transition to BB mode and the transition to VB mode are prevented from overlapping as much as possible, and the advantage of the combination with the bonus is not increased too much.

If the result of the judgment in step S904 is positive, a process of setting a VB mode winning flag in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106 is performed in step S905. After that, a process for setting the number of premonition games is performed in steps S906 to S908. That is, a premonition game number table is obtained in step S906, the number of premonition games is drawn in step S907, and the number of premonition games is set in step S908. In the premonition game number table obtained in step S906, as shown in FIG. 39, when in attack mode and not in the add-on specialization zone, 1 to 5 games are selected with an 80% probability, and 6 to 10 games are selected with a 10% probability. On the other hand, when in the add-on specialization zone, 0 games are selected as the number of premonition games. Therefore, when the VB mode is won during the add-on specialization zone, the winning notification is made in the next game.

After step S908 is executed, the process proceeds to step S909, where a VB mode winning process is executed to notify the winning of the VB mode. In the VB mode winning process, a freeze lottery process is executed to determine whether or not a freeze effect is executed to notify the winning of the VB mode, and a setting process is executed if a freeze effect is executed. The VB winning process will be explained in detail later. After step S909 is executed, the second specific role process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S904 that the result of the VB mode lottery process is not a VB mode win, the process proceeds to step S910. Steps S910 to S913 are processes for promoting the rank of the attack mode.

In step S910, an attack mode promotion lottery process is performed. In this process, a table for the promotion lottery is obtained from the various table storage area 105a of the ROM 105, and a counter for the lottery is obtained from the various counter area 106e of the RAM 106. There are multiple tables for the promotion lottery according to the rank of the attack mode, and specifically, there are three tables for the first attack mode, a table for the second attack mode, and a table for the third attack mode (promotion lottery is not performed when the player is in the fourth attack mode). In each table, the probability of winning the promotion lottery is set according to the type of game result that triggers the lottery. For example, the probability of winning the promotion lottery is set higher for strong cherries than for weak cherries. Additionally, the tables for each attack mode are set so that the table for the second attack mode has a lower promotion probability than the table for the first attack mode, and the table for the third attack mode has a lower promotion probability than the table for the second attack mode, so that as the attack mode rank is promoted, it becomes more difficult to be promoted to the next rank.

In step S911, it is determined whether the result of the lottery in step S910 was a promotion win. If a promotion win was found, in step S912, attack mode promotion processing is performed. In this processing, the rank flag set in the various flag storage area 106d of RAM 106 is rewritten from the rank flag corresponding to the current attack mode rank to a rank flag one level higher.

After that, in step S913, a process is performed to set the promotion command as an output target to the display control device 81. The promotion command includes information on the attack mode to be promoted to. The display control device 81, which has received the promotion command, controls the auxiliary display unit 65, etc., to perform an effect for the attack mode of the rank to be promoted to. For example, an effect with a different background color depending on the rank of the attack mode is set as the effect for the attack mode in the auxiliary display unit 65, and when the display control device 81 receives the promotion command, it notifies the user that the rank of the attack mode has been promoted, and controls to perform an effect for the attack mode with a background color according to the rank to be promoted to.

If it is determined in step S911 that the player has not won the promotion lottery, or after the processing of step S913 has been executed, processing is performed in steps S914 to S921 to increase the number of continuing games in attack mode.

That is, in step S914, a lottery process for adding on the number of games in attack mode is performed. In this lottery process, a table for the attack mode add-on lottery is obtained from the various table storage area 105a of the ROM 105, and a counter for the lottery is obtained from the various counter area 106e of the RAM 106. As shown in FIG. 41, the table for the attack mode add-on lottery is set so that the probability of winning the add-on lottery differs depending on the type of lottery result.

Here, in this embodiment, the push order bell and push order replay are also set to trigger the lottery for the attack mode number of games addition lottery. As shown in FIG. 37, the push order bell and push order replay (hereinafter, these are also collectively referred to as "push order roles") are set to a common point value PV regardless of the setting value, and there is no setting difference in the winning probability. And, there is no setting difference in the winning probability of the number of games addition lottery triggered by the push order role and the number of added games when won. In other words, there is no setting difference in the adding performance triggered by the push order role. These push order roles, including the above-mentioned transition trigger role, are also referred to as specific roles in the following explanation as roles that trigger the lottery for the instruction function. It is optional whether or not to set a setting difference in the adding performance triggered by the push order role, and a configuration with a setting difference may be configured.

As shown in FIG. 41, among the specific roles, the push order role has a lower probability of winning the lottery for the number of games added in the attack mode compared to the transition trigger role. Therefore, if the transition trigger role appears as the lottery result of each game, there is a higher expectation of the number of games added in the attack mode. In that case, it is considered that the player will proceed with the game while hoping that the transition trigger role will be won based on that premise. On the other hand, the push order role has a higher probability of winning in each game compared to the transition trigger role, and it can be said to be a game result that is relatively easy to appear. By configuring the roles in this way, the presence of the push order role as a role that triggers an addition can be reduced, and the surprise when an addition occurs can be increased. Moreover, the opportunity for an addition based on these push order roles to occur is realistically possible during the attack mode (more specifically, the occurrence rate is such that it will occur once if 50 games, which are the initial number of games, are played 2 to 3 times). Therefore, it is possible to preferably generate an addition triggered by the above-mentioned unexpected push order role.

If it is determined that the additional lottery has been won, in step S916, it is determined whether or not the bonus winning flag is set. If the bonus winning flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S917, where a lottery process for the number of additional games in attack mode is performed. In this lottery process for the number of additional games, a table for lottery for the number of additional games in attack mode is obtained from the various table storage area 105a of the ROM 105, and a counter for lottery is obtained from the various counter area 106e of the RAM 106. The table for lottery for the number of additional games in attack mode is set so that the number of additional games differs depending on the type of specific role, as shown in FIG. 40. For example, with a strong cherry, an attack mode of 20 to 200 games is added, and the average number of additional games is 30 games. Also, with a weak cherry, an attack mode of 5 to 300 games is added, and the average number of additional games is 20 games. Although a larger number of games may be selected for a weak cherry than for a strong cherry, the average number of games is set so that a stronger cherry has a larger number of games.

In step S918, a process for adding the number of games in attack mode is performed. In this process, a process for adding a value corresponding to the number of added games drawn in step S917 is performed to a counter that manages the number of continued games in attack mode (more specifically, an attack mode continuation counter provided in various counter area 106e of RAM 106). In the following step S919, a process for notifying the player that the add-on lottery has been won and the number of games played is performed. Then, in step S920, a process for setting an add-on command including the processing result of the add-on notification process as an output target to the display control device 81 is performed, and then the second specific role process is terminated. The process for notifying the player that the add-on lottery has been won is performed.

If the bonus win flag is set in step S916, the process proceeds to step S921. In step S921, an attack mode addition flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106, and then the second specific role process is terminated. The attack mode addition flag is a flag that allows the CPU 102 to know that the condition for adding the number of games in the attack mode has been met. As will be described in detail later, if the bonus ends while the attack mode addition flag is set, the attack mode is added at the end of the bonus. In other words, similar to the notification of the number of games addition in the challenge mode, the game for which the addition notification is made is set to differ depending on whether or not a bonus is won at the same time.

If it is determined in step S915 that the additional lottery has not been won, the process proceeds to step S922. In step S922, a lottery for transition to the specialized zone is executed. That is, if a specific role is won during the attack mode, but the lottery for transition to the VB mode or the lottery for the additional number of games in the attack mode is not won, a lottery for transition to the specialized zone is executed. In the specialized zone lottery process, a table for the lottery for transition to the specialized zone is obtained from the various table storage area 105a of the ROM 105, and a lottery is executed using a lottery counter or the like to determine whether or not to transition the display mode to the specialized zone.

As shown in FIG. 38, the table for the specialized zone transition lottery is set so that the winning probability of the transition lottery differs depending on the type of transition trigger role among the specific roles. As already explained, the transition trigger role that overlaps with the bonus does not win the transition lottery to the VB mode, while the overlapping role with the bonus is set so that it always wins the game number addition lottery in the attack mode (100% probability of winning) as shown in FIG. 41. Therefore, the specialized zone transition lottery is not triggered by these overlapping roles with the bonus, and the specialized zone transition lottery is set so that it can be won when a strong cherry or weak cherry that is not an overlapping role with the bonus is won, and the VB mode transition lottery and the game number addition lottery are not won. For example, the specialized zone transition lottery based on the strong cherry has a 5% probability of winning, and the specialized zone transition lottery based on the weak cherry has a 0.5% probability of winning. On the other hand, there is a 15% chance of winning in the specialized zone transition lottery based on strong watermelons, and a 5% chance of winning in the specialized zone transition lottery based on weak watermelons.

In step S923, it is determined whether or not the player has won the lottery to move to the specialized zone based on the processing result of step S922. If the player has not won, the second specific role processing ends. If the player has won, the specialized zone winning flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d in step S924. Then, in step S925, a premonition game number table is obtained, in step S926, a premonition game number is selected, in step S927, the premonition game number is set, and in step S928, a premonition command is set, and the second specific role processing ends. The processing of steps S925 to S927 is the same as, for example, the processing of steps S906 to S908, and is processing for setting the premonition mode.

If a negative judgment is made in step S923 and the player has not won any of the lottery for transition to VB mode, the lottery for adding the number of games in attack mode, or the lottery for transition to the specialized zone, the second specific role processing is terminated.

<Third specific role processing>
Next, the third specific combination processing executed in step S709 of FIG. 32 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

The third special role processing is performed when the player is in the third RT state, or in the second RT state and has won the VB mode. In this case, the display mode corresponds to the attack mode or the VB mode. The third special role processing involves processing to add to the number of continued games in the attack mode, and a lottery to determine whether or not to transition to a specialized zone.

That is, in step S1001, a lottery process for adding the number of games in the attack mode is performed. This process is similar to the process in step S914. Note that the probability of winning the lottery for the addition may be different between the lottery process in step S914 and the lottery process in step S1001.

In step S1002, it is determined whether the result of the lottery in step S1001 was a winning result for the additional bonus. If it is determined that the additional bonus lottery has been won, in step S1003, it is determined whether the bonus winning flag is set. If the bonus winning flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S1004, where a lottery process for the number of additional bonus games in attack mode is performed. Then, in step S1005, the number of games in attack mode is added, in step S1006, the additional bonus notification process is performed, and in step S1007, the additional bonus command is set as an output target to the display control device 81, and then the third specific role process is terminated. The processes in steps S1003 to S1007 are the same as the processes in steps S916 to S920. The number of additional bonus games may be different in the lottery process in step S917 and the lottery process in step S1004.

If the result of step S1002 is negative, the process proceeds to step S1009. In step S1009, a lottery is performed to transition to the specialized zone. That is, if a specific combination is won during VB mode, but the lottery for adding the number of games in attack mode is not won, a lottery for transition to the specialized zone is also performed. The lottery process for the specialized zone is the same as the process of step S922 above, and is performed based on a table for the lottery for transition to the specialized zone (Figure 38). The processes of steps S1010 to S1015 are the same as the processes of steps S923 to S928 above. Furthermore, if the bonus win flag is determined to be set in step S1003, the attack mode add-on flag is set in step S1008, and the third specific combination process is then terminated. The attack mode add-on flag is as described above.

Returning to the explanation of the lottery result response process in FIG. 32, after execution of step S704, step S707 or step S709, or if a positive judgment is made in step S708, the process proceeds to step S710, where it is determined whether the result of this lottery process was a push order role win of push order replay or push order bell. If a push order role win is made, push order role processing is executed in step S711. Such push order role processing will be explained in detail later.

If a negative judgment is made in step S710, or after the processing of step S711 is executed, the process proceeds to step S712. In step S712, it is judged whether or not a specialized zone flag corresponding to the added specialized zone is set in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106. As described above, the specialized zone flag is a flag that is set when a transition to the specialized zone occurs (when the seventh replay win is established) after the specialized zone win flag is set based on winning the transition lottery to the super attack mode or the transition lottery to the specialized zone. If the specialized zone flag is set in step S712, processing for the specialized zone is executed in step S713. If a negative judgment is made in step S712, or after the processing of step S713 is executed, this lottery result response processing is terminated.

<Specialized Zone Treatment>
The specialized zone process will be described with reference to the flow chart of FIG.

In the specialized zone process, first, in step S1101, the result of the current lottery process is ascertained. In the following step S1102, a lottery process for the number of added games in attack mode is performed. In the following step S1103, a process for adding the number of games in attack mode is performed. Then, in step S1104, a process for notifying the addition is executed, and in step S1105, an addition command is set, and then the specialized zone process is terminated. The processes in steps S1102 to S1105 are the same as the processes in steps S917 to S920. However, the number of games selected in the lottery process for the number of added games in step S1102 is greater than the lottery process for the number of added games in step S917 (Figure 40). Also, in the specialized zone, the number of games in attack mode is always added regardless of the game result (Figure 41).

As described above, in the lottery result response process, on the condition that the game is not in a carryover state, a lottery for transition to challenge mode, attack mode, or VB mode, and processing for adding to the number of games continued in challenge mode or attack mode are performed. In other words, even if a specific role is won, in the carryover state, a lottery for transition to challenge mode, attack mode, or VB mode, and processing for adding to the number of games continued in challenge mode or attack mode are not performed, and their implementation is restricted. If the lottery for transition to challenge mode, attack mode, or VB mode is won, a premonition game will be played, and then a notification that the transition lottery has been won will be made. Therefore, the process for transitioning the game state based on the result of the lottery for transitioning the display mode will be explained below.

<Process for transitioning game state based on result of lottery for transition of display mode>
(2) In the process for shifting the game state based on the result of the lottery for shifting the display mode, a process for notifying the winning of the lottery for shifting the display mode and a process for notifying the winning of the lottery for shifting the game state are performed. First, the process for notifying the winning of the lottery for shifting the display mode will be described.

<Mode transition notification process>
The notification of winning the transition lottery is performed in the mode transition notification process (step S206) in the normal process (FIG. 15). The mode transition notification process is performed when a predetermined betting operation is performed (when it is determined that the number of bets in step S205 is the specified number). The mode transition notification process will be described below with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

In step S1201, it is determined whether the number of premonition games is 0. The number of premonition games is counted in the winning result response process described below, and the number of premonition games is decremented by 1 each time a game is played. If the number of premonition games is not 0, the mode transition notification process is terminated.

If the number of premonition games is 0, in step S1202 it is determined whether or not the bonus win flag is set. In other words, it is determined whether or not the current premonition mode was a premonition mode triggered by a bonus win. If the bonus win flag is set, in step S1203 a bonus win notification command is set as an output target to the display control device 81, and then the mode transition notification process is terminated. Upon receiving the bonus win notification command, the display control device 81 notifies the user that a bonus has been won on the auxiliary display unit 65, etc. Such notifications will be explained in detail later.

Incidentally, in this embodiment, if a bonus and an attack mode, a challenge mode, or the like are simultaneously won, a winning notification of the attack mode, etc. is made at the end of the bonus notified in step S1203. The process related to such winning notifications will be explained in detail later, but if a winning notification of the attack mode, etc. is made in conjunction with a winning notification of the bonus, it is recommended to set a winning notification command for the attack mode, etc. in conjunction with the bonus winning notification command set in step S1203.

If the determination in step S1202 is negative, the process proceeds to step S1204. In step S1204, it is determined whether or not the challenge mode win flag is set. In other words, it is determined whether or not the current premonition mode was a premonition mode triggered by the win of the challenge mode. If the challenge mode win flag is set, the challenge mode win flag is cleared in step S1205. Then, in step S1206, a challenge mode flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106. The challenge mode flag is a flag that allows the CPU 102 to know that the current display mode is the challenge mode. In step S1207, a challenge mode start command is set as an output target to the display control device 81. The display control device 81 that has received the challenge mode start command notifies the user that the challenge mode is about to start by the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like. Such notification will be described in detail later.

Then, in step S1208, counting the number of times the challenge mode will continue is started. Specifically, an initial value (e.g., 10) for the number of games to continue in the challenge mode is set in the challenge mode continuation counter provided in the various counter area 106e of the RAM 106. After the processing of step S1208 is performed, the processing for notifying the transition to this mode is terminated.

If it is determined in step S1204 that the challenge mode winning flag is not set, it is determined in step S1209 whether or not the attack mode winning flag is set. In other words, it is determined whether or not the present premonition mode was a premonition mode triggered by the winning of the attack mode. If the attack mode winning flag is set, the attack mode winning flag is cleared in step S1210. Then, in step S1211, an attack notification flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106. The attack notification flag is a flag for transitioning the game state to the second RT state in response to the winning of the attack mode transition lottery. Then, in step S1212, an attack mode winning notification command is set as an output target to the display control device 81. The display control device 81 that has received the attack mode winning notification command notifies the player that the attack mode transition lottery has been won by the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like. Such notification will be described in detail later. After executing step S1212, the mode transition notification process ends.

Incidentally, in this embodiment, the winning notification mode for the Super Attack mode is different from the winning notification mode for the Attack mode. Therefore, in step S1212, it is preferable to set the Attack mode winning notification command so as to include information on whether or not it is the Super Attack mode. The winning notification mode for the Attack mode and the winning notification mode for the Super Attack mode need only be different enough for the player to distinguish, and more preferably, the winning notification mode for the highly advantageous Super Attack mode should be more flashy than the winning notification mode for the Attack mode.

The winning notification format for the Attack Mode and Super Attack Mode may be made the same. By doing so, it is possible to make it appear as if the winning content has been upgraded from Attack Mode to Super Attack Mode between the Attack Mode winning notification game and the start notification game, eliminating the drag caused by the difference between the Attack Mode winning notification game and the start notification game.

If it is determined in step S1209 that the attack mode winning flag is not set, it is determined in step S1213 whether or not the VB mode winning flag is set. In other words, it is determined whether or not the present premonition mode was a premonition mode triggered by the winning of the VB mode. If the attack mode winning flag is set, the VB mode winning flag is cleared in step S1214. Then, in step S1215, a VB notification flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106. The VB notification flag is a flag for transitioning the game state to the third RT state in association with the winning of the VB mode transition lottery. Then, in step S1216, a VB mode winning notification command is set as an output target to the display control device 81. The display control device 81 that has received the VB mode winning notification command notifies the player that the VB mode transition lottery has been won by the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like. Such notification will be described in detail later. After executing step S1216, the mode transition notification process ends.

If it is determined in step S1213 that the VB mode winning flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S1217. In step S1217, it is determined whether or not the specialized zone winning flag is set. If it is not set, the mode transition notification process is terminated. If it is set, the specialized zone winning flag is cleared in step S1218. Then, in step S1219, a specialized zone notification flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d. The specialized zone notification flag is a flag for executing a push order notification corresponding to the 7th replay winning. After executing the process of step S1219, the specialized zone winning notification command is set as an output target to the display control device 81 in step S1220, and then the mode transition notification process is terminated. The display control device 81 that has received the specialized zone winning notification command controls the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64 to notify the player that the specialized zone has been won. If the determination in step S1217 is negative, the mode transition notification process ends.

That is, of the challenge mode, attack mode, VB mode, and specialized zone, which are transitioned through the premonition mode, the challenge mode is initiated based on the betting operation when the premonition game count in the premonition mode becomes 0. On the other hand, for the attack mode, VB mode, and specialized zone, only a notification that the attack mode transition lottery or the VB mode transition lottery has been won is made based on the betting operation when the premonition game count in the premonition mode becomes 0, and the attack mode, VB mode, and specialized zone are not initiated even if the premonition game count becomes 0. This is due to the difference that the challenge mode as a display mode does not involve a transition in the game state, while the attack mode and VB mode involve a transition in the game state; specifically, the attack mode is initiated by transitioning to the second RT state, and the VB mode is initiated by transitioning to the third RT state. In addition, there are cases where the specialized zone does not involve a transition of the game state (3rd RT state → 3rd RT state), but in this embodiment, the 7th replay winning game in the 3rd RT state is set as the starting game, so the above processing configuration is used.

As already explained, the second RT state is entered when the first promotion replays 1 to 4 are won and the third replay win is established, and the third RT state is entered when the second promotion replays 1 and 2 are won and the fourth and fifth replay wins are established. And when the first promotion replays 1 to 4 are won and the third replay win is established, or when the second promotion replays 1 and 2 are won and the fourth and fifth replay wins are established, it is the case that the operation sequence of the stop switches 42 to 44 at the time of winning these promotion replays corresponds to the third replay win, etc. Therefore, when the transition lottery to the attack mode or VB mode is won, the operation sequence of the stop switches 42 to 44 is notified in the game in which the role that will transition these game states is won, making it possible to transition the game state. In addition, from the time when the player is notified that they have won the lottery to switch to attack mode or VB mode, until the attack mode or VB mode starts (until the game state switches), a notification of the preparation state (for example, a notification that says "preparing") is made.

<Explanation about display mode transition>
The notification process for changing the game state is performed in the push order role process (step S711) in the lottery result corresponding process (FIG. 32). Prior to the explanation of the push order role process, an overview of the case where the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is notified will be explained with reference to FIG.

＜Outline of the push order announcement＞
Notification of the operation sequence when the push order role is won (push order notification, push order notification performance, sequence notification, mode notification) is mainly performed by the auxiliary display unit 65 and the instruction monitor 68. Here, the push order notification performance on the auxiliary display unit 65 will be explained using as an example a case where the push order role is won when the operation sequence to be notified this time is center → right → left. The push order notification on the instruction monitor 68 will be explained in detail later.

As shown in FIG. 43(a), in the auxiliary display unit 65, of the three parallel button displays corresponding to the stop switches 42 to 44, the button display corresponding to the stop switch that should be operated first (the middle button display corresponding to the middle stop switch 43 in the figure) is marked with the number 1 and displayed larger than the other button displays. In addition, each button display is displayed in a color corresponding to the winning role (yellow for bell, blue for replay, etc.). This allows the player to recognize the winning role in the current game and that the stop switch that should be operated first is the middle stop switch 43. In addition, in the auxiliary display unit 65, the right button display is displayed with the number 2 and the left button display is displayed with the number 3 to indicate that the next stop switch to be operated is the right stop switch 44 and the last stop switch to be operated is the left stop switch 42.

When the player operates the middle stop switch 43, as shown in FIG. 43(b), the center button display corresponding to the middle stop switch 43 disappears on the auxiliary display unit 65, and the right button display corresponding to the right stop switch 44 is displayed large. This allows the player to confirm that the operation of the middle stop switch 43 has been completed, and that the next stop switch to be operated is the right stop switch 44.

When the player operates the right stop switch 44, as shown in FIG. 43(c), the right button display corresponding to the right stop switch 44 disappears in the auxiliary display unit 65, and the left button display corresponding to the left stop switch 42 is displayed large. This allows the player to confirm that the operation of the right stop switch 44 has been completed, and that the next stop switch to be operated is the left stop switch 42.

To explain the timing of the push order notification, it is set to be executed during the inactive period of the stop switches 42 to 44 from when the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R starts, through the acceleration period, until the reels reach constant speed rotation. By configuring the push order notification to be executed at a timing before the operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 becomes effective in this way, it is possible for the player to recognize the operation sequence of the stop switches 42 to 44 and then operate the stop switches 42 to 44 as desired, allowing the game to progress at a good tempo.

<Push order processing>
Next, the push order role processing executed in step S712 in the lottery result response processing (Figure 32) will be explained with reference to the flowchart of Figure 44.

In step S1301, it is determined whether the current lottery result is any one of the first promotion replays 1 to 4. A positive determination is made in step S1301 when the first replay or the third replay wins, depending on the operation sequence of the current game. In this case, the process proceeds to step S1302, where it is determined whether an attack notification flag has been set in the various flags storage area 106d of RAM 106. As already explained, the attack notification flag is a flag that is set when the number of premonition games in the premonition mode becomes 0 after winning the lottery to transition to the attack mode in the mode transition notification process (Figure 42).

If the attack notification flag is set, in step S1303, processing for notifying the push order for the third replay is executed. Specifically, of the first and third replays, the operation sequence corresponding to the third replay winning is notified (see FIG. 24(a)). Then, in step S1304, processing is performed to set the push order notification command as an output target to the display control device 81, which is the sub-side control device, and then this push order role processing is terminated. The push order notification command contains information on the current display mode and information on the lottery result. The processing on the display control device 81 side based on receiving the push order notification command will be explained in detail later.

The case where the operation sequence corresponding to the third replay winning is notified in step S1303 is basically assumed to be after the lottery for transition to attack mode is won, and the winning notification for attack mode is made after passing through the premonition mode, but before transition to attack mode. That is, the lottery table in the second RT state and the third RT state does not allow the first promotion replays 1 to 4 to be won, and the first promotion replays 1 to 4 can only be won in the first RT state. However, even during attack mode, there are cases where the game state falls from the second RT state to the first RT state due to an incorrect operation, etc., and even in such a case, it is possible to quickly return to the second RT state by winning the first promotion replays 1 to 4.

If a negative judgment is made in step S1301, in step S1305, it is judged whether the current lottery result is any of Fall Replays 1 to 3. A positive judgment is made in step S1305 when the first replay or the second replay wins depending on the operation sequence of the current game. In this case, in step S1306, it is judged whether the attack notification flag is set. If the attack notification flag is set, in step S1307, processing for notifying the push order for the first replay is executed. Specifically, of the first replay and the second replay, the operation sequence corresponding to the first replay winning is notified (see FIG. 24(b)). Thereafter, in step S1308, a process for setting a push order notification command is performed, and then this push order processing is terminated.

In this way, if the first promotion replays 1 to 4 are won in a situation where the transition lottery to attack mode has been won, the operation sequence corresponding to the third replay win is notified, making it possible to transition the game state to the second RT state. On the other hand, if a negative judgment is made in step S1302, the push order role processing ends without performing the process for the push order notification. Therefore, for example, even if the first promotion replays 1 to 4 are won without winning attack mode in the first RT state, there are cases where the first replay win is achieved and cases where the third replay win is achieved.

In addition, if fall replays 1 to 3 are won while the attack notification flag is set, the operation sequence corresponding to the first replay win is notified, making it possible to prevent the game state from transitioning to the first RT state. On the other hand, if a negative judgment is made in step S1306, the push order notification process is terminated without performing the process for push order notification. Therefore, for example, when the attack mode ends, the attack notification flag is cleared, and the display mode transitions to the normal mode, a second replay win may be established by winning fall replays 1 to 3, and the RT state will transition from the second RT state to the first RT state.

Also, for example, in the first RT state, if the first promotion replays 1-4 are won without winning the attack mode, and the operation sequence happens to correspond to the third replay win and the third replay win is achieved (even if the state transitions to the second RT state), the second replay win can be achieved by winning the fall replays 1-3. Therefore, as described above, even if the state transitions to the second RT state by chance without winning the attack mode, the state will then promptly transition to the first RT state.

If a negative judgment is made in step S1305, then in step S1309 it is judged whether the current lottery result is either the second promotion replay 1 or 2. A positive judgment in step S1309 means that the first replay, the fourth replay or the fifth replay wins depending on the operation sequence of the current game. In this case, in step S1310 it is judged whether the attack notification flag is set. If the attack notification flag is set, then in step S1311 it is judged whether a VB notification flag or a specialized zone notification flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d of RAM 106. As already explained, the VB notification flag is a flag that is set in the mode transition notification process (Figure 42) when the number of premonition games in the premonition mode becomes 0 after winning the transition lottery to the VB mode. In addition, the specialized zone notification flag is a flag that is set when the number of premonition games in the premonition mode becomes 0 after winning the lottery for transitioning to the specialized zone in the mode transition notification process (Figure 42).

If the VB notification flag or the specialized zone notification flag is set, processing for notifying the push order for the 4th replay or the 5th replay is executed in step S1312. Specifically, among the 1st replay, the 4th replay, and the 5th replay, the operation sequence corresponding to the 4th replay winning or the 5th replay winning is notified (see FIG. 24(b)). After that, in step S1313, processing is performed to set the push order notification command, and then this push order role processing is terminated.

If a negative judgment is made in step S1310, the push order notification process is not performed and the push order role processing is terminated. On the other hand, if a negative judgment is made in step S1311, the push order notification process for the first replay is executed in step S1307, and the push order notification command is set in step S1308, after which the push order role processing is terminated. Therefore, if the player wins the second promotion replay 1 or 2 without winning the VB mode or specialized zone, if the player is in attack mode, a push order notification effect corresponding to the first replay win is performed, but if the player is not in attack mode, no push order notification effect is performed.

If a negative judgment is made in step S1309, then in step S1314, it is judged whether or not the current lottery result is BAR Replay 1. If a positive judgment is made in step S1314, then depending on the operation sequence of the current game, any one of the first replay, the third replay, and the sixth replay to the eighth replay will win. In this case, in step S1315, it is judged whether or not the attack notification flag is set. If the attack notification flag is set, then in step S1316, it is judged whether or not the specialized zone notification flag is set. If the attack notification flag is set and the specialized zone notification flag is set, then in step S1317, processing for notifying the push order for the seventh replay is executed. Specifically, among the first replay, the third replay, and the sixth replay to the eighth replay, the operation sequence corresponding to the seventh replay winning is announced (see FIG. 24 (c)). Then, in step S1318, the push order notification command is set, and the push order processing ends.

If a negative judgment is made in step S1315, the push order notification process is not performed and the push order role processing ends. On the other hand, if a negative judgment is made in step S1316, the push order notification process for the third replay is executed in step S1303, and the push order notification command is set in step S1304, after which the push order role processing ends. Therefore, if BAR Replay 1 is won without winning VB mode or the specialized zone, if the player is in attack mode, a push order notification effect corresponding to the third replay win is performed, but if the player is not in attack mode, no push order notification effect is performed.

If the result of step S1314 is negative, then in step S1319 it is determined whether the current lottery result is a push order bell win. If the result of step S1314 is a push order bell win, then in step S1320 it is determined whether the current display mode is normal mode or challenge mode. If the display mode is not normal mode or challenge mode, then in step S1321 a push order notification process is executed to notify the operation sequence corresponding to the first minor win (see FIG. 20). Then, in step S1322, a push order notification command is set, and then the main push order role process is terminated. Also, if the result of step S1320 is positive, then the main push order role process is terminated without performing the push order notification process. If the result of step S1319 is negative, then in step S1323 a reach eye push order notification process is executed, and then the main push order role process is terminated. The reach eye push order notification process will be described in detail later.

When the push order notification is to be executed at least a predetermined number of times (once) in the challenge mode, a configuration may be adopted in which a determination is made in step S1302 or step S1320 as to whether or not the push order notification has been executed a predetermined number of times during the challenge mode. If a negative determination is made in this case, a configuration may be adopted in which a count is made a predetermined number of times and the process proceeds to step S1303 or step S1321 for the push order notification.

<Processing for switching display modes based on winning results>
<Winning Result Processing>
Next, the process when the winning combination corresponding to the transition of the gaming state is won as a result of the notification for transition of the gaming state as described above will be described (3). This process is performed in the winning result corresponding process (step S415) in the reel control process (FIG. 19). The winning result corresponding process will be described below with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

In step S1401, a game number management process is executed. Details will be described later, but in this game number management process, in addition to counting the number of premonition games in the premonition mode described above, the number of continued games in the challenge mode, attack mode, VB mode, and specialized zone is counted. In the following step S1402, a later-addition notification process is executed. The later-addition notification process is a process for making a later-addition notification, which is one notification mode of a later-addition notification. The later-addition notification process will be described in detail later.

In the next step S1403, it is determined whether or not the current stop result is a third replay win. As described above, if a third replay win has been achieved, the RT state processing (FIG. 22) performs processing to transition the game state to the second RT state. In this case, in step S1404, it is determined whether or not the attack notification flag has been set. If the attack notification flag has not been set, this is the case when a third replay win has been achieved without the conditions for transitioning to attack mode being met, in which case the winning result response processing ends as is without performing processing to start attack mode.

If the attack notification flag is set, in step S1405, it is determined whether the current display mode is in attack mode. Specifically, it is determined whether the attack mode flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d. The attack mode flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to specify that the display mode is attack mode. Incidentally, in addition to the attack mode flag, flags for specifying the display mode include a challenge mode flag, a VB mode flag, a specialized zone flag, and a BB mode flag. In this embodiment, if the display mode is a mode corresponding to a higher RT state than the attack mode (VB mode, added specialized zone), the attack mode flag is configured to coexist with the corresponding flag of that mode (VB mode flag, specialized zone flag). Therefore, for example, in step S1405, the case where it is determined that the attack mode flag is set includes the case where the attack mode is in attack mode, the case where the VB mode is in the specialized zone, and the case where the specialized zone is in the specialized zone.

If the attack mode flag is set in step S1405, the display mode is already attack mode, so this winning result response process ends. On the other hand, if the attack mode flag is not set, processing to start attack mode is performed in steps S1406 to S1409.

That is, in step S1406, the attack mode flag is set. In the following step S1407, the attack mode start command is set as an output target to the display control device 81. The display control device 81, which has received the attack mode start command, notifies the player that the attack mode will start from the next game, using the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like. This notification will be described in detail later. After that, in step S1408, the attack mode continuation number is started to be counted. Specifically, the attack mode continuation counter provided in the various counter area 106e of the RAM 106 is set to an initial value (e.g., 50) for the number of continuing games in the attack mode.

After performing the processing of step S1408, in step S1409, it is determined whether or not the specialized zone flag is set. If a positive determination is made in step S1409, it means that the attack mode that has been won this time is the super attack mode, in which case the specialized zone winning flag is cleared in step S1410, and then the processing for starting the added specialized zone (steps S1419 to S1421) proceeds. The processing for starting the added specialized zone will be explained later. If a negative determination is made in step S1409, the winning result response processing ends as is.

If it is determined in step S1403 that the third replay winning has not been achieved, the process proceeds to step S1411. In step S1411, it is determined whether or not the fourth and fifth replay winnings have been achieved as the current stop result. As described above, if the fourth and fifth replay winnings have been achieved, the RT state process (FIG. 22) performs processing to transition the game state to the third RT state. In this case, in step S1412, it is determined whether or not the VB notification flag is set. If the VB notification flag is not set, this is the case where the fourth and fifth replay winnings have been achieved without winning the VB mode transition lottery, in which case the winning result response processing is terminated without performing processing for starting the VB mode. If the VB notification flag is set, it is determined in step S1413 whether or not the VB mode flag is set. If the VB mode flag is set, the display mode is already in the VB mode, so this winning result response processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the VB mode flag is not set, processing to start VB mode is performed in steps S1414 to S1416.

That is, in step S1414, a process is performed to set the VB mode flag. In this case, the attack mode flag and the VB mode flag coexist in the various flag storage area 106d. This is because VB mode is a mode that is transitioned to via attack mode, and after VB mode ends, the transition to attack mode is always made.

Then, in step S1415, a VB mode start command is set as an output target to the display control device 81. Having received the VB mode start command, the display control device 81 notifies the user, via the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like, that VB mode will start from the next game. This notification will be described in detail later. Then, in step S1416, counting the number of VB mode continuations is started. Specifically, an initial value (e.g., 25) for the number of continued games in VB mode is set in a VB mode continuation counter provided in the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106. After the processing of step S1416 has been performed, this winning result response processing is terminated.

If it is determined in step S1411 that the 4th and 5th replay wins have not been achieved, the process proceeds to step S1417. In step S1417, it is determined whether or not the 7th replay win has been achieved as a result of the current stop. In this embodiment, if the 7th replay win has been achieved, that is, if the "black BAR" symbol stops in the middle of the left reel 32L, the "black BAR" symbol stops in the middle of the middle reel 32M, and the "black BAR" symbol stops in the middle of the right reel 32R, and the "black BAR" symbol stops on the combination line in the middle, the configuration is such that a transition to the added-on special zone occurs. Note that a 7th replay win is achieved when BAR Replay 1 is won and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the operation sequence corresponding to the 7th replay win (Figure 24 (c)).

If the seventh replay win has been achieved, in step S1418, it is determined whether or not the notification flag for the specialized zone is set. If the notification flag for the specialized zone is set, processing for starting the specialized zone is performed in steps S1419 to S1421. As already explained, at the start of the super attack mode, even if a positive determination is made in step S1409 and processing of step S1410 is performed, processing of steps S1419 to S1421 is also performed.

Specifically, in step S1419, a process is performed to set a specialized zone flag in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106. The specialized zone flag is a flag that allows the CPU 102 to know that it is the above-mentioned added specialized zone, and when the specialized zone flag is set, the count of the number of continued games in the VB mode is stopped. In this case, the various flag storage area 106d may contain an attack mode flag, a VB mode flag, and a specialized zone flag.

After that, in step S1420, the specialized zone start command is set as an output target to the display control device 81. The display control device 81, which has received the specialized zone start command, notifies the player that the specialized zone will start from the next game by using the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like. Such notification will be described in detail later. Then, in step S1421, counting the number of specialization zone continuations is started. Specifically, an initial value (e.g., 5) for the number of specialization zone continuation games is set in the specialization zone continuation counter provided in the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106. After the processing of step S1421 is performed, this winning result response processing is terminated. Also, if a negative judgment is made in step S1417 or step S1418, the winning result response processing is terminated as it is.

As described above, a process for transitioning the display mode is performed separately from the RT state process (Fig. 22) based on the winning of a combination (third to fifth replay) that corresponds to a transition in the game state. This is to avoid a situation where an attack mode or the like is started based on the winning of a combination that corresponds to a transition in the game state even though the lottery for transitioning the display mode has not been won.

In addition, when the display mode transition is accompanied by a transition of the game state, transition to a higher mode, i.e., transition from normal mode or challenge mode to attack mode, transition from attack mode to VB mode, or transition from attack mode or VB mode to a specialized zone, is configured to transition based on the winning result of the corresponding role. Therefore, the transition of the display mode and the transition of the game state are performed as a set in the same game. On the other hand, in the case of transition to a lower mode, when the game state transition occurs due to, for example, a second replay win as a fall replay or the stopping of a transition result, the display mode is not transitioned. When transitioning to a lower mode, the game state is managed by the winning result (RT state processing), while the display mode is managed by the number of games. Therefore, when transitioning to a lower mode, the transition of the game state and the transition of the display mode may occur in separate games.

<Game Number Management Processing>
The game count management process executed in step S1401 of the winning result response process will be described with reference to the flowchart in Fig. 46. In the game count management process, the number of premonition games in the premonition mode is counted, and the number of continued games in the challenge mode, attack mode, VB mode, and specialized zone is counted, and when the number of continued games in these display modes becomes 0, a process for terminating the corresponding display mode is performed.

In the game count management process, first, in step S1501, it is determined whether the number of bets is a specific number. As already explained, in this embodiment, each game can be played with a bet number of 1 to 3, and in step S1501, it is determined whether the specific number is 3 bets. If it is not 3 bets, the game count management process ends. In other words, in games with 1 or 2 bets, the number of games in premonition mode and the number of continued games in challenge mode, etc. are not counted. Note that the counting may be performed regardless of the number of bets.

If the game to be ended this time is a 3-bet game, the process proceeds to step S1502. In step S1502, it is determined whether the bonus win flag is set or whether the game is in a bonus state. If a positive determination is made in step S1502, it is determined in step S1503 whether the current display mode is attack mode, VB mode, or added specialization zone. If a positive determination is made in step S1503, the process proceeds to step S1504, where the display mode flags, the attack mode flag, the VB mode flag, and the specialization zone flag, are cleared, and the game count management process is terminated. In other words, if the bonus win flag is set or during a bonus, the number of games in attack mode, etc. is not counted. Note that if any flag is not set in step S1504, that state is maintained.

Incidentally, in step S1504, the attack mode flag and VB mode flag are cleared, but the attack notification flag and VB notification flag are not cleared. Therefore, after the bonus ends, after going through a preparation state for attack mode, etc., these flags will notify the push order to transition the game state, making it possible to return to the game state before the bonus. On the other hand, if a bonus is won during a specialized zone, the specialized zone will end when the bonus is won. Note that if challenge mode, attack mode, etc., and a bonus are won simultaneously, and a challenge mode win flag, attack mode win flag, etc. are set, these win flags are not cleared in step S1504. Therefore, if challenge mode, etc., and a bonus are won simultaneously, a win notification based on these win flags will be made after the bonus ends.

If a negative judgment is made in step S1502 or step S1503, in step S1505, it is judged whether the number of premonition games is 0. If it is not 0, in step S1506, the number of premonition games is decremented by 1. If the number of premonition games is 0 in step S1505 (if not in premonition mode), or after the processing of step S1506 has been executed, in steps S1507 to S1529, the number of continued games in each mode is counted.

That is, in step S1507, it is determined whether or not the current display mode is the challenge mode. If it is the challenge mode, the process proceeds to step S1508, where the challenge mode continuation counter is decremented by 1, thereby decrementing the number of games to be continued in the challenge mode. Then, in step S1509, it is determined whether or not the challenge mode continuation counter is 0. If it is not 0, the game count management process ends. If it is 0, the challenge mode flag is cleared in step S1510, and a challenge mode end command is set as an output target to the display control device 81 in step S1511. The display control device 81 that has received the challenge mode end command notifies the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like that the challenge mode will end in the current game. After the process of step S1511 has been performed, the game count management process ends.

If it is determined in step S1507 that the mode is not the challenge mode, the process proceeds to step S1512. In step S1512, it is determined whether or not the current display mode is the attack mode. If it is the attack mode, the process proceeds to step S1513, and it is determined whether or not the mode is a specialized zone in the attack mode. In other words, if the mode transitions to a specialized zone at the start of the attack mode, such as in the super attack mode, a positive determination is made in step S1513. If it is in the specialized zone, game number management processing for the specialized zone is performed in steps S1526 to S1529. These processes will be explained later.

If it is determined in step S1513 that the zone is not a specialized zone, the attack mode continuation counter is decremented by 1 in step S1514, thereby decrementing the number of games in attack mode. Then, in step S1515, it is determined whether the attack mode continuation counter is 0. If it is not 0, the game number management process ends. If it is 0, the attack mode flag is cleared in step S1516, and the attack notification flag is cleared in step S1517. Then, in step S1518, the attack mode end command is set as an output target to the display control device 81. The display control device 81 that has received the attack mode end command notifies the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like that the attack mode will end in this game. Such notification will be described in detail later. After the process of step S1518 is performed, the game number management process ends.

If it is determined in step S1512 that the mode is not the attack mode, the process proceeds to step S1519. In step S1519, it is determined whether the current display mode is the VB mode. If it is the VB mode, the process proceeds to step S1520 to determine whether it is an add-on specialization zone. If it is not an add-on specialization zone, the VB mode continuation counter is decremented by 1 in step S1521, thereby decrementing the number of games continued in VB mode. Then, in step S1522, it is determined whether the VB mode continuation counter is 0. If it is not 0, the game number management process is terminated as it is. If it is 0, the VB mode flag is cleared in step S1523, and the VB notification flag is cleared in step S1524. Then, in step S1525, the VB mode end command is set as an output target to the display control device 81. In the display control device 81 that has received the VB mode end command, a notification that the VB mode will end in this game is performed on the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like. Such notifications will be explained in detail later. After processing step S1525, the game count management process ends.

If it is determined in step S1520 that the zone is an added specialized zone, the process proceeds to step S1526. As already explained, if it is determined in step S1513 that the zone is a specialized zone in attack mode, the process proceeds to step S1526. In step S1526, the specialized zone continuation counter is decremented by 1, thereby decrementing the number of games continued in the specialized zone. Then, in step S1527, it is determined whether the specialized zone continuation counter is 0 or not. If it is 0, in step S15278, the specialized zone flag is cleared, and in step S1529, the specialized zone end command is set as an output target to the display control device 81. In the display control device 81 that has received the specialized zone end command, a notification that the specialized zone will end in this game is made on the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like. As such a notification, for example, a notification of the total number of games successfully added in the current specialized zone is made. After the processing of step S1529 is performed, the game number management process is terminated. If a negative judgment is made in step S1519 or step S1527, the game count management process ends.

<End Determination Process>
Next, the end determination process as the process at the end of the bonus will be described with reference to the flowchart of Fig. 47. As already described, the end determination process is a process carried out in step S614 in the bonus state process (Fig. 27). In the end determination process, it is determined whether the bonus end condition is met, and when the bonus is to be ended, a process for notifying the winning of the attack mode or the like which has been won in combination with the bonus is performed, and a process for adding the number of games in the attack mode or the like which has been won in combination with the bonus is performed.

That is, in step S1601, it is determined whether or not a small win has been achieved. As already explained, during the first BB or second BB bonus, the first role in BB is achieved with a high probability, and in some cases, the second role in BB or the third role in BB is achieved (FIG. 29). When the first role in BB is won, the first small win is mainly achieved and a predetermined number (9 medals) of medals are paid out, and the second role in BB and the third role in BB are replays of the 9th replay or the 10th replay, and no medals are paid out even if a win is achieved. Also, during CB, any of CB small/medium roles 1 to CB small/medium roles 2 is won, and regardless of which one is won, the first small win is mainly achieved and a predetermined number (15 medals) of medals are paid out. Step S1601 is a process for determining whether or not a small win that generates a medal payout has been achieved among the roles that are won during these bonuses and CBs.

If it is determined in step S1601 that a small win has been achieved, the process of subtracting the payout amount for this game from the remaining payout amount is performed in step S1602. If the determination in step S1601 is negative, or after the process of step S1602 has been executed, it is determined in step S1603 whether the remaining payout amount has become 0. If it is not 0, the end determination process is terminated. If it is 0, a bonus end command is set as an output target to the display control device 81 in step S1604, and then in steps S1605 to S1619, processing for notifying a win such as attack mode and processing for adding to the number of continued games such as attack mode are performed.

That is, in step S1605, it is determined whether or not the attack mode winning flag is set. If the attack mode winning flag is set, a lottery process for the number of premonition games is performed in step S1606, the number of premonition games is set in step S1607, and the premonition command is set in step S1608.

Incidentally, in this embodiment, in the process of drawing the number of premonition games in step S1606, a drawing is performed in which the number of premonition games will be 0 with a 100% probability. In other words, in step S1607, the number of premonition games is always set to 0 games, and a winning notification of attack mode, etc. is made in the game following the bonus ending game. After the process of step S1608 is executed, the end determination process is terminated.

If the attack mode winning flag is not set in step S1605, then in step S1609 it is determined whether the challenge mode winning flag is set. If the challenge mode winning flag is set, then the process for the premonition mode in steps S1606 to S1608 is performed, and then the end determination process is terminated.

If the challenge mode winning flag is not set in step S1609, it is determined in step S1510 whether or not the VB mode winning flag is set. If the VB mode winning flag is set, the process for the premonition mode in steps S1606 to S1608 is performed, and then the end determination process is terminated. In other words, if the bonus ends while the challenge mode or VB mode has also been won, after the bonus ends and a premonition game has been played, a winning announcement for the challenge mode or VB mode is made.

When the attack mode win flag or challenge mode win flag is set, the bonus ends when attack mode, challenge mode, etc. and a bonus are won simultaneously, or when a bonus is won during a premonition mode of a win announcement for attack mode, challenge mode, etc. On the other hand, when the VB mode win flag is set, the bonus ends when VB mode and a bonus are won simultaneously during attack mode, or when a bonus is won during a premonition mode of a win announcement for VB mode (in this case, the premonition mode of 0 games is selected, so the game after VB mode was won).

If the VB mode winning flag is not set in step S1610, proceed to step S1611. In step S1611, it is determined whether or not the attack mode addition flag is set. If the attack mode addition flag is set, a lottery process for the number of added games in attack mode is performed in step S1612, a process for adding the number of games in attack mode is performed in step S1613, a process for announcing the addition is performed in step S1614, and an addition command is set in step S1615. The processes in steps S1612 to S1615 are the same as the processes in steps S917 to S920. After the process in step S1615 is executed, the end determination process is terminated.

If the attack mode addition flag is not set in step S1611, then in step S1616 it is determined whether or not the challenge mode addition flag is set. If the challenge mode addition flag is set, then in step S1617 a lottery process for the number of games to be added to the challenge mode is performed, in step S1618 a process for adding the number of games to the challenge mode is performed, and in step S1619 an addition command is set. The processes in steps S1617 to S1619 are the same as those in steps S825 to S827. If a negative determination is made in step S1616, or after the process in step S1619 has been executed, the end determination process is terminated.

As described above, on the main control device 101 side, (1) processing related to the display mode transition lottery, (2) processing for transitioning the game state based on the result of the display mode transition lottery, and (3) processing for transitioning the display mode based on the winning result are performed. As a result, a push order notification effect is generated by the auxiliary display unit 65, and the game state transitions to follow the transition of the display mode. Furthermore, the push order notification effect by the auxiliary display unit 65 can generate a push order bell winning, and a large number of medals can be expected to be won.

When a push order replay or push order bell is won, if a push order notification effect is performed by the auxiliary display unit 65 (a push order notification effect by the display control device 81), in addition to the push order notification effect, a push order notification is also performed by the instruction monitor 68 connected to the main control device 101. The configuration of this instruction monitor 68 will be explained with reference to Figure 48. Figure 48(a) is a front view of the instruction monitor 68, and Figure 48(b) is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the display mode of the instruction monitor 68 and the display content.

As shown in FIG. 48(a), the indication monitor 68 is provided with eight display segments N1 to N8. Each display segment N1 to N8 has an individual light source made of an LED, and by controlling the on/off of each of these individual light sources, it is possible to light up any one display segment, or any combination of display segments. This allows the indication monitor 68 to display a specific symbol (including letters and numbers) individually. Note that each of the individual light sources emits light of the same color, so the same color is displayed on each of the display segments N1 to N8.

Regarding each of the display segments N1 to N8 in more detail, the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 are all linear display segments, and the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 are arranged so that they can at least display the numbers "1" to "6". The eighth display segment N8 is a circular display segment, and is arranged to the side of the lower right part of the area in which the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 are arranged. Therefore, the indication monitor 68 can at least display "1" to "6", "1." to "6.", and ".".

In addition, as long as the indication monitor 68 can display multiple patterns of symbols individually, the shape and arrangement of each display segment N1 to N8 can be arbitrary, and a configuration using seven segments instead of eight segments, or nine segments, etc., may be used. In addition, it is not essential that the colors displayed in each display segment N1 to N8 are the same, and the colors displayed in each display segment N1 to N8 can be changed as appropriate. In addition, it is not essential to control the lighting or extinguishing of each display segment N1 to N8 by controlling the on/off of a light source, and as long as the display control can be performed individually for each display segment N1 to N8, a segment display device may be configured with a single backlight and liquid crystal display. Furthermore, instead of applying a segment display to each display area, symbols may be displayed using other types of display devices such as a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a CRT, and a dot matrix.

The first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 are display segments used to notify the operation sequence of the push order role. For example, as shown in FIG. 48(b), when the operation sequence of each stop switch 42-44 is "left" → "middle" → "right" to provide a winning mode advantageous to the player, the sixth display segment N6 and the seventh display segment N7 are lit and "1" is displayed. Also, when the operation sequence of each stop switch 42-44 is "right" → "left" → "middle" to provide a winning mode advantageous to the player, the first display segment N1, the second display segment N2, the third display segment N3, the fifth display segment N5, and the sixth display segment N6 are lit and "5" is displayed. In other words, the numbers (symbols) displayed on each display segment N1 to N7 correspond one-to-one to the operation sequence of the stop switches 42 to 44, and by operating the stop switches 42 to 44 to stop based on the numbers (symbols) displayed on the display segments N1 to N7, the player can win in an advantageous manner.

The eighth display segment N8 is lit when the display mode is normal mode and the player wins the lottery to switch to attack mode, super attack mode, or challenge mode, or when the player wins the bonus (first BB) that can be won at the same time as switching to attack mode, super attack mode, or challenge mode. It is also turned off when attack mode, super attack mode, challenge mode, or first BB ends and the player switches to normal mode (except when the player switches back to attack mode, etc. after passing through premonition mode, etc.).

In other words, an advantageous zone (specific game state, specific mode) is a zone that includes a navigation state (attack mode or super attack mode) in which the operation sequence of the push order bell or push order replay is more easily notified, making it easier for the player to win in an advantageous manner, a chance state (challenge mode or first BB) in which it is easier to win the lottery to transition to the navigation state, or a winning state (winning mode) in which the player has won the lottery to transition to the navigation state or chance state but has not transitioned to the navigation state or chance state, and the eighth display segment N8 lights up during the advantageous zone and turns off during normal zones that are not advantageous zones, thereby forming a zone indicator (specific notification means) that clearly indicates whether or not the zone is advantageous.

The eighth display segment N8 starts with the game in which the game result (such as a specific combination such as a strong cherry) that triggered the advantageous zone such as the navigation state, chance state, or winning state is won, and the eighth display segment N8 starts to light up as a notification that the advantageous zone has been entered before the player is allowed to play in the game following the start game. More specifically, in this embodiment, regardless of whether the game result winning that triggered the advantageous zone is realized or not, that is, regardless of whether a miss occurs, the game in which the game result is won is the start game, and the eighth display segment N8 is turned on before the player is allowed to play in the next game as a betting operation. In other words, the eighth display segment N8 starts to light up before the start of the game following the game in which the player won the lottery for moving to the advantageous zone.

As already explained, the instruction monitor 68 having the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 as the push order indicator and the eighth display segment N8 as the section indicator is disposed near the side of the payout number display unit 62 on the gaming panel 25. In other words, the instruction monitor 68 is disposed above the stop switches 42 to 44 etc. operated by the player, in other words, it is not disposed on the decorative panel, which is the front part of the gaming machine, below the position where the stop switches 42 to 44 etc. are provided. Therefore, the eighth display segment N8 is prevented from being hidden by the hand etc. operating the stop switches 42 to 44 etc., and it can be said that it is disposed in a position where it is easily visible to the player. In addition, since it is disposed near the payout number display unit 62 where the player who is playing the game aiming to win medals can easily focus on it, it can be said that the player is prevented from overlooking it.

Furthermore, the brightness of the corresponding LED is set so that the eighth display segment N8 in the instruction monitor 68 is brighter than the brightness of the surrounding display parts (e.g., the payout number display part 62 and the backlight of the gaming panel 25) (more specifically, twice as bright as the surrounding display parts). Therefore, even if the eighth display segment N8 and the surrounding display parts are both controlled to emit light (when they are in a lit state), the eighth display segment N8 stands out. The illuminance of the corresponding LED is also set so that the eighth display segment N8 has a higher illuminance toward the front of the gaming machine than the surrounding display parts (more specifically, twice as bright as the surrounding display parts). This configuration also improves the visibility of the eighth display segment N8, and prevents the eighth display segment N8 from being overlooked when it is in a lit state.

Below, we will explain the section display process 1 and section display process 2 as processes related to turning on/off the 8th display segment N8.

<First section display process>
First, the first section display process will be described with reference to Fig. 49. The first section display process is a process carried out in step S315 of the lottery process (Fig. 16), and is carried out after the lottery result of the game is determined based on the operation of the start lever 41, and a lottery for switching the display mode is carried out based on the lottery result (lottery result corresponding process).

In step S1701, it is determined whether the eighth display segment N8 as a zone indicator is being displayed, more specifically, whether the eighth display segment N8 is being lit. As described above, when the eighth display segment N8 is being lit, this indicates that the player has won the lottery to transition to the advantageous zone, Attack Mode, Super Attack Mode, or Challenge Mode, or is in these modes. If a negative determination is made in step S1701 and it is determined that the eighth display segment N8 is being turned off, the process proceeds to step S1702.

In step S1702, it is determined whether or not either the challenge mode win flag or the attack mode win flag is set. When the eighth display segment N8 is off and either the challenge mode win flag or the attack mode win flag is set, this means that the transition lottery to the challenge mode, or the transition lottery to the attack mode or the super attack mode has been won in this lottery process. As already explained, in the first specific role process (Figure 33), if the transition lottery to the challenge mode is won, the challenge mode win flag is set, and if the transition lottery to the attack mode or the super attack mode is won, the attack mode win flag is set. If neither flag is set in step S1702, the first section display process is terminated as it is.

If either the challenge mode winning flag or the attack mode winning flag is set, the process proceeds to step S1703, where the display of the section indicator is started by lighting the eighth display segment N8. In addition, when the main control unit 101 starts displaying the eighth display segment N8 as the section indicator with the lighting state, it outputs a command for sound output to the display control unit 81 so that a predetermined sound effect (for example, a mechanical sound such as "Gago!") is output from the speaker 64. The display control unit 81 controls the speaker 64 so that the predetermined sound effect is generated based on the command for sound output. Note that when the display of the eighth display segment N8 starts, a configuration may be adopted in which an effect is generated in the auxiliary display unit 65 or another display unit. In this case, a corresponding command may be output to the display control unit 81, and the auxiliary display unit 65, etc. may be controlled so that the corresponding effect is performed by the display control unit 81.

After executing the processing of step S1703, processing is executed in step S1704 to start measuring the number of games continued in the advantageous zone. The number of games continued in the advantageous zone is measured by measuring the advantageous zone game number AG provided in the various counter areas 106e of RAM 106, and in step S1704, processing is executed to set the advantageous zone game number AG to an initial value of 0. The advantageous zone game number AG is increased by 1 for each game in the advantageous zone.

In the next step S1705, a process is executed to start measuring the number of medals won (difference in number) in the advantageous zone. The difference in number is the number of medals paid out minus the number inserted, and this difference in number is measured using the difference in number MY provided in the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106. In step S1705, a process is executed to set this difference in number MY to an initial value of 0. After execution of step S1705, the first zone display process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S1701 that the eighth display segment N8 is being displayed as a section indicator, then in step S1706, processing is performed to continue the display during the favorable section, and then this section display first processing is terminated. Specifically, in step S1706, processing is performed to continue the situation in which the eighth display segment N8 is lit. In other words, processing to end the display of the section indicator is not performed in this section display first processing.

<Second Section Display Process>
Next, the second section display process will be described with reference to the flowchart in Fig. 50. As already described, the second section display process is a process that is performed in step S416 of the reel control process (Fig. 19), and is performed after medals are paid out (payout determination process), the freeze effect is released (freeze release process), and the game state is changed based on the winning result (winning result response process) at the end of one game.

In step S1801, it is determined whether the eighth display segment N8 is lit as a zone indicator. If it is off (not lit, not displayed), the second zone display process ends. If it is lit, the process proceeds to step S1802. In step S1802, a process is executed to count the number of games played in the advantageous zone. Specifically, a process is executed to add 1 to the advantageous zone game count AG. The advantageous zone game count AG is a counter that allows the CPU 102 to grasp the number of games played in the advantageous zone, and the number of games played while the eighth display segment N8 is lit is measured.

In the next step S1803, a process is executed to update the difference in number of medals during the advantageous period. Specifically, if medals are paid out based on the establishment of a winning combination, the difference between the number of medals paid out and the number of medals bet in the game (number of bets) (number of payouts - number of bets) is calculated, and the calculated value is added to the difference in number of medals MY provided in the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106 to update the difference in number of medals MY. On the other hand, if medals are not paid out based on the establishment of a winning combination, the number of bets is subtracted from the difference in number of medals MY in the counter area 106e, and the difference in number of medals MY is updated.

After executing the processing of step S1803, in step S1804, it is determined whether at least one of the advantageous zone game count AG (the number of games played in the advantageous zone) and the difference in number of coins MY has reached a predetermined upper limit value. Specifically, it is determined whether the advantageous zone game count AG (the number of games played in the advantageous zone) has reached a predetermined upper limit game count (e.g., 1500 games), and it is determined whether the difference in number of coins MY has reached a predetermined upper limit number (e.g., 2400 coins).

If a positive judgment is made in step S1804, the processing of steps S1805 to S1807 is executed to end the advantageous zone. In step S1805, the advantageous zone game count AG and the difference in number of coins MY are each cleared to 0, and in step S1806, the eighth display segment N8 is turned off as the display end process of the zone display. Then, in step S1807, data initialization process is performed, and the second zone display process is terminated.

The data initialization process is a process that resets flags and counters that were set when moving to the current favorable zone, and flags and counters that were set during the current favorable zone, to their initial values. For example, if a challenge mode win flag or attack mode win flag is set when moving to the favorable zone, or a VB mode win flag is set during attack mode, and the flags remain set until this initialization process, these win flags are cleared. In addition, in the initialization process, if an attack notification flag, attack mode flag, VB mode flag, specialized zone flag, etc. are set, these flags are also cleared. Furthermore, if a premonition counter, counter for the number of continued games in attack mode, etc., are greater than 0, all of these counters are reset to 0. In other words, the initialization process initializes all variables or parameters that affect the performance related to the push order notification with respect to the favorable zone as a favorable state using the push order notification, and is a process that clears the RAM for such variables or parameters.

The conditions for ending the advantageous period are not limited to the above, and may be met, for example, when the advantageous period game count AG reaches the upper limit game count and the difference in number of coins MY reaches the upper limit number, or the difference in number of coins MY may be excluded from the elements that establish the ending condition, and the advantageous period game count AG may reach the upper limit game count, or vice versa.

If a negative judgment is made in step S1804, that is, if neither the number of games in the advantageous zone AG nor the difference in number of sheets MY has reached the upper limit, the process proceeds to step S1808, where it is determined whether or not the advantageous zone has ended. That is, in step S1808, it is determined whether or not neither the challenge mode win flag nor the attack mode win flag is set. In the following step S1809, it is determined whether or not neither the challenge mode flag nor the attack mode flag is set. If a positive judgment is made in both steps S1808 and S1809, it means that the advantageous zone has ended before at least one of the number of games in the advantageous zone AG and the difference in number of sheets MY reaches the upper limit. In this case, the process proceeds to step S1805, the number of games in the advantageous zone AG and the difference in number of sheets MY are each cleared to 0, and the display of the zone display is terminated in step S1806, and data initialization is performed in step S1807, followed by terminating the second zone display process. If a negative judgment is made in either step S1808 or step S1809, it is determined that the game is still in the favorable zone, and the second zone display process is terminated. In this case, the zone indicator (eighth display segment N8) will continue to be lit.

<Processing related to notification performance on the sub side>
Next, as (4) processing related to notification performance on the sub side, various notification processing performed by the sub side display control device 81 will be described. As the processing for various notifications, a performance setting process executed at a predetermined cycle (1.49 msec cycle) is provided. The performance setting process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the performance setting process, first in step S2001, it is determined whether or not a new command has been received from the main control device 101. If a new command has been received, in step S2002, a process is executed to store the received command in RAM 183. A command storage area is provided in RAM 183, and this command storage area is configured as a ring buffer that can store multiple commands individually and can read out previously stored commands.

If a negative judgment is made in step S2001, or after the processing of step S2002 is executed, in step S2003, it is judged whether or not the newly received command is a bet command. A bet command is a command output from the main control device 101 based on a bet operation being performed, and includes the bet command set in step S207 of the normal processing (FIG. 15), as well as the challenge mode start command in the mode transition notification processing (FIG. 42), the attack mode winning notification command, the VB mode winning notification command, the bonus winning notification command, and the like. If it is one of these bet commands, in step S2004, the bet performance setting processing is executed.

If a negative judgment is made in step S2003, or after the processing of step S2004 has been executed, in step S2005, it is judged whether or not the newly received command was a start command. A start command is a command output from the main control device 101 based on the operation of the start lever 41, and includes the lottery result command set in step S312 of the lottery processing (FIG. 16), as well as premonition commands and add-on commands set in the first to third specific role processing (FIGS. 33 to 35), push order notification commands set in the push order role processing (FIG. 44), and freeze stock commands (described below) that are output when the execution of a freeze effect is set. If it is one of these start commands, in step S2006, the start effect setting processing is executed.

If a negative judgment is made in step S2005, or after the processing of step S2006 is executed, in step S2007, it is judged whether or not the newly received command is a command at the time of each stop operation. Each stop operation command is a command output from the main control device 101 based on the stop operation of each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, and is a stop command command set in step S405 of the reel control processing (FIG. 19). If the stop command is a stop command at each stop operation, in step S2008, a process for setting the performance at each stop operation is executed.

If a negative judgment is made in step S2007, or after the processing of step S2008 is executed, in step S2009, it is judged whether or not the newly received command is an all stop command. An all stop command is a command output from the main control device 101 when all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped, and includes the winning result command set in step S411 of the reel control processing (FIG. 19), as well as the attack mode start command, VB mode start command, specialized zone start command, challenge mode end command, attack mode end command, VB mode end command, specialized zone end command, and the freeze release command (described below) that is output when the execution of the freeze effect is released, which are set in the winning result response processing (FIG. 45). If it is one of these all stop commands, in step S2010, the all stop effect setting processing is executed.

If a negative judgment is made in step S2009, or after the processing of step S2010 has been executed, other processing is executed in step S2011, and then the effect setting processing is terminated. In step S2011, settings are made for effects based on commands from the main control device 101 other than when a bet is made, when the game is started, or when the game is stopped (for example, effects based on the operation of the settlement switch 59), effects based on signals from sensors connected without going through the main control device 101 (such as an effect switch detection sensor), settings for error notification, etc.

Below, we will explain the bet time effect setting process, start time effect setting process, each stop operation time effect setting process, and all stop time effect setting process. Note that when explaining each effect setting process, we will refer to the overview diagrams of the display effects in Figures 57, 62 to 68.

<Bet time performance setting process>
The bet time effect setting process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S2101, it is determined whether or not the currently received bet time command includes a challenge mode start command. If the challenge mode start command is included, in step S2102, processing is performed to set the challenge mode start effect. In the challenge mode start effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 62(a), the auxiliary display unit 65 displays the text "Challenge mode start" and displays (for example, a specified character display) a message suggesting that the display mode to be transitioned to is a chance mode that is likely to win the attack mode transition lottery. In addition, in the challenge mode start effect, control is performed so that a corresponding sound effect (for example, a man's rough voice saying "Seize attack mode!") is emitted from the speaker 64.

If the challenge mode start command is not included in step S2101, it is determined in step S2103 whether the currently received bet time command includes an attack mode win notification command. If the attack mode win notification command is included, in step S2104, processing is performed to set the attack mode win notification effect. In the attack mode win notification effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 63(a), the auxiliary display unit 65 displays the text "Attack mode confirmed." In addition, in the attack mode win notification effect, control is performed so that a corresponding sound effect (for example, a high-pitched female voice saying "Attack number one!") is emitted from the speaker 64.

If the attack mode winning notification command is not included in step S2103, then in step S2105 it is determined whether or not the currently received bet time command includes a VB mode winning notification command. If the VB mode winning notification command is included, then in step S2106 a process is performed to set up a VB mode winning notification effect. In the VB mode winning notification effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 63(b), the auxiliary display unit 65 displays the text "VICTORY BONUS confirmed." Additionally, in the VB mode winning notification effect, control is performed so that a corresponding sound effect (for example, a male and female voice saying "Victory!") is emitted from the speaker 64.

If the VB mode winning notification command is not included in step S2105, then in step S2107 it is determined whether or not the currently received bet time command includes a bonus winning notification command. If the bonus winning notification command is included, then in step S2108 a process is performed to set up a bonus winning notification effect. In the bonus winning notification effect, for example, the auxiliary display unit 65 displays the text "Yay! Bonus confirmed." In addition, in the bonus winning notification effect, control is performed so that a corresponding sound effect (for example, a male and female voice saying "Yay!") is emitted from the speaker 64.

If a bonus winning notification command is not included in step S2107, then in step S2109 it is determined whether or not a specialized zone winning notification command is included as the currently received bet time command. If a specialized zone winning notification command is included, then in step S2110 a process is performed to set up a specialized zone winning notification effect. In the specialized zone winning notification effect, for example, the auxiliary display unit 65 displays the text "Get on with it!!" In addition, in the specialized zone winning notification effect, control is performed so that a corresponding sound effect (for example, "Get on with it!" in the deep voice of an ecstatic man) is emitted from the speaker 64.

After any of the processes in steps S2102, S2104, S2106, S2108, and S2110 has been executed, or if a negative judgment is made in step S2109, in step S2111, other bet time effects are set, and then this effect setting process ends. In the process of step S2111, for example, in response to the reception of a bet command, the lamps around (or inside) the credit insertion switches 56-58 for the corresponding bet number are turned off to notify that the operation has been accepted, or for example, a process for returning from a demo mode in which a certain condition is entered when no play has been made for a predetermined period of time, or a process for turning on a lamp around the start lever 41 to notify that the operation has been validated, etc. are performed.

<Start-time performance setting process>
Next, the start-time performance setting process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S2201, a display mode setting process is performed. In this process, it is determined whether the display mode currently set on the main control device 101 side is normal mode, challenge mode, attack mode, VB mode, or specialized zone, and the display performance of the auxiliary display unit 65 is set in the corresponding display mode. Specifically, the various flag storage area 183a of the RAM 183 on the display control device 81 side also has an area for setting a challenge mode flag, attack mode flag, VB mode flag, and specialized zone flag as flags for grasping the display mode, and the corresponding flag is set when each mode starts and cleared when it ends. For example, in the process of setting the challenge mode start performance in the above step S2102, the challenge mode flag is set. In step S2201, by grasping these various mode corresponding flags, the current display mode is identified, and the auxiliary display unit 65, speaker 64, upper lamp 63, etc. are controlled so that the corresponding performance is performed.

In the next step S2202, it is determined whether the lottery result of the game to be started is a push order role win based on the received lottery result command. If the push order role wins, in step S2203, a push order notification process is performed. Here, the push order notification process is explained with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 54.

In step S2301, it is determined whether the currently received start command includes a push order notification command. If the push order notification command is not included, the push order notification process is terminated. If the push order notification command is included, the process proceeds to step S2302.

In step S2302, it is determined whether the current lottery result is the first promotion replay 1 to 4. If it is the first promotion replay 1 to 4, in step S2303, the auxiliary display unit 65, etc. is controlled to notify the push order that will result in the third replay win, and then the push order notification process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S2302 that the first promotion replays 1 to 4 are not the winning combination, then in step S2304 it is determined whether the current lottery result is fall replays 1 to 3. If it is fall replays 1 to 3, the process proceeds to step S2305, where the auxiliary display unit 65, etc. is controlled to notify the player of the push order that will result in the first replay winning combination, and then the push order notification process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S2304 that the result is not one of fall replays 1 to 3, then in step S2306 it is determined whether the current lottery result is second promotion replays 1 and 2. If it is second promotion replays 1 and 2, then in step S2307 it is determined whether a VB mode winning notification effect or a specialized zone winning notification effect has already been executed. For example, when setting the VB mode winning notification effect in step S2106 or the specialized zone winning notification effect in step S2110, a notification flag indicating that a VB win or specialized zone win has been notified is set in the various flag storage area 183a of RAM 183. The notification flag is cleared when a transition to VB mode or specialized zone is made. Then, in step S2307, it is preferable to determine whether the notification flag exists.

If a win has already been notified in VB mode or the specialized zone, in step S2308 the auxiliary display unit 65 etc. is controlled to notify the push order for the fourth and fifth replay wins, and then the push order notification process ends. If a win has not yet been notified in VB mode or the specialized zone, the process proceeds to step S2305, where a push order notification for the first replay win is made, and then the push order notification process ends.

If it is determined in step S2306 that the result is not the second promotion replay 1 or 2, then in step S2309 it is determined whether the current lottery result is BAR replay 1. If it is BAR replay 1, then in step S2310 it is determined whether the specialized zone winning notification performance has been executed. If the specialized zone winning notification has been executed, then in step S2311 the auxiliary display unit 65, etc. is controlled to perform a push order notification for the seventh replay winning, and then the push order notification processing is terminated. If the specialized zone winning notification has not been executed, then the process proceeds to step S2305 above, where a push order notification for the third replay winning is executed, and then the push order notification processing is terminated.

If it is determined in step S2309 that the result is not BAR Replay 1, then in step S2312 it is determined whether or not the current lottery result is a bell. If a bell has been won, then in step S2313 the auxiliary display unit 65 etc. is controlled to notify the press order in which a bell win is achieved as the first minor win, and then the press order notification process ends. If a negative determination is made in step S2312, then the processes of steps S2314 to S2316 are executed, and then the press order notification process ends. The processes of steps S2314 to S2316 will be explained in detail later.

Returning to the explanation of the start-time performance setting process (FIG. 53), if it is determined in step S2202 that the push order role has not been won, it is determined in step S2204 whether or not the transition trigger role has been won. If the transition trigger role has been won, processing for notifying the transition trigger role is performed in step S2205. The processing for notifying the transition trigger role will be explained in detail later.

If a negative judgment is made in step S2204, or after the processing of step S2203 or step S2205 has been executed, the process proceeds to step S2206. In step S2206, it is judged whether or not an add-on command has been received as the current start command. If an add-on command has been received, in step S2207, a process is performed to set up the add-on effect in advance so that the add-on effect for the number of games corresponding to the add-on command is executed when the game is stopped. As an example of the add-on effect, as shown in FIG. 57, a number corresponding to the number of games to be added is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65. In addition, the add-on effect is controlled so that a corresponding sound effect (for example, an electronic sound like "Kyukyukyukyukyueen!") is emitted from the speaker 64.

The details of the setting process for the additional effects in step S2207 will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 55.

In step S2401, a process is performed to determine the number of added games to be notified based on the currently received added command. In the following step S2402, a process is performed to determine the notification timing. The notification timing is the timing at which the added performance is executed, and this timing is determined by processing on the main control device 101 side (additional notification processing) described below. Information on the determined timing is set in the above-mentioned added command and output. Therefore, the display control device 81 side can determine the timing at which the added performance should be executed by reading the added command. The notification timing is set to the game at which the added performance should be executed, and the timing corresponding to the stop operation of each of the stop switches 42 to 44.

After determining the notification timing in step S2402, in step S2403, it is determined whether or not the determination result in step S2402 indicates that an additional effect will be performed in the current game. If an additional notification will not be performed in the current game, the setting process for the additional effect is terminated.

If an additional effect is to be performed in the current game, in step S2404, it is determined whether the timing for executing the additional effect in the current game was when any of the reels were stopped ON. If it was stopped ON, in step S2405, the target reel for generating the additional effect is set, and the additional effect is set to occur when the target reel is stopped ON. Specifically, a process is performed to set one of the flags for when the first reel is stopped ON to the flag for when the third reel is stopped ON in the various flag storage area 183a. These flags are flags that allow the CPU 181 to grasp the timing for the additional effect to occur. In addition, in step S2405, the performance data for the additional effect corresponding to the number of additional games to be generated when the stop ON is operated is read from the performance data storage area 182b, and the data is temporarily stored in a predetermined performance data setting area. When the CPU 181 determines that an additional performance will occur at a timing corresponding to the stop ON operation time flag, it reads out the performance data temporarily stored in the performance data setting area and performs the additional performance.

If a negative judgment is made in step S2404, in step S2406, it is judged whether or not the first or second reel was stopped and turned OFF. If these reels were stopped and turned OFF, in step S2407, a target reel for generating an additional effect is set, and the additional effect is set to occur when the target reel is stopped and turned OFF. Specifically, a process is performed to set either a flag for when the first reel is stopped and OFF or a flag for when the second reel is stopped and turned OFF in the various flag storage area 183a. These flags are also flags that allow the CPU 181 to grasp the timing of the additional effect occurrence. Also in step S2407, the effect data for the additional effect corresponding to the number of games for additional play is read from the effect data storage area 182b, and the data is temporarily stored in a predetermined effect data setting area.

If a negative judgment is made in step S2406, in step S2408, the current additional effect is set to occur when all reels are stopped (when the third reel is turned OFF). Specifically, a process is performed to set a flag when the third reel is turned OFF in the various flag storage area 183a. Also in step S2408, a temporary storage process is performed for the effect data of the additional effect corresponding to the number of games to be added. After the process of step S2405, step S2407, or step S2408 is executed, the process of setting the additional effect is terminated.

Returning to the explanation of the start-up effect setting process (FIG. 53), if no top-up command is received in step S2206, or after the process of step S2207 is executed, the bonus effect setting process is executed in step S2208, the continuous effect setting process is executed in step S2209, and then other start-up effects are set in step S2210, after which the start-up effect setting process ends. The bonus effect setting process and the continuous effect setting process will be explained in detail later. The process of step S2210 performs, for example, a process of setting an effect suggesting the lottery result in response to the start of the game, or turning off the lamp around the start lever 41 to notify that the operation has been accepted.

<Performance setting process for each stop operation>
Next, the process of setting the effects to be produced at each stop operation, which is performed in step S2008, will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S2501, it is determined whether each stop operation command received this time is a stop ON operation command. A stop ON operation command is a command that is output from the main control device 101 when the stop switch 42 to 44 is pressed during the stop operation of each reel.

If a positive judgment is made in step S2501, the process proceeds to step S2502, where it is determined whether or not an effect that occurs when the reel is turned on for stop is set as the effect for this game. If it is not set, this setting process is terminated. If it is set, in step S2503, it is determined whether or not the currently received stop ON operation command is for the stop operation of the reel that is the target of the effect that is set for the stop ON operation. If it is not a stop ON operation of the target reel, this setting process is terminated. If it is a stop ON operation of the target reel, in step S2504, the auxiliary display unit 65, etc. are controlled so that an effect is performed when the stop ON operation is performed, and then this setting process is terminated.

For example, if an additional effect is set as the effect at the time of the current stop ON operation, as shown in FIG. 57(a), an additional effect occurs on the auxiliary display unit 65 when the stop switches 42 to 44 are pressed (ON operation). In this case, a sound effect corresponding to the additional effect is also emitted from the speaker 64.

Also, for example, if the current game is a push order role win and the push order notification effect is set, the push order notification effect will change to an effect indicating the reel to be operated next by stopping the corresponding reel based on each stop ON operation. Specifically, if all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are spinning before the stop ON operation effect, a display indicating the first reel to be operated as shown in FIG. 43(a) is displayed. Then, when the corresponding reel (middle reel 32M in the figure) stops due to the stop ON operation corresponding to the first reel, the effect changes to an effect indicating the next reel to be operated (right reel 32R in the figure) as shown in FIG. 43(b). Also, if two reels are spinning before the stop ON operation effect, a display indicating the second reel to be stopped as shown in FIG. 43(b) is displayed, and based on the second reel stopping due to the stop ON operation, the display changes to an effect indicating the third reel to be stopped (FIG. 43(c)).

If the determination in step S2501 is negative, the process proceeds to step S2505, where it is determined whether the stop operation command received this time is a stop OFF operation command. A stop OFF operation command is a command that is output from the main control device 101 when the pressing operation of the stop switches 42 to 44, which is one of the stop operations for each reel, is completed.

If a positive judgment is made in step S2505, the process proceeds to step S2506, where it is determined whether or not an effect that occurs when the reel is stopped and turned OFF is set as the effect for this game. If it is not set, this setting process is terminated. If it is set, in step S2507, it is determined whether or not the stop OFF operation command received this time is a stop operation for the reel that is the target of the effect that is set for the stop OFF operation. If it is not a stop OFF operation for the target reel, this setting process is terminated. If it is a stop OFF operation for the target reel, in step S2508, the auxiliary display unit 65, etc. is controlled so that an effect is performed when the stop OFF operation is performed, and then this setting process is terminated.

For example, if an additional effect is set as the effect at the time of the current stop OFF operation, as shown in FIG. 57(b), when the pressing operation of the stop switch 42-44 is terminated and the hand is released from the stop switch 42-44, an additional effect occurs on the auxiliary display unit 65. In this case, a sound effect corresponding to the additional effect is emitted from the speaker 64. If a negative judgment is made in step S2505, this effect setting process is terminated.

<Performance setting process when all stops>
Next, the complete stop effect setting process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S2601, it is determined whether the currently received stop command includes a challenge mode end command. If the challenge mode end command is included, in step S2602, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like are controlled so that a challenge mode end effect is performed. In the challenge mode end effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 62(b), the auxiliary display unit 65 displays the text "Challenge mode end." In addition, in the challenge mode end effect, control is performed so that a sound effect corresponding to the end of the challenge mode (for example, a man's rough voice saying "Put yourself together!") is emitted from the speaker 64.

If the challenge mode end command is not included in step S2601, then in step S2603 it is determined whether the currently received stop command includes an attack mode start command. If the attack mode start command is included, then in step S2604 processing is performed to set the attack mode start effect. In the attack mode start effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 64(a), the auxiliary display unit 65 displays the text "Attack mode!! Ver. 1". In addition, in the attack mode start effect, control is performed so that a corresponding sound effect (for example, a high-pitched female voice saying "Attack mode start!") is emitted from the speaker 64.

The "Ver.1" display during the attack mode start effect corresponds to the rank of the attack mode. In other words, it is a display indicating that the attack mode being started this time is the first attack mode. Then, when the attack mode rank is promoted to the second attack mode (when a promotion command is received), the auxiliary display unit 65 displays the words "Attack Mode!! Ver.2" as a promotion effect. When the attack mode rank is promoted to the third attack mode, the words "Attack Mode!! Ver.3" are displayed, and when it is promoted to the fourth attack mode, the words "Attack Mode!! Ver.4" are displayed.

If the attack mode start command is not included in step S2603, it is determined in step S2605 whether the currently received stop command includes an attack mode end command. If the attack mode end command is included, processing is performed in step S2606 to set the attack mode end effect. In the attack mode end effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 64(b), the auxiliary display unit 65 displays the text "ATTACK MODE END" and displays the number of games to be continued in this attack mode (including VB mode and specialized zone), and also displays the total number of coins paid out in this attack mode (including VB mode, specialized zone, and bonus). In addition, in the attack mode end effect, the speaker 64 is controlled to emit a corresponding sound effect (for example, a high-pitched female voice saying "See you later").

If the attack mode end command is not included in step S2605, then in step S2607 it is determined whether the currently received stop command includes a VB mode start command. If the VB mode start command is included, then in step S2608 a process is performed to set the VB mode start effect. In the VB mode start effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 65(a), the auxiliary display unit 65 displays the text "777 VICTORY!!". Additionally, in the VB mode start effect, control is performed so that a corresponding sound effect (for example, a male and female voice saying "Victory Bonus Start") is emitted from the speaker 64.

If the VB mode start command is not included in step S2607, it is determined in step S2611 whether or not the currently received stop command includes a VB mode end command. If the VB mode end command is included, in step S2612, processing is performed to set the VB mode end effect. In the VB mode end effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 65(b), the auxiliary display unit 65 displays the text "VICTORY BONUS END", displays the number of continued games in the attack mode (including VB mode and specialized zone) at the end of the current VB mode, and displays the total number of coins paid out in the attack mode (including VB mode, specialized zone, and bonus) at the end of the current VB mode. In addition, in the VB mode end effect, the speaker 64 is controlled to emit a corresponding sound effect (for example, a male and female voice saying "It's not over yet").

If the VB mode end command is not included in step S2611, it is determined in step S2613 whether the currently received stop command includes a specialized zone start command. If the specialized zone start command is included, processing is performed in step S2614 to set the specialized zone start effect. In the specialized zone start effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 66(a), the auxiliary display unit 65 displays the text "Add-on challenge!!" and displays a character indicating that this is a special mode in which attack mode add-ons are likely to occur. In addition, in the specialized zone start effect, control is performed so that a corresponding sound effect (for example, a boy's voice saying "Let's go") is emitted from the speaker 64.

If a specialized zone start command is not included in step S2613, it is determined in step S2615 whether or not the currently received stop command includes a specialized zone end command. If a specialized zone end command is included, in step S2616, processing is performed to set a specialized zone end effect. In the specialized zone end effect, for example, the auxiliary display unit 65 displays the total number of games that have been added in the current specialized zone. In addition, in the specialized zone end effect, control is performed so that a corresponding sound effect (for example, an electronic sound such as "Kyukyukyukyukyueen!") is emitted from the speaker 64. It is preferable to vary the display content of the auxiliary display unit 65 and the sound effect emitted from the speaker 64 depending on the total number of games that have been added.

If the specialized zone end command is not included in step S2615, it is determined in step S2617 whether the currently received stop command includes a bonus end command. If the bonus end command is included, in step S2618, processing is performed to set the bonus end effect. In the bonus end effect, for example, the auxiliary display unit 65 displays the total number of coins won during the current bonus, and if the bonus was entered into attack mode, VB mode, or a specialized zone, the total number of coins won in attack mode (including VB mode, specialized zone, and bonus) is displayed. In addition, in the bonus end effect, depending on whether the attack mode was successful, whether the challenge mode was successful, and the number of added games, effects are performed using characters or the like that suggest these contents.

After executing any of the processes in steps S2602, S2604, S2606, S2608, S2612, S2614, S2616, and S2618, or after a negative judgment is made in step S2617, the process proceeds to steps S2609 and S2619. In steps S2609 and S2619, if an additional performance is set, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like are controlled to execute the additional performance. As already explained, the setting of the additional performance is performed in step S2207 in the start-time performance setting process. Specifically, if the timing of the occurrence of the current additional performance is set to when all reels stop in the setting process of the additional performance (FIG. 55), the additional performance is generated in the auxiliary display unit 65 at the timing when all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R stop, as shown in FIG. 57(c). In this case, a sound effect corresponding to the additional performance is also emitted from the speaker 64.

After that, in steps S2610 and S2620, other stop time effects are set, and then this effect setting process ends. In steps S2610 and S2620, for example, the upper lamp 63 is controlled to light up in a color corresponding to the winning combination, a sound effect corresponding to the payout amount of the winning combination is controlled to be emitted from the speaker 64, and a sound effect corresponding to an automatic bet during a replay is controlled to be emitted from the speaker 64.

As described above, various processes for notifying the transition of display modes are performed on the display control device 81 side based on various commands from the main control device 101, and the notification is performed by the auxiliary display unit 65, etc. In addition to notifying the transition of display modes, the display control device 81 side also performs various in-game presentation processes.

<Processing for various in-game effects>
In this embodiment, bonus effects and continuous effects are provided as effects during various games. Bonus effects are effects that are performed in each game during a bonus state that is entered based on winning the first BB or the second BB. Continuous effects are effects that make the player expect a favorable result (winning a bonus, attack mode, challenge mode, VB mode, etc.), and can be continued over multiple games (four games in this embodiment), and are effects that notify the player of whether or not the favorable result was achieved in the final game.

<Bonus performance setting process>
First, the bonus effect setting process will be described with reference to the flowchart of Fig. 59. The bonus effect setting process is a process carried out in step S2208 of the start-time effect setting process (Fig. 53).

In the bonus effect setting process, in step S2701, it is determined whether or not a bonus game will start from the current game. The bonus game refers to the game from the game following the first BB or second BB winning to the end of the bonus. A positive determination is made in step S2701 when the first BB or second BB winning was achieved in the previous game. In this case, in step S2702, a process is performed to determine the current bonus type. More specifically, it is determined whether the current bonus game is based on the first BB winning or the second BB winning. Then, in step S2703, the bonus effect corresponding to the bonus type determined in step S2702 is set. If a negative determination is made in step S2701, or after the process of step S2703 has been executed, the bonus effect setting process is terminated.

Incidentally, in this embodiment, the content of the bonus effects in the bonus game based on the first BB winning and the bonus game based on the second BB winning are different enough to be discernible to the player. More specifically, in the bonus game based on the first BB winning, a bonus effect is set in which a live-action video effect is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65, and in the bonus game based on the second BB winning, a bonus effect is set in which an animation effect is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65. Also, the sound effects (songs) output from the speaker 64 are different between the first BB and the second BB.

All bonus effects are performed independently regardless of the progress of the game, and are set to be repeated as long as the bonus game continues. For example, a five-minute video or animation effect is set as a unit effect, and when five minutes have passed since the start of the bonus effect and the unit effect ends, the unit effect is set to start again from the beginning. Note that the effect on the auxiliary display unit 65 may be configured to stop on the screen at the end of the unit effect, and only the sound effects (songs) may be repeated. Also, the effect on the auxiliary display unit 65 may be configured to be performed in synchronization with the progress of each game, and only the sound effects (songs) may be performed independently regardless of the progress of each game.

As described above, while the bonus presentation based on the first BB winning and the bonus presentation based on the second BB winning are distinguishable, the game results that triggered the first BB winning and the second BB winning are set to be indistinguishable or difficult to distinguish from the bonus presentation. In other words, for the bonus presentation based on the first BB winning, for example, when the first BB winning is triggered by a special lip A overlap 1 win and when the first BB winning is triggered by a special lip AB overlap 1 win, the bonus presentation is indistinguishable or difficult to distinguish, and more specifically, the same bonus presentation is executed. The same is true for the bonus presentation based on the second BB winning, and for example, the bonus presentation triggered by a special lip A overlap 2 win and the bonus presentation triggered by a special lip AB overlap 2 win are indistinguishable or difficult to distinguish, and the same bonus presentation is executed.

<Processing for continuous performance>
The outline of the continuous performance will be explained with reference to FIG. 67 and FIG.

The continuous performance is configured as a battle performance in which, for example, a warrior character with a firearm is displayed as the main character, along with one to three enemy characters, and a battle unfolds between the two. In the first game in which the continuous performance is executed, the main character and enemy characters are displayed in sequence, while text such as "Defeat the enemy!!" is displayed to execute an introductory performance announcing the start of the battle. At that time, the number of enemy characters indicates the probability of victory. The fewer the number of enemy characters, the higher the probability of victory.

In the second game where the continuous performance is executed, an image is displayed of the main character starting an attack on an enemy character. After the image of the attack is displayed, a result of whether or not the attack hit and defeated the enemy character is displayed. Similarly, in the third game, an image of the main character attacking is displayed, and then a result of whether or not the enemy character was defeated is displayed. Figures 67(b) and 67(c) show an example where one enemy character is defeated in each game, but there are also cases where an image is displayed of the enemy character not being defeated, and cases where an image is displayed of multiple enemy characters being defeated in one attack (one game).

Then, in the final game of the series, the winner is announced. As shown in FIG. 68(b1), if all enemy characters are defeated, the main character wins, and as shown in FIG. 68(b2), for example, a victory image of the main character roaring is displayed together with the word "WIN." At this time, a corresponding sound effect (for example, a male voice saying "We did it!") is output from speaker 64 in sync with the display of the victory image.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 68(c1), if at least one enemy character survives and all enemy characters cannot be defeated, the main character is defeated. In this case, as shown in FIG. 68(c2), for example, a defeated image of the main character lying down is displayed together with the word "LOSE." At this time, a corresponding sound effect (for example, a male voice saying "Tohoho") is output from the speaker 64 in sync with the display of the defeated image.

FIG. 67 shows an example of a case where the continuous performance is performed over four games, but the continuous performance may end after two or three games. In each game from the second game onwards, if the continuous performance continues in the next game, a word such as "continue" is displayed together with the result display of whether the enemy character was defeated, to notify the player that the continuous performance will continue. Incidentally, if the continuous performance ends after two games, no notification of continuation is made in the second game, and after the attack image is displayed, the victory image of FIG. 68 (b1) and (b2) or the defeat image of FIG. 68 (c1) and (c2) is displayed. The continuous performance is set so that the probability of winning increases with the number of continued games, and is configured so that the player can watch the performance with great interest not only in whether the main character wins, but also in whether the continuous performance will continue.

Below, we will explain the process for notifying the transition trigger role (step S2205) in the start-time performance setting process (Figure 53) and the continuous performance setting process (step S2209) as processes related to the above continuous performance.

<Transition trigger role notification processing>
In the transition trigger role notification process, as shown in FIG. 60, first, in step S2801, a chance performance lottery process is executed to determine whether or not the chance performance is set as the performance of the current game. In the chance performance, as shown in FIG. 66(b), for example, the auxiliary display unit 65 displays the word "Chance!!" and displays characters with exclamation marks corresponding to the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. In addition, in the chance performance, the speaker 64 is controlled to emit a corresponding sound effect (for example, an electronic sound "Cui"). In the chance performance lottery process, for example, a lottery is performed so that the chance performance occurs about half the time when the transition trigger role is won. Note that the winning probability of the chance performance lottery process may be different depending on the type of transition trigger role, the display mode, the game state, the setting value, etc.

In the next step S2802, it is determined whether or not the lottery process in step S2801 has been won. If the lottery process in step S2801 has been won, a chance effect is set to be performed as the effect for this game in step S2803.

Here, we will explain the recommended game modes for achieving winning combinations of each minor combination, including transition trigger combinations, in this slot machine 10.

Among the winning combinations in each game, the minor combinations that cannot be won due to the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44 and that result in so-called missed wins are set to strong cherry, weak cherry, strong watermelon, and weak watermelon. More specifically, as already explained, strong cherry is a combination that can be won by any of the 28th minor combination, 32nd minor combination to 35th minor combination, and the 28th minor combination symbol and the 32nd minor combination to 35th minor combination symbols on the left reel 32L are the "cherry" symbol and the "second replay" symbol. In this case, in a 3-bet game, if the left reel 32L is stopped at the timing when the 7th "red bell" symbol to the 20th "white bell" symbol reach the top of the left reel 32L, none of the 28th minor combination symbol and the 32nd minor combination symbol to the 35th minor combination symbol, the "cherry" symbol and the "second replay" symbol, can be stopped on the pay line. Therefore, if the left reel 32L is stopped at these times, the strong cherry role will be missed.

In addition, the weak cherry is a combination that can be won by any of the 27th, 32nd, 33rd, 34th, 35th minor symbols on the left reel 32L, and the 27th, 32nd, 33rd, 34th, 35th, 36th, 37th, 38th, 39th, 40th, 41st, 42nd, 43rd, 44th, 45th, 46th, 47th, 48th, 49th, 50th, 51st, 52nd, 53rd, 54th, 55th, 60th, 61st, 62nd, 63rd, 64th, 65th, 66th, 67th, 70th, 71st, 72nd, 73rd, 74th, 75th, 76th, 77th, 78th, 80th, 81st, 82nd, 83rd, 84th, 85th, 86th, 87th, 88th, 90th, 91st, 92th, 93rd, 94th, 95th, 96th, 97th, 98th, 99th, 100th, 101st, 102nd, 103rd, 104th, 105th, 106th, 107th, 108th, 109th, 110th, 120th, 130th, 140th, 150th, 160th, 170th, 180th, 190th, 20th, 21st, 22nd, 23rd, 24th, 25th, 26th

Strong watermelon is a combination in which either the 30th or 41st minor combination can win, and the 30th and 41st minor combination symbols on the left reel 32L are "watermelon" symbols. In this case, in a 3-bet game, if the left reel 32L is stopped when the 9th "red 7" symbol to the 3rd "white bell" symbol reach the top of the left reel 32L, the 30th and 41st minor combination symbols, the "watermelon" symbols, cannot be stopped on an active line. Therefore, if the left reel 32L is stopped at these times, the strong watermelon combination will be missed.

For the weak watermelon, either the 29th or 41st minor win symbol can win, and the 29th and 41st minor win symbols on the left reel 32L are the "watermelon" symbols. Even in this case, if the left reel 32L is stopped when the 9th "red 7" symbol through the 3rd "white bell" symbol reach the top of the left reel 32L in a 3-bet game, the 29th and 41st minor win symbols, the "watermelon" symbols, cannot be stopped on an active line. Therefore, if the left reel 32L is stopped at these times, the weak watermelon symbol will be missed.

In that case, when stopping the left reel 32L while still retaining the possibility of winning for any of these combinations that may cause misses, it is necessary to stop the left reel 32L when the fourth "cherry" symbol through the sixth "second replay" symbol reach the top of the left reel 32L. In the following explanation, this operation mode of the left reel 32L is also referred to as a specific operation mode (first operation mode) as an operation mode that does not cause misses (the so-called DDT method or small win recovery method), and the operation modes that cause misses are also referred to as non-specific operation modes (second operation modes).

In the chance presentation set in step S2803, it is suggested that the current winning role is one of the transition trigger roles, but it is set so that it is impossible or difficult to determine which transition trigger role it is. In other words, when the chance presentation is performed, the winning role for the current game is likely to be one of strong cherry, weak cherry, strong watermelon, weak watermelon, etc., but it is not possible to determine whether it is a strong cherry or weak cherry, whether it is a strong watermelon or weak watermelon, or whether it is a strong cherry or strong watermelon. Therefore, the player will operate the left reel 32L in the specific operation mode described above so as not to miss out on any wins, regardless of which of the transition trigger roles has been won.

Also, the chance effect does not necessarily occur in a game in which the transition trigger role is won, but occurs only if the chance effect lottery process (step S2801) is won. Therefore, in order to avoid missing out on the transition trigger role, it is recommended that you operate the left reel 32L in the above-mentioned specific operation mode every game, even during normal play.

If a negative judgment is made in step S2802, or after the processing of step S2803, the process proceeds to step S2804. In step S2804, it is determined whether or not a premonition command is included as the current start command. If a premonition command is not included, it is determined in step S2805 whether or not an additional command is included as the current start command. If an additional command is not included, it is determined in step S2806 whether or not a bonus has been won. If a bonus has not been won, that is, if the lottery result is a win of a transition trigger role such as a strong cherry or weak watermelon, and if the transition lottery to challenge mode, attack mode, or VB mode or the lottery to add on the number of continued games has not been won, and if a bonus has not been won, then in step S2807, a lottery process for the pseudo premonition mode is executed. The pseudo premonition mode is visually difficult to distinguish from the premonition mode, but while the premonition mode notifies the player of a favorable result (such as winning the challenge mode) based on the completion of the premonition game number, the pseudo premonition mode ends without notifying the player of a favorable result based on the completion of the pseudo premonition game number.

In step S2807, a table for the pseudo premonition mode lottery is obtained from the various table storage area 182a of the ROM 182, and a lottery counter is obtained from the various counter area 183b, and a lottery is held to determine whether or not to execute the pseudo premonition mode. The table for the pseudo premonition mode lottery is set so that the probability of winning the lottery for the pseudo premonition mode differs depending on the type of transition trigger role that has been won; for example, it is set so that a strong cherry has a higher probability of winning the lottery for the pseudo premonition mode than a weak cherry.

In step S2808, it is determined whether or not the pseudo premonition mode lottery has been won based on the processing result of step S2807. If the lottery has been won, in step S2809, a lottery process is performed to determine the number of games in the pseudo premonition mode. This process corresponds to step S810 on the main control device 101 side, and the number of pseudo premonition games is randomly determined by lottery to be 1 out of 1 to 20. However, as described above, unlike the premonition mode based on various wins, the number of pseudo premonition games is determined to be 20 games or less. Also, 0 games are not selected in the lottery for the number of pseudo premonition games. In the following step S2810, a process is performed to set the number of pseudo premonition games determined in step S2809 to a continuous performance counter provided in the various counter area 183b. The continuous performance counter is a counter for grasping the number of games until the result is announced, and is decremented by 1 for each game. For example, in a configuration in which four games are played consecutively, the consecutive performance begins in a game in which the consecutive performance counter reaches 4, and the result is announced in a game in which the consecutive performance counter reaches 0. In this embodiment, when the premonition mode or pseudo premonition mode is set, the premonition mode or pseudo premonition mode ends after a consecutive performance. Then, by inputting the number of pseudo premonition games into the consecutive performance counter in step S2810, the consecutive performance will begin when the number of games remaining in the pseudo premonition mode corresponds to the start of the consecutive performance (four games remaining).

In step S2811, a process is executed to set a pseudo flag indicating that the pseudo premonition mode is being set in the various flag storage area 183a. In the following step S2812, a continuous performance flag is set. After that, the process for notifying the transition trigger role is terminated. Also, if a positive judgment is made in any of steps S2804 to S2806, or if a negative judgment is made in step S2808, the process for notifying the transition trigger role is terminated.

<Continuous performance setting process>
Next, the continuous performance setting process performed in step S2209 of the start-up performance setting process (FIG. 53) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S2901, it is determined whether or not the currently received start command includes a premonition command. If a premonition command is included, in step S2902, the number of premonition games in the premonition mode included in the premonition command is input to the continuous performance counter. As a result, when the number of remaining games in the premonition mode corresponds to the start of continuous performance (4 games remaining), the continuous performance will start.

When the premonition game count of 1 to 3 games is input into the continuous performance counter in step S2902, the continuous performance will start halfway through. For example, when 2 is input into the continuous performance counter in step S2902, the continuous performance will start from the current game, and will be performed from the third game of the continuous performance in FIG. 67(c). When 0 is input into the continuous performance counter, that is, when a winning notification such as attack mode is made without going through the premonition mode, the continuous performance will not be executed. After the processing of step S2902 is performed, the continuous performance flag is set in step S2903.

If a negative judgment is made in step S2901, or after the processing of step S2903 has been executed, the process proceeds to step S2904. In step S2904, it is judged whether or not the continuous performance flag is set. If the continuous performance flag is set, in step S2905, the continuous performance counter is decremented by 1. Then, in step S2906, it is judged whether or not the continuous performance counter is a number (0 to 3) corresponding to continuous performances.

If the continuous performance counter is a number corresponding to the continuous performance, in step S2907, it is determined whether or not the pseudo flag is set. If the pseudo flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S2908, where the main premonition performance table is obtained from the various table storage area 182a. Then, in step S2909, the performance data of the corresponding continuous performance is identified from the main premonition performance table and the continuous performance counter, the corresponding performance data is obtained from the performance data storage area 182b of the ROM 182, and processing is performed to set it as the current continuous performance. The performance data of the continuous performance identified from the main premonition performance table is performance data indicating that the continuous performance will continue until the next game if the continuous performance counter is 1 to 3, and is performance data indicating that the current continuous performance will end successfully if the continuous performance counter is 0.

If it is determined in step S2907 that the pseudo flag is set, the process proceeds to step S2910. In step S2910, a pseudo premonition effect table is obtained from the various table storage area 182a. Then, in step S2911, the effect data of the corresponding continuous effect is identified from the pseudo premonition effect table and the continuous effect counter, the corresponding effect data is obtained from the effect data storage area 182b of the ROM 182, and a process is performed to set it as the current continuous effect. The continuous effect effect data identified from the pseudo premonition effect table is, if the continuous effect counter is 1 to 3, the effect data indicates that the continuous effect will continue until the next game or that it will not continue, and if the continuous effect counter is 0, the effect data indicates that the current continuous effect will end in failure.

Note that when the continuous performance counter is 1 to 3, the performance data specified from the pseudo premonition performance table includes those in which no continuous performance is set. For example, when the continuous performance counter is 3 or 2, no continuous performance data is set, when the continuous performance counter is 1, performance data for the first game of the continuous performance is set, which indicates that the continuous performance will continue until the next game in FIG. 67(a), and when the continuous performance counter is 0, performance data for the second game of the continuous performance is set, which indicates that the continuous performance will not continue until the next game in FIG. 67(b). In this way, it is possible to set a performance in which the continuous performance is interrupted midway in a game in which the number of pseudo premonition games in the pseudo premonition mode is 0.

After performing the processing of step S2909 or step S2911, in step S2912 it is determined whether the continuous performance counter is 0. If the continuous performance counter is 0, in step S2913 a process is performed to clear the continuous performance flag and the pseudo flag. If the pseudo flag is not set, that state is maintained. If a negative determination is made in step S2904, step S2906, or step S2912, or after performing the processing of step S2913, this continuous performance setting process is terminated.

As described above, in this slot machine 10, the main control device 101 performs a lottery process based on the insertion of medals as game media and the start operation of the start lever 41, and each reel 32L, 32M, 32R starts to rotate, and each reel 32L, 32M, 32R stops based on the stop operation of the stop switches 42 to 44. If the combination of symbols that stops on an active line corresponds to the result of the lottery process, the corresponding bonus is awarded. In this configuration, multiple RT states with different probabilities of a replay being the result of the lottery process are provided, and the RT state is changed when a corresponding promotion replay or fall replay is won. Whether or not the corresponding replay is won is determined by the result of the win/lose lottery and the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44, and the notification of the operation order is made by winning the display mode transition lottery that is held according to the result of the lottery process. The result of the lottery process is a push order bell, and depending on the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44, it is possible to achieve this push order bell winning and win medals. By transitioning to the second RT state or the third RT state, which are game states where the replay probability is improved, and transitioning to a display mode where the operation order is notified, in that RT state, it is possible to achieve the push order bell winning in a state where the replay probability is improved, and it is possible to win a large number of medals.

As already explained, when switching to, for example, attack mode, a mode in which a large number of medals can be expected to be won, an initial number of games (50) is set, and play in attack mode is possible for that initial number of games. If an additional lottery is won in attack mode, the number of continuing games in attack mode is increased, and the number of games that can be played in attack mode increases. As a result, the number of medals that can be won in attack mode can also increase.

<Additional Notification Mode>
In the slot machine 10, a plurality of modes of the additional notification are set when the number of continued games in the attack mode is increased. More specifically, the mode of the additional notification has a plurality of modes that differ in the game in which the additional notification is performed, and the mode is set to a case where the additional notification is performed in the game in which the additional notification is performed or in a series of games triggered by the game in which the additional notification is performed (also referred to as "immediate additional notification" in the following description), and a case where the additional notification is performed in a game after the game in which the additional notification is performed, in which the notification game is determined after the fact (also referred to as "later additional notification" in the following description).

In the instant add-on notification, a series of games triggered by a game where an add-on occurs refers to, for example, a case where the above-mentioned premonition mode or a continuous performance occurs, triggered by the game where an add-on occurs, and a series of games refers to games that can continue from the game where an add-on occurs over multiple games. The series of games also includes cases where continuous performance does not occur, for example, a corresponding performance does not occur in the game where an add-on occurs, and an add-on notification occurs in the next game or multiple games later, and the game where an add-on occurs and the games up until the add-on notification occur are considered to be a series of games, and such a type of add-on notification is also included in the instant add-on notification.

On the other hand, in the case of later-addition notification, the notification game, which is a game that comes after the game in which the add-on occurred and is determined ex post, is different from the series of games in the immediate-addition notification in that the notification timing is determined ex post as the attack mode progresses, for example, in a game near the end of the attack mode, rather than being determined in the game in which the add-on occurred. In other words, the notification game is a game that is set without being triggered by the game in which the add-on occurred.

As for the presentation mode of the additional bonus notification, as explained in FIG. 57 above, in addition to the presentation mode in which the additional bonus notification is generated by the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64, there is also a presentation mode in which the additional bonus notification is generated along with the spinning presentation of each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R.

Below, we will explain each type of top-up notification, including the process for making the top-up notification.

<Additional notification processing>
The process for notifying the addition is a process performed by the main control device 101 in step S919 of the second specific role process (FIG. 34), step S1006 of the third specific role process (FIG. 35), step S1104 of the specialized zone process, etc. In other words, it is a process performed by the main control device 101 after the game number addition lottery in the attack mode is won and the number of games is added. The process for notifying the addition sets the game for which the addition is to be notified, and if the addition is to be notified in that game, sets the timing for executing the addition is to be notified.

The following describes the overview of the display contents of the auxiliary display unit 65 for the immediate loading notification and later loading notification with reference to Figure 69.

The immediate add-on notification is a notification in which a portion of the number of games remaining in the advantageous zone ZG is notified in advance as the number of games remaining in the advantageous zone, while the later add-on notification is a notification in which the remaining number of games out of the number of games remaining in the advantageous zone ZG is notified later. If the number of games notified in advance is the display remaining number counter HG, and the number of games notified later is the later add-on counter BG, then the number of games remaining in the advantageous zone ZG will be equal to the sum of the display remaining number counter HG and the later add-on counter BG. The display remaining number counter HG is decremented by one each time a game is played, and the later add-on counter BG is not decremented even if a game is played unless a later add-on notification occurs.

As shown in FIG. 70, in this embodiment, when the remaining number of games displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 (remaining number of games display ZGP) reaches a predetermined number (1 in this modified example) during the attack mode, that is, when the display remaining number counter HG managed by the main control unit 101 reaches a predetermined number (1), a later-add notification occurs. In the later-add notification, for example, as in the case of the add notification performance, it is notified that the number of games corresponding to the later-add counter BG (150) (150 in the figure) has been added. As a result, the later-add counter BG managed by the main control unit 101 is decremented by the notification amount (becomes 0 in the figure), and the display remaining number counter HG managed by the main control unit 101 is updated by adding the notification amount due to the later-add notification, and the remaining number of games display ZGP on the auxiliary display unit 65 also becomes a value corresponding to the display remaining number counter HG (150 after one game is played in the figure).

In this way, when an additional win is won, if the later-add notification is selected, a difference may occur between the display remaining number counter HG and the actual number of games remaining in the advantageous zone ZG. On the other hand, when an immediate-add notification is selected, no difference occurs between the display remaining number counter HG and the actual number of games remaining in the advantageous zone ZG. In this embodiment, the later-add counter BG is referenced when an additional win is won, and whether the later-add notification or the immediate-add notification is selected depends on the current value of the later-add counter BG.

That is, in the process for adding on notification, as shown in FIG. 69, first, in step S3001, a process is performed to grasp the value of the later-addition counter BG in the various counter area 106e. In the following step S3002, a notification game lottery process is executed. The notification game lottery process is a lottery process to determine whether the current additional notification will be a later-addition notification or an immediate-addition notification. In the notification game lottery process, a later-addition lottery table is obtained from the various table storage area 105a, and a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to make it a later-addition notification depending on the value of the later-addition counter BG grasped in step S3001.

As shown in FIG. 71, the later-addition lottery table is set so that the probability of the later-addition notification being selected varies depending on the value of the later-addition counter BG and the type of specific role that triggered the later-addition win. For example, when a strong cherry triggers an add-on, if the later-addition counter BG is less than 30, there is a 20% chance that the later-addition notification will be selected (80% chance that the immediate add-on notification will be selected), whereas if the later-addition counter BG is between 30 and less than 100, there is a 10% chance that the later-addition notification will be selected, and if the later-addition counter BG is 100 or more, there is a 5% chance that the later-addition notification will be selected. In other words, the higher the value of the later-addition counter BG, the lower the selection rate of the later-addition notification.

In addition, the type of specific role that triggers an additional win is set so that the selection rate of the additional win when the value of the additional win counter BG is small is higher for so-called normal roles (high probability trigger result, high probability result) such as various push order replays and various push order bells, which have a relatively high probability of winning, than for so-called rare roles (low probability trigger result, low probability result) such as strong cherries, weak cherries, strong watermelons, and weak watermelons, which have a relatively low probability of winning. More specifically, in the notification game lottery process triggered by various push order replays and various push order bells, when the later win counter BG is less than 30, the later win notification is selected with a 100% probability.

As described above, the later-addition counter BG is decremented by the amount of the later-addition notification after the display remaining number counter HG reaches a specified number and an additional notification is issued. Therefore, basically, as the game in the advantageous zone, i.e., attack mode play progresses, the value of the later-addition counter BG often increases, and conversely, at the beginning of the advantageous zone, i.e., at the beginning of attack mode play, the value of the later-addition counter BG is likely to be 0 or a small value.

In other words, if an additional win occurs in the early stages of play in attack mode, there is a high probability that the later-addition notification will be selected. In particular, if an additional win occurs as a result of a normal role that is not a rare role such as a push order replay or push order bell, the later-addition notification will always be selected if it is in the early stages of attack mode. As a result, after the start of attack mode, the later-addition counter BG tends to fill up relatively quickly.

After executing the notification game lottery process in step S3002, it is determined in step S3003 whether or not a later-addition win has been made. If a later-addition win has not been made and immediate-addition notification has been selected, in step S3004, a process is performed to add the current additional-addition winning game to the display remaining number counter HG provided in the various counter area 106e. Then, in step S3005, a notification timing setting process is executed to set the timing at which the additional-addition notification will be made in the current game. The notification timing setting process is a process for setting the timing at which the additional-addition notification will be made in the current game.

The timing of the additional notification is set to differ depending on the number of additional games. Specifically, as shown in the execution timing table in FIG. 72, the execution timing of the additional notification in the current game is set to be when the first reel is stopped, when the second reel is stopped, and when the third reel is stopped, assuming that the order of the stop operations for the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is the first reel, the second reel, and the third reel. Also, the timing of the stop ON operation, which is when the stop switches 42 to 44 are pressed among the stop operations for each reel, and the stop OFF operation, which is when the pressing operation is ended, are set.

Here, we will provide additional explanation on the operation of the stop switches 42-44. The stop switches 42-44 can be moved from an initial position, located at the frontmost side, to an operating position, located at the backmost side. When placed at the initial position, the detection signal from the stop detection sensors 42a-44a is in a LOW state, and when the stop switches are operated from the initial position to the operating position, the detection signal from the stop detection sensors 42a-44a switches to a HI signal. Then, based on the detection signal switching from a LOW signal to a HI signal, the main control device 101 understands that a stop ON operation has been performed, which means that the stop switches 42-44 have been pressed.

The stop switches 42-44 are also biased toward their initial positions by springs or the like. Therefore, when the hand is released from the stop switches 42-44 and the operating force (pressing force) applied to the operating positions is no longer applied, the stop switches 42-44 return to their initial positions by the biasing force of the springs or the like. In this case, the detection signals from the stop detection sensors 42a-44a switch from a HI signal to a LOW signal. Then, based on the detection signal switching from a HI signal to a LOW signal, the main control device 101 determines that a stop OFF operation has been performed, which means that the pressing operation of the stop switches 42-44 has ended.

The top-up notification is set to occur when the stop switch 42-44 is operated to stop either when the stop switch is turned on or when the stop switch is turned off. In other words, in a game in which the top-up notification occurs, the top-up effect can occur not only when the stop switch 42-44 is pressed, but also when the pressing operation ends.

In the execution timing table for the addition notification, when the number of added games is relatively small, for example 5 to 10 games, the timing when the first reel's stop ON operation is performed is selected 5% of the time, the timing when the first reel's stop OFF operation is performed 10%, the timing when the second reel's stop ON operation is performed 15%, the timing when the second reel's stop OFF operation is performed 20%, the timing when the third reel's stop ON operation is performed 20%, and the timing when the third reel's stop OFF operation (when all reels are stopped) is selected 30% of the time. In this case, the timing when the stop OFF operation is performed is more likely to be selected than the timing when the stop ON operation is performed for each reel, and the timing when the operation on the rear side is more likely to be selected.

On the other hand, when the number of added games is relatively large, for example 100 or more games are added, the timing when the first reel's stop ON operation is performed is selected 5% of the time, the timing when the first reel's stop OFF operation is performed 10%, the timing when the second reel's stop ON operation is performed 5%, the timing when the second reel's stop OFF operation is performed 30%, the timing when the third reel's stop ON operation is performed 5%, and the timing when the third reel's stop OFF operation (when all reels are stopped) is selected 45% of the time. In this case, too, the timing when the reels' stop OFF operation is performed is more likely to be selected than the timing when the reels are stopped, and the timing when the latter operation is performed is relatively more likely to be selected.

In other words, in this embodiment, the system is set up so that an additional notification occurs more easily when the reels are turned off than when they are turned on. Also, when comparing the first to third reels, the system is set up so that the third reel is most likely to be selected when it is stopped (turned on or off), the second reel is next most likely to be selected when it is stopped, and the first reel is least likely to be selected when it is stopped.

In relation to the number of added games, the greater the number of added games, the easier it becomes to select the timing, especially when operating the third reel stop OFF. In other words, if a player knows in advance that an added notification will occur, if the added notification does not occur by the time the third reel stop ON operation is performed, the player is likely to execute the third reel stop OFF operation, in high hopes that a large number of games will be added.

In step S3005, the execution timing of the add-on notification in the current game is set based on the execution timing table for the add-on notification. After that, this add-on notification process is terminated. In this case, information that the current add-on will be notified in the current game as an immediate add-on notification, and information regarding the execution timing of the add-on notification in the current game are set in the add-on command in the add-on command set process (steps S920, S1007, S1105, etc.) executed following this add-on notification process. The display control device 81, which receives the add-on command containing this information, sets the add-on notification performance based on this information (Figure 55).

If it is determined in step S3003 that the player has won the later-addition lottery, the process proceeds to step S3006. In step S3006, a process is executed to add the current number of added-on games to the later-addition counter BG provided in the various counter area 106e. Then, in step S3007, a process is executed to set the later-addition flag in the various flag storage area 106d, and then the process for notifying the player of this added-on is terminated.

The later addition flag is a flag that allows the CPU 102 of the main control device 101 to understand that a later addition notification should be made when the value of the later addition counter BG is greater than 0 and the display remaining number counter HG reaches a predetermined value. In this case, in the set process of the add-on command executed following this add-on notification process, information that no add-on notification will occur in the current game is set in the add-on command. The display control device 81 that receives the add-on command containing this information controls so that no add-on notification will occur in the current game (Figure 55, step S2403: NO).

<Processing for rear loading notification>
Next, the subsequent-addition notification process will be described with reference to the flowchart of Fig. 73. The subsequent-addition notification process is a process carried out in step S1402 of the winning result response process (Fig. 45) in the main control device 101.

First, in step S3101, it is determined whether the current display mode is attack mode, VB mode, or specialized zone. As already explained, it is possible to determine which display mode it is by grasping the corresponding flag. If it is not one of these modes, that is, if it is in normal mode or challenge mode, the process for later addition notification is terminated as it is. If it is in attack mode, VB mode, or specialized zone mode, it is determined in step S3102 whether it is in a bonus state. If it is in either a BB state based on the first BB or the second BB or a CB state based on the CB, the process for later addition notification is terminated as it is. If a negative determination is made in step S3102, the process proceeds to step S3103, where a subtraction process is performed on the display remaining number counter HG. In this case, in step S3103, a command including the value after subtraction of the display remaining number counter HG is set as an output target to the display control device 81. The display control device 81 that receives such a command controls the auxiliary display unit 65 to update the display of the remaining game number display ZGP. In addition, a counter or the like corresponding to the remaining game counter HG for display may be provided in the display control device 81, and the display control device 81 may be configured to perform processing for updating the remaining game number display ZGP.

In step S3104, as a result of the processing in step S3103, it is determined whether the display remaining number counter HG has reached a predetermined value (1) that triggers a later-loading notification. If it has not reached the predetermined value, the later-loading notification processing is terminated. If it has reached the predetermined value, it is determined in step S3105 whether the later-loading flag has been set. If the later-loading flag has not been set, the later-loading notification processing is terminated.

If it is determined in step S3105 that the later-addition flag is set, the process proceeds to step S3106. In step S3106, the value of the later-addition counter BG is obtained. Then, in step S3107, a process is performed to set an add-on command so that an add-on notification according to the value of the later-addition counter BG is made. In this case, the add-on command includes information that an add-on notification will be made in the game, as well as information that a number of games will be added according to the value of the later-addition counter BG. Note that a configuration in which a portion of the later-addition counter BG is added may also be used; for example, it is possible to determine by lottery whether or not to add a portion, and if a portion is to be added, to set information in the add-on command that the portion of the number of games will be added.

In the next step S3108, a process is performed in which a value corresponding to the number of added games set in the add-on command in step S3107 is subtracted from the later-addition counter BG. Then, in step S3109, it is determined whether the later-addition counter BG has become 0 as a result of the process of step S3108. If it is not 0, the later-addition notification process is terminated. If it is 0, the later-addition flag is cleared in step S3110, and then the later-addition notification process is terminated.

As described above, in the winning result response process, an add-on command is sent to the display control device 81 in the subsequent add-on notification process, and the display control device 81 executes processing for performing the add-on notification effect in the all-stop added-on notification process in steps S2609 and S2619 in the all-stop effect setting process (FIG. 58). As a result, in a game in which the display remaining number counter HG has reached a predetermined value, an add-on notification is executed as a subsequent add-on notification after all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped. Therefore, in a game in which the display remaining number counter HG has reached the predetermined value (1), the third reel is stopped OFF in the hope that an add-on notification (subsequent add-on notification) will be performed, regardless of the winning result of the game.

By the way, the timing of the top-up notification selected when performing an immediate top-up notification, the time of the third reel stop OFF operation, and the time of full stop when performing a later top-up notification, can be different timings. That is, the time of the third reel stop OFF operation is the timing when the third reel stop OFF operation is performed, and the corresponding reel may stop at that timing, or the corresponding reel may stop at a slightly delayed timing accompanied by slip control. Therefore, the time of the third reel stop OFF operation may be a timing slightly earlier than the timing when all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R stop. On the other hand, the execution timing of the later top-up notification set in the process for later top-up notification in the winning result response process is the timing after the winning result response process is executed, that is, after all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have completely stopped, and after the medal payout is performed if a small winning occurs (after the payout determination process of step S413 is executed). Therefore, the timing of the later-loading notification may be later than the timing of the third reel stop OFF operation for the immediate-loading notification.

In this embodiment, the freeze effect is configured to be executed when the first BB or second BB is won in the normal game state or the first RT state, or when the VB mode is won in the second RT state. In this case, the freeze effect is not executed in the winning game for the first BB or the like, but in a specific game a predetermined number of games after the winning game. In other words, the execution of the freeze effect in the specific game is preset in a game prior to the specific game in which the freeze effect is executed. Various processes related to the freeze effect are explained below.

<BB Winning Processing>
The BB winning process will be described with reference to the flowchart of Fig. 74. This process is executed in step S814 of the first specific combination process (Fig. 33) in the main control device 101, and is for setting the execution of a freeze effect when the BB is won in a normal game state or a first RT state.

In the BB winning process, first, in step S3201, it is determined whether or not a bonus has been won. Specifically, it is determined whether or not any of the first BB winning flag, the second BB winning flag, and the CB winning flag (bonus winning flag) is set in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106. If the bonus winning flag is set, in step S3202, it is determined whether or not the set bonus winning flag is the CB winning flag, i.e., whether or not the bonus that has been won is CB.

If a negative judgment is made in step S3201 (the bonus winning flag is not set) or if a positive judgment is made in step S3202 (the set bonus winning flag is the CB winning flag), the BB winning process ends. On the other hand, if a negative judgment is made in step S3202, that is, if the set bonus winning flag is the 1st BB winning flag or the 2nd BB winning flag and the 1st BB or the 2nd BB has been won, the process proceeds to steps S3203 to S3205, and processing for setting the premonition mode is performed. In other words, if the 1st BB or the 2nd BB has been won, the process transitions to the premonition mode, and after playing each game in the premonition mode, a winning announcement is made that a bonus has been won.

The processing of steps S3203 to S3205 is the same as that of steps S810 to S812 described above. That is, in step S3203, a premonition game number table is obtained from ROM 105, and in step S3204, a lottery process is performed to determine the number of premonition games based on the premonition game number table obtained in step S3203 and the lottery counter obtained from the various counter area 106e of RAM 106. Thereafter, in step S3205, the premonition game number obtained by lottery is input to the premonition counter provided in the various counter area 106e of RAM 106, and the premonition game number is set. The premonition counter is decremented by 1 in step S1506 of the game number management process described above (FIG. 46), that is, when all of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped.

In the premonition game number table obtained in step S3203, as shown in FIG. 39, when BB is won in normal display mode, 1 to 5 games are selected with an 80% probability, and 6 to 10 games are selected with a 20% probability. On the other hand, when BB is won during challenge mode, the premonition game number is always set to 0.

After step S3205 is executed, in step S3206, it is determined whether the number of premonition games set in step S3205 is greater than 0. If the number of premonition games is greater than 0, i.e., if one or more premonition games are set, the process proceeds to step S3207, where a freeze lottery process is executed to determine whether or not to execute a freeze effect. In step S3207, a freeze lottery table is obtained from the various table storage area 105a of the ROM 105, and a lottery is executed to determine whether or not to execute a freeze effect based on the lottery table and the lottery counters obtained from the various counter area 106e of the RAM 106. The probability of winning the freeze effect is arbitrary and is set to, for example, 70%. Note that the freeze lottery process may be omitted, or the probability of winning the freeze effect may be set to 100%, so that the freeze effect is always executed.

In the next step S3208, it is determined whether or not the freeze effect has been selected as a result of the freeze lottery. If the freeze effect has been selected, steps S3209 to S3212 are executed to pre-set the execution of the freeze effect. In this setting process, first in step S3209, a process is executed to allocate the type of freeze effect to be executed. In this embodiment, multiple types of freeze effects with different execution modes are set as freeze effects. Specifically, three types of freeze effects are set: a first freeze effect, a second freeze effect, and a third freeze effect.

Here, the outline of each of the freeze effects will be explained with reference to FIG. 75(b). A freeze effect is an effect that restricts at least one of the start and progress of a normal game operation, in which the rotation of each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R (rotating body) is started based on the operation of the start lever 41 and the rotation of each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is stopped based on the operation of the stop switches 42 to 44. More specifically, even if the player operates the start lever 41 or the stop switches 42 to 44, at least one of the rotation start control of each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R based on the operation of the start lever 41 and the rotation stop control of each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R based on the operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 is not executed (is restricted).

The first to third freeze effects are set as rotation effects that are performed when the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R start to rotate. When each freeze effect is executed, if the start lever 41 is operated while the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R rotate in the direction opposite to the normal rotation direction (forward, downward, orbital). While the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are rotating in the reverse direction, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R do not stop even if the player operates the stop switches 42 to 44, and the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R continue to rotate in the reverse direction. In other words, the player cannot stop the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R at his/her will. In addition, the rotation speed of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R at this time is slower than the normal rotation speed, allowing the player to easily understand that each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is rotating in the reverse direction, and allowing the player to easily distinguish each symbol visible through each display window 26L, 26M, 26R.

When a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of reverse rotation (when the reels have rotated a predetermined amount), the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are temporarily stopped with the "red 7" symbols lined up on a predetermined line. At this time, if the first freeze effect is assigned as the freeze effect to be executed, the "red 7" symbols will be temporarily stopped when they are lined up on the middle line L2, resulting in a middle red 7 freeze effect, if the second freeze effect is assigned, the "red 7" symbols will be temporarily stopped when they are lined up on the right-up red 7 freeze effect, if the third freeze effect is assigned, the "red 7" symbols will be temporarily stopped when they are lined up on the top line L1, resulting in an upper red 7 freeze effect. After the "red 7" symbol combination is temporarily stopped in this way, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R will rotate forward and transition to normal rotation control, and then, by operating each of the stop switches 42 to 44, the symbols corresponding to the game result of this game will stop on the pay line.

Returning to the explanation of the BB winning process (FIG. 74), in step S3209, a freeze type allocation table is obtained from the various table storage area 105a of the ROM 105, and a freeze type allocation process is performed based on the allocation table and the counter value for the lottery. As shown in FIG. 75(a), the allocation table is set so that, when there is no overlapping win with the attack mode, the first freeze effect is selected with a 60% probability, the second freeze effect is selected with a 30% probability, and the third freeze effect is selected with a 10% probability. In other words, when only the BB is won, the first freeze effect is most likely to be selected, and the third freeze effect is least likely to be selected. On the other hand, when there is an overlapping win with the attack mode, the first freeze effect is selected with a 10% probability, the second freeze effect is selected with a 30% probability, and the third freeze effect is selected with a 60% probability. In other words, when not only the BB but also the attack mode is won, the third freeze effect is most likely to be selected, and the first freeze effect is least likely to be selected. Therefore, for players, the chances of winning both BB and attack mode are highest when the third freeze effect is performed.

Incidentally, the first freeze effect, second freeze effect, and third freeze effect will not occur unless a BB win occurs when the game is in the normal game state or the first RT state. Therefore, from the player's perspective, the occurrence of each of the above freeze effects confirms that a BB win has been made. In this sense, each of the above freeze effects can be said to be a confirmation effect for the first BB and second BB.

After execution of step S3209, in step S3210, a freeze flag corresponding to the freeze type allocation result is set in the various flag storage area 106d of RAM 106. That is, if the first freeze effect is selected, the first freeze flag is set, if the second freeze effect is selected, the second freeze flag is set, and if the third freeze effect is selected, the third freeze flag is set. These flags are used by the main control device 101 to determine which freeze effect is set to be executed.

In the next step S3211, a freeze counter FC is set in the various counter area 106e of the RAM 106. The freeze counter FC determines the number of games that will be played between the BB win and the execution of the freeze effect, in other words, how many games after the BB win the freeze effect will be executed. In this embodiment, the freeze counter FC is set to the same value as the premonition counter set in step S3205 above. This freeze counter FC is decremented by one at the start of each game.

Then, in step S3212, a process is executed to set the freeze stock command as an output target to the display control device 81. The freeze stock command includes information indicating that a freeze effect has been preset to be executed, the type of freeze effect to be executed, and after how many games the freeze effect will be executed.

After executing step S3212, if a negative judgment is made in step S3206 (if the number of premonition games is 0) or if a negative judgment is made in step S3208 (if the lottery to execute the freeze effect is not won), a premonition command is set in step S3213, and then the BB winning process is terminated.

<VB mode winning processing>
Next, the VB mode winning process will be described with reference to the flowchart of Fig. 76. This process is executed in step S909 of the second specific combination process (Fig. 34) in the main control device 101, and is for setting the execution of a freeze effect when the VB mode is won in a situation where the game state is the second RT state.

In the winning process for VB mode, first, in step S3301, it is determined whether or not the number of premonition games is greater than 0. In this case, the number of premonition games to be determined is the number of premonition games set in step S908 of the second specific role process. If the number of premonition games is greater than 0, in step S3202, a lottery process is performed to determine whether or not to execute a freeze effect. In the following step S3203, it is determined whether or not the execution of a freeze effect has been won, and if the execution of a freeze effect has been won, in step S3304, a fourth freeze flag is set. The fourth freeze flag is a flag that corresponds to the execution of the first freeze effect in the second RT state.

After step S3304 is executed, the freeze counter FC is set in step S3305, and then the freeze stock command is set in step S3306. In step S3305, similar to step S3211 of the above-mentioned BB winning process (FIG. 74), the freeze counter FC value is set to the same value as the premonition counter. After step S3306 is executed, or if a negative judgment is made in step S3301 or step S3303, the premonition command is set in step S3307, and then this VB mode winning process is terminated.

<Rotation effect processing>
Next, the spin effect process will be described with reference to the flowchart of Fig. 77. This process is executed in step S401 of the reel control process (Fig. 19) in the main control device 101, and is for executing the freeze effect set in the BB mode winning process or the VB mode winning process.

In the rotation effect process, first in step S3401, it is determined whether or not a freeze effect is set to be executed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not any of the first freeze flag, second freeze flag, third freeze flag, and fourth freeze flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106. If any of the freeze flags is set, in step S3402, the value of the freeze counter FC set in the various counter area 106e of the RAM 106 is decremented by 1, and the freeze counter FC is updated. Note that since the rotation effect process is executed at the start of the game (when the start lever 41 is operated), the freeze counter FC is updated at the start of each game.

In the following step S3403, it is determined whether or not the value of the freeze counter FC is 0. If the value of the freeze counter FC is 0, the process proceeds to step S3404, where it is determined whether or not the freeze flag set in RAM 106 is the first freeze flag. If a positive determination is made in step S3404, the first freeze flag that has been set is cleared in step S3405, and in the following step S3406, the first freeze effect (middle row red 7s aligned freeze effect, FIG. 75(b)) is set to be executed in the game.

Here, the relationship between the freeze effect and the display effect executed by the auxiliary display unit 65 will be explained. As already explained, in the BB winning game or VB mode winning game, a lottery is held to switch to the premonition mode, and the premonition mode is switched to with a predetermined probability. When the premonition mode is switched to, the number of games remaining in the premonition mode and the number of games in which the consecutive effects are executed are referenced, and the timing of the start of the execution of the consecutive effects is controlled so that the result display of the consecutive effects (Figure 68) is displayed in the final game of the premonition mode. For example, if the number of games in the premonition mode is set to 5 games (premonition counter = 4) in the BB winning game and the consecutive effects are set to be executed over 4 games, the consecutive effects will start in the game in which the number of games remaining in the premonition mode is 4 games (premonition counter = 3).

When a freeze effect is executed, the value of the freeze counter FC set in the BB winning game (the number of games from the BB winning game until the freeze effect is executed) is referenced to control the timing of the execution of the freeze effect. As described above, the freeze counter FC is set to the same value as the premonition counter, and the freeze effect is executed when the value of the freeze counter FC becomes 0, so the freeze effect is executed in the final game of the premonition mode where the premonition counter is 0. Here, since the final game of the premonition mode is the final game of the consecutive effects, when the player operates the start lever 41 to start the final game of the consecutive effects, the freeze effect is executed accordingly.

When a freeze effect is executed, as shown in FIG. 68(a1), a specific image for the freeze effect (for example, an image of flames displayed behind the main character) is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65. At this time, a corresponding sound effect (for example, a male voice saying "Woooohooo!!") is output from the speaker 64 in conjunction with the display of the image. The special behavior of each reel 32L, 32R, 32R due to the freeze effect and the above images etc. liven up the final game of the continuous effects, increasing the impact and making it more satisfying to watch, as well as providing effects such as an appropriate increase in the player's sense of elation and superiority.

Returning to the explanation of the rotation effect process (FIG. 77), if a negative judgment is made in step S3404, the process proceeds to step S3407, where it is determined whether or not the set freeze flag is the fourth freeze flag. If it is the fourth freeze flag, the process proceeds to step S3408, where the set fourth freeze flag is cleared, and then the process proceeds to step S3406, where it is set so that the first freeze effect is executed. On the other hand, if a negative judgment is made in the above step S3407, it is determined in step S3409, where it is determined whether or not the set freeze flag is the second freeze flag. If it is the second freeze flag, the set second freeze flag is cleared in step S3410, and in the following step S3411, it is set so that the second freeze effect (FIG. 75(b)) is executed in the game.

If the determination in step S3409 above is negative, it means that the set freeze flag is the third freeze flag. In this case, the process proceeds to step S3412, where the set third freeze flag is cleared, and then, in step S3413, the third freeze effect (Figure 75 (b)) is set to be executed in the game.

After step S3406, step S3411 or step S3413 is executed, or if a negative judgment is made in step S3401 or step S3403, the process proceeds to step S3414, where other spin effect setting processing is executed. In the other spin effect setting processing, various spin effects provided in addition to the above-mentioned freeze effects (for example, effects that vary the timing at which each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R starts spinning, freeze effects that are performed without starting the spinning of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R, etc.) are set to be performed. After the processing of step S3403 is executed, this spin effect processing ends.

However, while the freeze effect is expected to have the above-mentioned effects, it also has the side of reducing the time efficiency of play, since the effect cannot be ended at the player's will. For this reason, players who want to play as many games as possible may want to prioritize game completion efficiency over the freeze effect. Also, when there is little time to play, such as when the closing time of the gaming hall is approaching, there may be a desire to skip the freeze effect and complete the game quickly. Therefore, in this embodiment, a configuration is devised so that when the execution of a freeze effect is preset, the execution can be canceled before the effect is executed. The configuration for this purpose is explained below.

<Freeze release process>
The freeze release process will be described with reference to the flowchart of Fig. 78. This process is executed in step S414 of the reel control process (Fig. 19), and is for releasing the execution of the freeze effect after the execution of the freeze effect has been set.

In the freeze release process, first, in step S3501, it is determined whether or not a freeze effect is set to be executed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not any freeze flags are stored in the various flag storage area 106d of RAM 106. If any freeze flag is stored and a freeze effect is set to be executed, the process proceeds to step S3502, where it is determined whether or not the freeze counter FC is greater than 0. In other words, in this step, it is determined whether or not the game is before the game in which the freeze effect is executed.

If the freeze counter FC is greater than 0 and the game is before the game in which the freeze effect is executed, step S3503 determines whether the stopped state of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is a reach eye stopping state. More specifically, it determines whether a specific reach eye (either reach eye A or reach eye B in FIG. 18) is stopped among the reach eyes set in the slot machine 10. In step S3503, the pattern number stopped at the base position on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is confirmed, and it is determined whether the pattern number corresponds to reach eye A or reach eye B, thereby determining whether a specific reach eye is stopped.

If the determination in step S3503 is affirmative, the process proceeds to step S3504, where it is determined whether the set freeze flag is either the first freeze flag or the second freeze flag. In other words, it is determined whether the freeze effect to be executed is a freeze effect other than the third freeze effect.

If the set freeze flag is either the first freeze flag or the second freeze flag, in step S3505, the set freeze flag and the freeze counter FC set in the various counter area 106e of the RAM 106 are cleared. This cancels (disables) the execution of the freeze effect. In the following step S3506, a freeze release command is set as an output target to the display control device 81. The freeze release command indicates that the execution of the freeze effect has been canceled, and by receiving the freeze release command, the display control device 81 can know that the execution of the freeze effect has been canceled. When the display control device 81 receives the freeze release command, it controls so that the specific image (Figure 68 (a)) of the freeze effect is not displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 in the final game of the continuous effect, and controls so that the corresponding sound effect is not output.

On the other hand, if the above step S3503 is negative (if it is determined that the reach eye has not stopped), in step S3507, it is determined whether or not the 11th replay winning has been achieved. As already explained, this 11th replay winning is a replay role that can be won only in the second RT state (see FIG. 25, etc.), and plays the role of a reach eye when the VB mode is won. The 11th replay role is configured to win together with the 1st replay role (see IV=56 in FIG. 25). And, when the 11th replay role is won, as shown in FIG. 24(b), if the stop switches 42-44 are operated in a predetermined operation sequence (left → center → right or left → right → center), the 11th replay role is won, and if the stop switches 42-44 are operated in an operation sequence different from the above operation sequence, the 1st replay role is won. In addition, both the 11th replay role and the 1st replay role are non-transition outcomes that do not involve a transition in the game state.

Here, the push order notification process (push order notification process for reach eyes) for making the 11th replay role function as a reach eye when the VB mode is won will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 79. This process is executed in step S1323 of the push order role process (Figure 44) in the main control device 101, and more specifically, it is executed when it is determined in step S1319 of the push order role process that the current lottery result is not a bell win.

In the reach-eye push sequence notification process, first, in step S3601, it is determined whether or not the VB mode win flag is set, thereby determining whether or not VB mode has been won. If the VB mode win flag is not set (VB mode has not been won), in step S3602, it is determined whether or not the current lottery result is a reach-eye replay (11th replay role) win.

If the reach-eye replay is a win, the process proceeds to step S3603, where the push order notification process for the first replay is executed. Specifically, the operation sequence corresponding to the first replay winning of the 11th replay and the 1st replay is notified (see FIG. 24(b)). In the following step S3604, a push order notification command is set as an output command to the display control device 81. The push order notification command includes information indicating that the push order is to be notified in step S3603, in addition to information indicating that the instruction monitor 68 will notify the push order, and the display control device 81 can grasp the push order to be notified in the instruction monitor 68 by receiving this command. Note that the information indicating that the 11th replay role has been won and the information indicating that the VB mode has been won are included in the lottery result command set in step S312 of the lottery process (FIG. 16).

The display control device 81, which has received the push order command and the lottery result command, controls the auxiliary display unit 65, etc. to also notify the push order of the first replay role in accordance with the push order notification of the first replay role on the instruction monitor 68. This control process is performed in steps S2314 to S2316 of the push order notification process shown in FIG. 54. Specifically, in step S2314, it is determined whether or not the VB mode has been won, and if the VB mode has not been won, in step S2315, it is determined whether or not the current lottery result is a reach-eye replay win. If the reach-eye replay has been won, in step S2316, the operation sequence corresponding to the first replay win is notified. Specifically, the push order notification command output from the main control device 101 is referenced, and the auxiliary display unit 65, etc. is controlled to perform a push order notification that will result in the first replay winning. After executing step S2316, if a positive judgment is made in step S2314 (if the VB mode has been won) or if a negative judgment is made in step S2315 (if the current lottery result is not a reach-eye replay win), the push order notification process ends.

Returning to the explanation of the reach eye push order notification process (Figure 79), after step S3604 is executed, if a positive judgment is made in step S3601 (if the VB mode win flag is set) or if a negative judgment is made in step S3602 (if the current lottery result is not a reach eye replay win), the reach eye push order notification process is terminated.

By the above process, if a reach-eye replay role is won when VB mode is not won, the instruction monitor 68, auxiliary display unit 65, etc. will notify the push order for the first replay role. Then, when the player operates the stop switches 42-44 in accordance with this notification, the symbol combination corresponding to the first replay role will stop on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. Therefore, when VB mode is not won, the first replay role is more likely to win.

On the other hand, if a reach-eye replay role is won when the VB mode is won, the push order notification is not made on the instruction monitor 68 and auxiliary display unit 65. In this case, it is considered that the player will operate the stop switches 42 to 44 in the usual operating order. Generally, it is assumed that many players stop the left reel 32L first, but in this embodiment, the system is configured so that the 11th replay role will be won if the stop switch 42 corresponding to the left reel 32L is operated first. Therefore, in a situation where the push order notification is not made, the 11th replay role is more likely to be won.

In this way, if a reach-eye replay role is won when VB mode is not won, a push order notification for a normal replay role that is different from the reach-eye replay role is made, whereas if a reach-eye replay role is won when VB mode is won, the above push order notification is not executed, so that the 11th replay role functions as a reach-eye when VB mode is won.

Incidentally, the main display mode in the second RT state is the attack mode, and in this mode, the push order notification for the replay role and the bell role is executed more frequently than in the normal mode. Under such circumstances, for example, when a reach-eye replay role (11th replay role) is won, if the push order notification for the role is executed, the reach-eye replay role will win if the player operates the stop switches 42 to 44 calmly according to the push order notification. In this regard, by configuring the push order notification not to be executed when the reach-eye replay role (11th replay role) is won, in a game in which the push order notification is not executed, the player will operate the stop switches 42 to 44 with a sense of expectation, and furthermore, the interest in the stop results in the game will also increase. Therefore, it is possible to suitably increase the interest and make it easier for the player to notice the winning of the reach-eye replay role.

Returning to the explanation of the freeze release process (FIG. 78), if a positive judgment is made in step S3507 (if the 11th replay role has been won), the process proceeds to step S3505, where the freeze flag and freeze counter FC are cleared and the execution of the freeze effect is cancelled. On the other hand, if a negative judgment is made in step S3507, the freeze release process is terminated.

<Game flow regarding freeze effects>
Next, a flow of a game regarding the freeze effect will be described with reference to Fig. 80. Here, a case where the execution of the freeze effect is set in response to a BB win will be described as an example.

As shown in FIG. 80(a), when a BB is won in a certain game, a freeze effect is set to be executed with a certain probability. In this case, the setting is not to execute the freeze effect in the game in which the BB is won, but to execute the freeze effect in a specific game a certain number of games after the game in question.

As shown in FIG. 80(b), if the player does not stop a specific reach symbol (reach symbol A or reach symbol B) until the end of the game immediately preceding the specific game, a freeze effect is executed in the specific game based on the above settings. Since the final game of the consecutive effects is played in the specific game, after the freeze effect is executed, the winning result in the consecutive effects is announced (flow of FIG. 68(a) → FIG. 68(b1) → FIG. 68(b2)).

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 80(c), if the player stops the specific reach-eye before the end of the game immediately preceding the specific game, the execution of the freeze effect in the specific game is cancelled. In other words, the operation of the stop switches 42-44 that stop the specific reach-eye is an operation for cancelling the execution of the freeze effect. Therefore, the player can cancel the execution of the freeze effect after knowing that he has won the BB, and can both know that he has won the BB and cancel the freeze effect with a single operation. When the execution of the freeze effect is cancelled, the freeze effect is not executed in the specific game, and the winning result is announced in the final game of the consecutive effects with the freeze effect omitted (flow from FIG. 68(b1) to FIG. 68(b2)). Note that when the execution of the freeze effect is set and when the execution of the freeze effect is cancelled, no announcement corresponding to the setting (for example, an announcement informing that the setting has been made) or the cancellation (for example, an announcement informing that the cancellation has been made) is made.

Incidentally, if the freeze effect set in the BB winning game is the third freeze effect, the execution of the freeze effect will not be cancelled even if the reach eye is stopped (cancellation operation). In other words, the third freeze effect has a lower occurrence probability than other freeze effects, and the expectation of a double win with the attack mode is also high. In this way, freeze effects that are expected to be rare and of high interest to players are configured so that the execution of the effect cannot be cancelled.

The present embodiment described above provides the following excellent advantages:

After the execution of a freeze effect is set, if a specific reach pattern stops before the freeze effect is executed, the execution of the set freeze effect is canceled.

In this embodiment, if BB or VB mode is internally won, a freeze effect is executed when the result (victory effect) is announced in the final game of the consecutive effects, making the game more exciting than when the result is simply announced. However, if the player senses the result (BB win, etc.) before the result is announced and has lost interest in the effects, the player may feel annoyed if the freeze effect is executed again in such a situation. In particular, the freeze effect has the characteristic that it restricts the start or progress of normal game operations, preventing the player from playing for a certain period of time, and it is expected that the player will feel annoyed if the freeze effect is executed when the player's interest has shifted to bonus play due to the perception of a BB win, etc. In other words, there is a concern that the freeze effect function installed to enhance the effect of the effects may actually have the opposite effect depending on the situation when the effects are executed.

In this regard, in this embodiment, first, when a BB or the like is won, the freeze effect is set to be performed in a specific game after the winning game, thereby ensuring a time leeway between the occurrence of a trigger for the freeze effect execution and the actual execution. Using this period, the gaming machine determines whether or not the player is likely to recognize the BB win, etc., based on whether or not the reach eyes stop. If it is determined that the player is likely to recognize it, the system is configured to automatically control the execution of the planned freeze effect to be canceled. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the freeze effect from being executed in a situation where the player is aware of the BB win, etc. On the other hand, if the reach eyes do not stop and it is determined that the player is not likely to recognize the BB win, etc., the freeze effect is executed as originally planned, thereby making it possible to appropriately liven up the game. In other words, while ensuring the effect of livening up the game by the freeze effect, the execution of the freeze effect is restricted in a situation where the player is likely to find the effect annoying, making it possible to appropriately prevent the effect from becoming annoying.

In addition, the operation of stopping the reach eyes can be seen as an operation to cancel the freeze effect, so the following effects can be expected. The freeze effect can liven up the game effect and enhance the effect, but as mentioned above, it also has the characteristic of imposing a restriction on the player that prevents the game from progressing for a certain period of time. For this reason, some players may not want to execute the freeze effect. In this regard, according to the present configuration, even if a player who does not want to execute the freeze effect has met the execution condition of the freeze effect, it is possible to avoid its execution by performing a cancel operation (an operation to stop a specific reach eye). In other words, it becomes possible for the player to avoid the execution of the freeze effect at his or her own will. On the other hand, if the reach eyes are not stopped, the freeze effect is executed as originally set, which is also convenient for players who want to execute the freeze effect. In other words, it becomes possible to change whether or not to execute the freeze effect according to the preferences and state of mind of each player, and it becomes possible to realize a gaming machine that is easy to play for any player.

In addition, the configuration in which the freeze effect is cancelled when the reach symbol stops can also achieve the following effect. From the player's perspective, the reach symbol functions as one of the effects that allows the player to know whether or not they have won BB or VB mode, so with this configuration, the freeze effect is cancelled at the same time as the player knows that they have won BB, etc. Therefore, for example, if a player loses interest in the freeze effect after realising that they have won BB, etc., and no longer wishes for the freeze effect to be executed, there is no need to perform a special operation to cancel it again. In other words, the effort required for cancellation is reduced, and it is possible to suppress the hassle associated with the cancellation operation.

Moreover, in this configuration, the reach symbols that trigger the establishment of the release condition are limited to certain reach symbols. This makes it possible to prevent the inconvenience of a player who stops a reach symbol in order to detect a BB win or the like unintentionally canceling the execution of the freeze effect. Note that there are gaming machines in which, when a bonus has been won or is in a carryover state, the pattern combination corresponding to the reach symbol stops relatively easily without the player being particularly aware of it, and in such gaming machines, it is possible to prevent the execution of the freeze effect from being excessively restricted. In other words, this configuration is advantageous in ensuring an opportunity to preferably execute the freeze effect.

Some freeze effects (freeze effects with a low probability of occurring) are excluded from being released. This makes it possible to guarantee the release of freeze effects that are expected to be of great interest to players, even if the player mistakenly fulfills the release conditions, and prevents players from becoming overly disappointed.

<Modification 1>
This modified example differs from the first embodiment in that a predetermined notification is given when an operation to release the freeze effect is performed.

When a player performs an operation to cancel the freeze effect (stopping a specific reach eye), if some kind of notification is given on the slot machine 10, the player will be able to know that the cancellation operation has been accepted, which is convenient. However, on the other hand, for a player who performs the cancellation operation by chance without intending to cancel, such a notification may serve as a notification that the player is no longer able to see a freeze effect that he or she would have been able to see, which may disappoint the player. Therefore, in this modified example, the configuration has been devised to distinguish between players who have performed the cancellation operation intentionally and players who have not, and to give the above notification. The configuration of this modified example will be explained in detail below.

Figure 81 is a flow chart showing the freeze-unfreezing process according to this modified example. This process is executed in place of the freeze-unfreezing process in Figure 78. Note that in this process, explanations of processes similar to the freeze-unfreezing process in Figure 78 will be simplified or omitted as appropriate.

In the freeze release process of this modified example, first, in step S3801, it is determined whether any freeze flags are set. If any freeze flags are set, it is determined in step S3802 whether the game number measurement flag is set. If the game number measurement flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S3803, where it is determined whether the current game is a BB winning game.

If it is a BB winning game, in step S3804, a game number measurement flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106, and in the following step S3805, measurement of the game number FG is started. The game number measurement flag is a flag indicating that measurement of the game number FG is being executed. Furthermore, the game number FG is counted using the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106, and indicates the number of games played since the BB winning game. On the other hand, if a positive judgment is made in step S3802, the process proceeds to step S3806, where the game number FG is updated by adding 1 to the game number FG.

After steps S3805 and S3806 are executed, or if a negative judgment is made in step S3803, the processing of steps S3807 to S3811 is executed. These processes are similar to steps S3502 to S3506 in FIG. 78. After the freeze release command is set in step S3811, a judgment is made in step S3812 as to whether the number of games FG is equal to or less than a predetermined value (e.g., 2).

If the number of games FG is equal to or less than the predetermined value, the process proceeds to step S3813, where a release notification command is set as an output command to the display control device 81. On the other hand, if the number of games FG is not equal to or less than the predetermined value, the process proceeds to step S3814, where a reach symbol stop notification command is set as an output command to the display control device 81. The display control device 81 that has received the release notification command or the reach symbol stop notification command controls the auxiliary display unit 65, etc., so that a notification corresponding to each command is issued. Specific examples of notification modes will be described later.

After step S3813 or step S3814 is executed, the game count measurement flag and game count FG are cleared in step S3815. After step S3815 is executed, or if a negative judgment is made in step S3801, step S3807, or step S3809, this freeze release process is terminated. Also, if a negative judgment is made in step S3808, the processes of steps S3816 to S3818 are executed, and then this freeze release process is terminated. The processes of steps S3816 to S3818 are the same as steps S3507, S3505, and S3506 in FIG. 78.

<About the flow of the game related to notifications>
If the freeze effect is released within a predetermined number of games (e.g., two games) after the end of the bonus winning game, it is presumed that the player intentionally released the freeze effect after sensing or predicting the execution of the freeze effect due to some trigger (e.g., the stop of a reach effect other than a specific reach effect, or the winning of a combination with a bonus such as a strong cherry or strong watermelon). In other words, if the release operation is performed promptly after the bonus is won, and the period until the release operation is performed is short, it is determined that the release operation is intentional. In this case, a release notification command is output from the main control device 101 to the display control device 81, and as shown in FIG. 82(a), for example, a text display such as "Freeze Stock has been released" is controlled to be displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65. This notifies the player that the execution of the freeze effect has been released, and the player can clearly know that the release has been performed.

On the other hand, if the cancel operation is performed after a predetermined number of games (e.g., two games) have been played after the end of the bonus winning game, it is presumed that the player performed the cancel operation unintentionally. In this case, a command for notifying the stop of a reach eye is output from the main control device 101 to the display control device 81, and as shown in FIG. 82(b), control is exercised so that text such as "It's a reach eye" is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65. As a result, it becomes difficult for the player to realize from the notification that the freeze effect has been canceled, and disappointment for players who want to see the freeze effect can be avoided.

The notification given when the cancel operation is performed after the predetermined number of games has been played does not necessarily have to be a notification that notifies the player that a reach eye has stopped, but rather a notification that makes it impossible or difficult for the player to recognize that the freeze effect has been canceled. Also, the configuration may be such that no notification is given when the cancel operation is performed after the predetermined number of games has been played.

In addition, in this modified example, no notification is given that a freeze effect has been set to be executed. Although such notification can inform the player of the timing to perform the release operation, it also serves as advance notice that a freeze effect will be executed, which would diminish the appeal of the freeze effect, which is to surprise the player.

In the above configuration, the number of games is counted, but it may be configured to switch whether or not to execute the cancellation notification depending on the time (period) from when the freeze effect is set to be executed (after the BB is won) until a specific reach symbol stops. In this case, the cancellation notification is executed if the measured time is less than a predetermined time, and is not executed if the measured time exceeds the predetermined time.

<Modification 2>
This modified example is intended to deal with the case where multiple freeze effects are set in overlapping fashion. For example, as shown in FIG. 83(a), in the second RT state, the VB mode is won and the execution of the freeze effect A is set, and then, while staying in the premonition mode corresponding to the above win, the BB is won and the execution of the freeze effect B is additionally set.

In such a case, as shown in FIG. 83(b), a single release operation can be used to release both the execution of freeze effect A triggered by a VB mode win, and the execution of freeze effect B triggered by a BB win. In this case, it is not necessary to release each freeze effect one by one, which can reduce the effort required for the release operation. The release operation in this case can be an operation to release the freeze effect triggered by a VB mode win (winning the 11th replay role), or an operation to release the freeze effect triggered by a BB mode win (stopping of a specific reach eye).

Also, as shown in FIG. 83(c), the execution of freeze effect A triggered by winning VB mode and the execution of freeze effect B triggered by winning BB may be cancelled one by one by separate cancelling operations. In this case, cancelling operation A for cancelling the execution of freeze effect A and cancelling operation B for cancelling the execution of freeze effect B may be the same operation. In this case, both freeze effects can be cancelled by simply repeating the same operation, making the cancelling operation easier.

Also, the release operation A for freeze effect A and the release operation B for freeze effect B may be different operations. In such a configuration, the player can select the freeze effect he or she wants to release and release it. For example, if a player wants to see freeze effect A but skip freeze effect B, he or she can perform only the release operation B for freeze effect B and not the release operation A for freeze effect A. This configuration is considered to be effective for a configuration in which the types of freeze effects differ between when a freeze effect is executed in response to a VB mode win and when a freeze effect is executed in response to a BB win, and which is likely to cause a difference in the player's interest between the two freeze effects.

<Modification 3>
In this modified example, the method of canceling the set freeze effect is different from that of the first embodiment. In the first embodiment, the freeze effect is canceled when a specific reach symbol stops, but in this modified example, the freeze effect is canceled when an effect that determines whether a BB win or a BB win is carried over is executed on the auxiliary display unit 65. Such an effect may be one that notifies a BB win or a premium effect.

In this configuration, for example, if the first BB or second BB is won in the lottery process (FIG. 16), a lottery is held to execute the above-mentioned final effect each time a predetermined trigger occurs after the winning game (for example, each time a game is started by operating the start lever 41). The execution lottery is held up to the game immediately preceding the specific game in which the freeze effect is executed, for example. Then, if a winning lottery is won in the lottery process for the final effect, the execution setting is made so that the final effect is executed at a predetermined timing in the game that won the execution lottery.

At that time, if the lottery for executing the freeze effect executed in the BB winning game (Figure 74) is won and the execution of the freeze effect is set, the execution of the freeze effect is canceled (excluding the third freeze effect). In other words, in this modified example, even if the lottery for executing the freeze effect is won, if the lottery for executing the fixed effect is won, the set freeze effect will not be executed.

Then, a command including information indicating that the confirmation performance should be executed and the timing of execution is set and sent to the display control device 81. Based on the received command, the display control device 81 controls the auxiliary display unit 65 to execute the confirmation performance.

In this manner, in this modified example, an effect (notification) is executed that allows the player to recognize that a BB has been won or that the BB has been carried over, and by viewing this effect, the player can understand that he or she has internally won a BB. Furthermore, in this configuration, the execution of such an effect establishes the release condition, and the execution of the freeze effect is released. Therefore, similar to the first embodiment, the freeze effect is executed while the player is aware that a bonus has been won, making it possible to prevent the player from feeling annoyed.

In the above configuration, the freeze effect is released when the lottery for executing the final effect is won, but the freeze effect may be released by performing a setting process for executing the final effect, or the freeze effect may be released when the final effect is executed. Also, although a BB win was given as an example, the configuration of this example can also be used for a VB mode win.

In addition, in the above configuration, the effect is one that confirms the BB win or its carryover state, but it may be an effect that suggests the BB win or its carryover state. In other words, when an effect that allows the player to predict the BB win or its carryover state is executed, the execution of the freeze effect may be cancelled.

In the above configuration, the confirmation effect is executed by the auxiliary display unit 65, but it may be executed by sound effects from the speaker 64 or light emission by the lamp 63. It may also be executed by using both the reels 32L, 32M, 32R and the auxiliary display unit 65, etc. One such configuration is one in which a specific effect is executed by the auxiliary display unit 65, etc. in response to a predetermined chance eye coming to a halt on each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, and the effect notifies the player of whether or not the BB has been won or is in a carryover state.

<Modification 4>
This modified example differs from the first embodiment in that, when the release condition is met, the set freeze effect is changed to another effect.

In this modified example, after the execution of a freeze effect is set, when a specific reach symbol stops, a change process is executed so that the set freeze effect is not executed, and a short freeze effect with a shorter effect period (execution period) than the freeze effect is executed in the specific game in which the freeze effect was scheduled to be executed is executed. In other words, when the release condition for the set freeze effect is met, the period of the freeze effect executed in the specific game is shortened.

For example, if the configuration were such that the execution of the freeze effect itself was stopped when a specific reach eye was stopped, a player who accidentally stopped a specific reach eye would not be able to see the freeze effect. In this regard, the present configuration is configured to execute another freeze effect (short freeze effect) with a shorter duration than the initially set freeze effect (first freeze effect or second freeze effect). In this case, even for players who do not want a freeze effect, the time they are restricted is shorter than if the initial effect were performed, reducing the inconvenience. In other words, with this configuration, it is possible to create a configuration that takes into consideration players who do not want a freeze effect, while still allowing players who have no intention of canceling the freeze effect to see the freeze effect even if they accidentally stop a specific reach eye.

In addition, instead of the short freeze effect, it may be configured to change to an effect executed on the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like (an image effect that allows the player to understand or predict whether BB has been won or the carryover status). The effect executed on the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like can be ended midway at the player's discretion, for example by betting medals, so the duration of the effect does not necessarily have to be shorter than the freeze effect that is initially set. With this configuration, players who do not want a freeze effect can avoid the execution of the freeze effect as in the first embodiment above, and players who unintentionally stop on a specific reach eye will not be able to see the freeze effect, but will be able to see the confirmation effect instead.

<Modification 5>
In this modified example, the method for canceling the set freeze effect is different from that in the first embodiment.

In the first embodiment, the freeze effect is cancelled across the board when a specific reach symbol is displayed, but in this modified example, the freeze effect is switched on or off depending on the number of games played from when the freeze effect is set to be executed (after the BB is won) until the specific reach symbol is displayed. Specifically, when the freeze effect is set to be executed in the BB winning process (FIG. 74), the number of games played until the specific reach symbol is displayed is counted in the same manner as steps S3802 to S3808 in the modified example 1.

If the number of games counted is less than a predetermined number of games (e.g., 2 games), it is presumed that the player has detected or predicted the execution of a freeze effect due to some trigger (e.g., the stopping of a reach effect other than a specific reach effect, or the winning of a combination with a bonus such as a strong cherry or strong watermelon), and has intentionally performed a release operation, and the execution of the freeze effect is released. On the other hand, if the number of games counted is greater than the predetermined number of games, it is presumed that the player has unintentionally stopped a specific reach effect, and the execution of the freeze effect is not released.

In this way, with this configuration, the timing when a specific reach symbol is stopped (the timing when the release condition is met) is grasped, and based on that result, a decision is made as to whether or not to release the execution of the freeze effect. This makes it possible to determine whether the release condition is met based on the player's will before performing the release, making it possible to prevent releases that are undesirable to the player.

In the above configuration, the number of games is counted, but it may be configured to switch whether or not to cancel the execution of the freeze effect depending on the time (period) from when the execution of the freeze effect is set (after the BB is won) until a specific reach symbol stops. In this case, if the measured time is less than a predetermined time, the execution of the freeze effect is canceled, and if the measured time exceeds the predetermined time, the execution of the freeze effect is not canceled.

Second Embodiment
This embodiment differs from the first embodiment in the operation for canceling the execution of the freeze effect.

In the first embodiment described above, after the execution of the freeze effect is set, the execution of the set freeze effect is cancelled (nullified) by stopping a specific reach symbol. In this case, the execution of the freeze effect can be cancelled not only when a reach symbol is stopped in order to cancel the freeze effect, but also when a reach symbol is stopped in order to detect a BB win. Therefore, this embodiment has been devised in terms of its configuration to prevent cancellation that is undesirable to the player. The configuration of this embodiment will be described in detail below.

Figure 84 (a) is a flowchart showing the reel control process (processing executed by the CPU 102 of the main control device 101) according to this embodiment. Note that the processes of steps S4001 and S4002 in Figure 84 (a) are executed in place of step S414 in the reel control process in Figure 19.

After executing the payout determination process in step S413, the reach eye determination process is performed in step S4001. Here, the reach eye determination process in step S4001 will be explained with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 84(b).

In the reach eye determination process, first in step S4101, it is determined whether any freeze flags are set (whether a freeze effect is set to be executed), and if a positive determination is made, in step S4102, it is determined whether the value of the freeze counter is greater than 0 (whether a freeze effect has not yet been executed). If the value of the freeze counter is greater than 0, in step S4103, it is determined whether a reach eye has stopped.

In step S4103, unlike step S3503 in FIG. 78 (reach eye stop determination process), it is determined whether any of the reach eyes have stopped, regardless of the type of reach eye. Note that in this embodiment, the reach eye will not necessarily stop regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44, and is configured so that there are cases where the reach eye does not stop depending on the operation timing. In other words, although the type of reach eye does not matter, it will only stop if it is operated at a timing when the reach eye would stop.

If a positive judgment is made in step S4103 (if a reach eye has stopped), then in step S4104, it is judged whether the first freeze flag or the second freeze flag has been set. If a reach eye has not stopped, then in step S4105, it is judged whether an eleventh replay (a special replay that functions as a reach eye corresponding to a VB mode win during attack mode) has been won. If a negative judgment is made in steps S4101, S4102, S4104, and S4105, then this reach eye judgment process is terminated.

If a positive judgment is made in step S4104 or step S4105, a reach eye stop flag is set in the various flags storage area 106d of the RAM 106 in step S4106. The reach eye stop flag is a flag indicating that the reach eye has stopped. In the following step S4107, a reach eye stop command is set as an output command to the display control device 81, and then this reach eye judgment process is terminated. The reach eye stop command is a command for notifying that the reach eye has stopped, and by receiving the reach eye stop command, the display control device 81 can know that the reach eye has stopped.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 84(a), after executing the reach symbol determination process in step S4001, the freeze release process is executed in step S4002, and then the winning result response process is executed in step S414 (FIG. 78). The freeze release process will be explained in detail later.

Next, the timer interrupt process (processing executed by the CPU 102 of the main control device 101) according to this embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 85(a). Note that the process of step S4201 in FIG. 85(a) is executed between the process of step S108 and the process of step S109 in the timer interrupt process in FIG. 14.

After executing step S108 (timer subtraction process), in step S4201, a settlement switch response process is executed to determine whether the settlement switch 59 has been operated. After executing this process, the process of step S109 (a process of outputting the count results of the number of bets, etc. to the external centralized terminal board 121) is executed.

Here, the settlement switch response process in step S4201 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 85(b). In this process, first, in step S4301, it is determined whether or not the settlement switch 59 has been operated based on the detection signal of the settlement detection sensor 59a (FIG. 12). If it is determined that the settlement switch 59 has been operated, in step S4302, it is determined whether or not the game is being played. If at least one of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is spinning (if it is during the period after the start operation with the start lever 41 is performed and before the final stop operation is performed), it is determined that the game is being played, and in this case, in step S4303, it is determined whether or not the reach eye stop flag is set in the various flags storage area 106d of the RAM 106.

The reach eye stop flag is set when the reach eye stops after the freeze effect is set to be executed and before the freeze effect is executed, so a positive judgment in step S4303 means that the settlement switch 59 was operated after the reach eye stopped. In this case, the process proceeds to step S4304, and a release operation flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106. This release operation flag indicates that an operation has been performed to release (disable) the execution of the freeze effect. In other words, this embodiment is configured so that the execution of the freeze effect is released (disabled) by operating the settlement switch 59 after the reach eye has stopped. After execution of step S4304, or if a negative judgment is made in steps S4301 and S4303, the settlement switch response process is terminated.

On the other hand, if a negative judgment is made in step S4305 (if the game is not being executed), this means that the settlement switch 59 was operated when the game was not being executed. In this case, in step S4305, a medal return flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d, and then this settlement switch response process is terminated. The medal return flag indicates that the medal return process should be executed. If the flag is set, the sensor monitoring process in step S107 (FIG. 12) judges that a settlement operation has been performed (the settlement switch 59 has been operated for the purpose of settlement), and executes the medal return process to pay out the same number of medals as the credited virtual medals. The medal return flag is cleared when the medal return process is terminated.

The medal return process is executed when the settlement switch 59 is operated in a state where none of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are spinning (a state where the game has not been started by operating the start lever 41), regardless of whether medals have been bet or not. At that time, if medals have been bet, medals in a number corresponding to both the bet amount and the credit amount are paid out. Also, when a replay is established, if the settlement switch 59 is operated before the start of the next game, the medal return process is executed. At that time, the bet amount based on the establishment of the replay is not paid out, and only the number of medals corresponding to the credit amount are paid out.

Next, the freeze release process in step S4002 (FIG. 84(a)) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 86.

In the freeze release process, first, steps S4401 and S4402 are executed. These processes are similar to steps S4101 and S4102. If a positive determination is made in step S4402, the process proceeds to step S4403, where it is determined whether or not the release operation flag is set. If the release operation flag is set, the set reach eye stop flag and release operation flag are cleared in step S4404, and then the set freeze flag and freeze counter FC are cleared in step S4405. If the freeze flag is cleared in this way, a negative determination is made in step S3401 in the rotation effect process (Figure 76), and the freeze effect is no longer executed. In other words, the execution of the set freeze effect is released.

In the next step S4406, a freeze release command is set as an output target to the display control device 81. Note that in this embodiment, as in the first embodiment, no notification corresponding to the release of the freeze effect is issued. Even if the execution of a freeze effect is set, no notification corresponding to that setting is issued. After step S4406 is executed, or if a negative judgment is made in steps S4401 and S4403, this freeze release process is terminated.

On the other hand, if a positive judgment is made in step S4402 (if the value of the freeze counter FC is 0), that is, if the game is one in which a freeze effect is to be executed, the process proceeds to step S4407, where it is judged whether or not the reach-eye stop flag is set. A positive judgment is made in this step when, after the execution of the freeze effect is set, the reach-eye stops before the freeze effect is executed, and then the value of the freeze counter FC becomes 0 (a specific game is reached) without the settlement switch 59 being operated. If a positive judgment is made in step S4407, the reach-eye stop flag is cleared in step S4408. In other words, the freeze flag and freeze counter FC are not cleared, and only the reach-eye stop flag is cleared. After execution of step S4408 or if a negative judgment is made in step S4407, the freeze release process is terminated.

<Game flow regarding freeze effects>
Next, the flow of the game regarding the freeze effect will be described with reference to Fig. 87. Here, the case where the execution of the freeze effect is set with the BB win will be described as an example. Note that the description of the same parts as those in the first embodiment will be simplified or omitted as appropriate.

As shown in FIG. 87(a), when a BB is won in a certain game, a freeze effect is set to be executed with a certain probability. In this case, the setting is not to execute the freeze effect in the game in which the BB is won, but to execute the freeze effect in a specific game a certain number of games after the game in question.

As shown in FIG. 87(b), if the player stops a reach symbol in a game prior to the specific game, and then operates the settlement switch 59 before the end of the game immediately prior to the specific game, as shown in FIG. 87(c), the execution of the freeze effect in the specific game is cancelled.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 87(d), if the settlement switch 59 is not operated until the end of the immediately preceding game, the freeze effect is not released and the freeze effect is executed in the specific game. In this case, the freeze effect is executed in accordance with the final game of the consecutive effects (FIG. 68), as described in the first embodiment above. Note that if the settlement switch 59 is operated without a prior reach-eye stop, or if the settlement switch 59 is operated during a period when a game is not being executed (the period during which the settlement process is executed) even if there is a prior reach-eye stop, the freeze effect is not released and the freeze effect is executed in the specific game.

The present embodiment described above provides the following excellent effects:

After the freeze effect has been set, if the reach symbol stops and the settlement switch 59 is operated, the freeze effect that has been set is cancelled. In this case, the freeze effect will not be cancelled simply by stopping the reach symbol, so it is possible to prevent the player from cancelling the freeze effect as a result of performing a stop operation to detect a BB win.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, the player can select again whether or not to execute the freeze effect after sensing that a BB has been won due to the stopping of a reach eye. Therefore, for example, a player who has become less interested in the freeze effect after sensing that a BB has been won and no longer wishes for the freeze effect to be executed can avoid the execution of the freeze effect by pressing the settlement switch 59. On the other hand, a player who is highly interested in the freeze effect and still wants to see it even after sensing that a BB has been won can execute the freeze effect by not pressing the settlement switch 59.

In addition, in this embodiment, the stopping of reach eyes and the freeze effect are not optional, and both can be executed. This makes it possible to flexibly respond to the desires of players who want to see both.

The freeze effect is cancelled by operating the settlement switch 59 while the game is running, and the freeze effect is not cancelled even if the settlement switch 59 is operated when the game is not running.

For example, if the settlement switch 59 is operated during the valid period for medal return to release the freeze effect, the medal return process is executed. In this case, the player cannot bet medals until the medal return (payout) is completed, and the game is interrupted unnecessarily for the player. In this case, not only is it unpleasant for the player, but it may also be disadvantageous because the number of games played per unit time is reduced. In this regard, the present configuration can prevent such inconvenience from occurring. In other words, by limiting the period for the operation to release the freeze effect to when the game is being played (the period when the medal return process is not being performed), it is expected that the recognition that "in order to release the execution of the freeze effect, it is necessary to operate the settlement switch during the game is being played" will spread among players. This is expected to reduce the number of operations of the settlement switch 59 for the purpose of releasing the freeze during the valid period for medal return, and ultimately makes it possible to prevent the occurrence of medal return processes that are undesirable to the player.

Furthermore, with this configuration, the period for the freeze effect release operation and the valid period for the medal return are separated, so it is possible to avoid overlapping execution of the freeze effect release process and the medal return process. This makes it possible to prevent an increase in the processing load on the main control device 101.

<Modification 1>
This modified example differs from the second embodiment in that a method for releasing the freeze effect is notified.

Figure 88 is a flowchart showing the effect setting process (processing executed by the CPU 181 of the display control device 81) according to this embodiment. Note that the processes of steps S4601 to S4607 in Figure 88 are performed when a negative judgment is made in step S2009 in the effect setting process of Figure 51 or after execution of step S2010.

If a negative judgment is made in step S2009 (if the command received from the main control device 101 does not include a command when all stops) or after the process of step S2010 (processing for setting the effect when all stops) is executed, in step S4601, it is judged whether or not the command received from the main control device 101 includes a reach eye stop command (step S4107 in FIG. 84). If a reach eye stop command is included, it means that the reach eye stopped before the freeze effect is executed after the execution of the freeze effect was set. In this case, the process proceeds to step S4602, and it is judged whether or not the next game is a specific game in which a freeze effect is scheduled to be executed, in other words, whether or not the current game is the game immediately before the specific game. This judgment is made, for example, by counting the number of remaining games until the specific game, which is grasped based on the precursor command or freeze stock command transmitted from the main control device 101, each time the game is executed by the display control device 81, and referring to the count result.

If the current game is not the game immediately preceding the specific game, the process proceeds to step S4603, and the first notification is set to be executed in the next game. The first notification is a cancellation operation notification that informs the player that the freeze effect can be cancelled and how to cancel it, and is executed, for example, as shown in FIG. 89(a), by displaying text such as "Press the settlement switch to cancel the freeze stock" on the auxiliary display unit 65. This makes it possible to easily cancel the freeze effect even if the player does not know that the freeze effect can be cancelled or how to cancel it. In step S4603, the first notification is set to be executed for a predetermined period of time (e.g., one game) from the next game.

After step S4603 is executed, if a negative judgment is made in step S4601 or a positive judgment is made in step S4602, the process proceeds to step S4604. Note that the reason why the first notification is not executed when a positive judgment is made in step S4602 (when the next game is a specific game) is because the operation of the settlement switch 59 when the game is not being executed is not treated as a release operation (see steps S4302 and S4305 in FIG. 85(b)). In other words, since the reach eye stop command is a command sent at the end of a game in which a reach eye has stopped, a positive judgment is made in step S4602 when a reach eye has stopped in the previous game and this is notified at the end (after the end) of the previous game by the reach eye stop command. In this case, the player can only perform the release operation during the game pause period before the specific game starts, but as mentioned above, an operation when the game is not being played does not constitute a release operation, so even if the first notification is given in such a situation and the player is prompted to operate the settlement switch 59, the freeze effect will not be released even if the player performs the release operation in accordance with the notification. Therefore, by configuring the system not to issue the first notification if a reach eye has stopped in the previous game, the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience can be suppressed.

In step S4604, it is determined whether or not the command received from the main control device 101 includes an unfreeze command (step S4406 in FIG. 86). If an unfreeze command is included, this means that an operation to unfreeze the freeze effect has been performed, and in this case, in step S4605 it is determined whether or not the first notification is being executed. If the first notification is being executed, in step S4606, an end setting is made to end the execution of the first notification.

After step S4606 is executed or if a negative judgment is made in step S4605 (if a release operation is performed after the execution period of the first notification has ended), the second notification is set to be executed in step S4607. The second notification is a notification that the freeze effect has been released (that the release operation has been accepted), and when the execution of this notification is set, for example, as shown in FIG. 89(b), text such as "Freeze stock has been released" is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65, etc. This allows the player to clearly know that the execution of the freeze effect has been released. Note that, unlike the first notification, the second notification is set to be executed in the game in which the release operation has been performed, or more specifically, to be executed immediately after the release operation is performed.

After executing step S4607, the process proceeds to step S2011, where other processing is executed. In step S2011, the process sets effects based on commands from the main control device 101 other than when a bet is made, when the game is started, or when the game is stopped (for example, effects based on the operation of the settlement switch 59), effects based on signals from sensors connected without going through the main control device 101 (such as an effect switch detection sensor), settings for error notification, etc.

In this way, this modified example is configured to instruct the player on how to cancel the freeze effect, which can prevent the player from being unable to cancel the freeze effect because they do not know how to do it, or from accidentally performing a different operation. Furthermore, by providing the above instruction when a reach symbol stops, it is possible to configure the system to teach the cancellation method during the period in which the cancellation operation is possible. In other words, it is possible to inform the player of the cancellation method at the timing when the player wants to know, which is convenient for the player.

In the above configuration, the first notification (notification for the release operation) is executed in the game following the game in which the reach symbol stops, but it may be executed in a game that follows. In short, it only needs to be executed during the period in which the operation to release the freeze effect is possible, i.e., before the execution timing of the freeze effect.

<Modification 2>
In this modification, the manner in which the method of canceling the freeze effect is notified is different from that of the above modification 1. In the above modification 1, the execution of the first notification can teach the player the canceling method, but on the other hand, it also functions as a prior notice that the freeze effect will be executed, and there is a concern that this will diminish the appeal of the freeze effect, which is to surprise the player.

Therefore, in this modified example, the first notification is configured to be issued not only when a reach eye has stopped, but also in a situation where the execution of a freeze effect is not set. Specifically, in a situation where the execution of a freeze effect is not set, a lottery is held to determine whether or not to execute the first notification, and if the result of the lottery is a winning result, the first notification is executed.

With this configuration, the first notification is executed even during normal play, so the execution of the first notification does not univocally determine whether or not a freeze effect will be executed. As a result, even if the first notification is executed when a reach eye stops (when execution of a freeze effect is set), the notification can be prevented from becoming a prior notice of the execution of a freeze effect. In other words, with this modified example, it is possible to properly inform the player of how to cancel the freeze effect while preventing a decrease in the performance effect of the freeze effect.

The manner in which the first notification is given in this modified example is not particularly limited, and may be the same as in modified example 1 above. However, the first notification will be given more frequently overall than in modified example 1, which may make the player feel annoyed. In light of this, it is preferable to make the notification less noticeable, such as by reducing the display size (for example, by displaying a caption that shows how to deactivate the notification). This makes it possible to prevent the first notification from being an annoyance, or to reduce the annoyance.

It is also preferable that the first notification when the freeze effect is set to be executed and the first notification when the freeze effect is not set to be executed have the same notification mode so that the player cannot distinguish between the two. This configuration makes it possible to avoid players being able to detect the execution of a freeze effect from the difference in notification mode, and further reduces the inconvenience of the first notification when the freeze effect is set to be executed functioning as a prior notice of the freeze effect.

It is also possible to configure the system so that the first notification is not executed when execution of a freeze effect is set, and is executed only when execution of a freeze effect is not set. In this way, the first notification is not linked to the execution of a freeze effect. In other words, this configuration also makes it possible to prevent the first notification from becoming a prior notice of the execution of a freeze effect.

<Modification 3>
In this modification, the manner in which the first notification is executed is different from that in the second embodiment and the modifications thereof.

For example, if the settlement switch 59 is operated to cancel the freeze effect during the valid period for medal return, the medal return process is executed. In this case, medals cannot be bet until the medal return (payout) is complete, and the player's gameplay is unnecessarily interrupted. This not only upsets the player, but also may be detrimental as the number of games played per unit time is reduced.

Therefore, in this modified example, the first notification (text display such as "Press the settlement switch to release the freeze stock") is not executed, at least during the period in which the medal return process is executed when the settlement switch 59 is operated. For example, if the specified period in which the first notification is executed is the period of one game prior to the specific game in which the freeze effect is executed, the first notification is not executed during the waiting period immediately before the start of that game (game pause period) and during the waiting period from the end of that game until the start of the next game.

By configuring in this way, during the period when the medal return process is executed when the settlement switch 59 is operated, it is possible to prevent the settlement switch 59 from being operated with the aim of canceling the freeze effect. It is also possible that the player may reflexively operate the settlement switch 59 in response to the first notification, but even if such an operation is performed, it is possible to prevent the medal return process based on that operation from being executed. In other words, with this configuration, the occurrence of medal return process that is undesirable to the player due to the first notification is prevented, and it is possible to preferably prevent the occurrence of inconveniences such as upsetting the player or reducing the time efficiency of play.

If the predetermined period during which the first notification is executed is set to two or more games, the first notification may be temporarily switched off during the waiting period between the game in which the execution of the first notification is started and the next game, and then the first notification may be resumed after the start of the next game.

In addition, in the above-mentioned variant 2, the first notification is executed even when the execution of the freeze effect is not set, but even in this case, it is preferable to configure the first notification not to be executed during the period when the medal return process is executed when the settlement switch 59 is operated (the waiting period between games). This is because it is possible to prevent the player from being tempted by the first notification to operate the settlement switch 59, which would result in the execution of unnecessary medal return process.

<Modification 4>
In this modified example, the period during which the freeze effect can be cancelled by operating the settlement switch 59 is different from that in the second embodiment.

In the second embodiment described above, even if the settlement switch 59 is pressed when the game is not being played, the execution of the set freeze effect is not cancelled. In this modified example, however, regardless of whether the game is being played or not, if the settlement switch 59 is operated when the execution of the freeze effect is set, the execution of the freeze effect is always cancelled. In this case, while it is possible to avoid limiting the period during which the freeze effect can be cancelled, when the settlement switch 59 is operated when the game is not being played, not only is the freeze effect cancelled, but the medal return process is also executed. In this case, it is not possible to bet medals until the return (payout) of medals is completed, which means that the start of the next game is significantly delayed for the player.

Therefore, in this modified example, similar to the above modified example 3, the first notification (text display such as "Press the settlement switch to release the freeze stock") is not executed at least during the period in which the medal return process is executed when the settlement switch 59 is operated. For example, if the specified period in which the first notification is executed is the period of one game prior to the specific game in which the freeze effect is executed, the first notification is not executed during the waiting period immediately before the start of that game (game pause period) and the waiting period from the end of that game to the start of the next game.

In other words, in this configuration, the freeze effect can always be released by operating the settlement switch 59, but the first notification that prompts the user to operate the settlement switch 59 is only executed during a period in which the medal return process is not being executed. This makes it possible to prevent the settlement switch 59 from being operated with the aim of releasing the freeze effect during a period in which the medal return process is being executed when the settlement switch 59 is operated.

Third Embodiment
This embodiment differs from the above-described embodiments in that it is possible to execute the freeze effect even when an operation to release the freeze effect is performed.

In the first embodiment, after the execution of the freeze effect is set, the execution of the set freeze effect is cancelled (invalidated) by the stopping of a specific reach eye. In this case, the winning of BB or VB mode can be grasped based on the stopping of the reach eye, and the execution of the freeze effect is cancelled at the same time, so that for a player who does not want the freeze effect to be executed, a separate operation to cancel the freeze effect is not required, which is convenient. However, even if a player who does not want to cancel the freeze effect accidentally stops a specific reach eye (if the cancellation operation is performed unintentionally), the execution of the freeze effect is immediately cancelled. In other words, an event may occur in which the execution of the freeze effect is cancelled even though the player has no intention of cancelling it. Therefore, the configuration of this embodiment is devised to suppress the cancellation of the freeze effect that is undesirable for the player without impairing the convenience for the player who does not want the freeze effect to be executed. The configuration of this embodiment will be described in detail below.

Figure 90 (a) is a flowchart showing the reel control process (processing executed by the CPU 102 of the main control device 101) according to this embodiment. Note that the processes of steps S5001 and S5002 in Figure 90 (a) are executed in place of the freeze release process of step S414 in the reel control process in Figure 19.

After executing the payout determination process in step S413, the freeze release process is performed in step S5001. Here, the freeze release process in step S5001 is explained with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 90(b).

In the freeze release process, steps S5101 to S5105 are executed first. These steps are the same as steps S3501 to S3504 and S3507 in the freeze release process of FIG. 78. To briefly explain the steps S5101 to S5105, in step S5101, it is determined whether any freeze flags are set (whether a freeze effect is set to be executed), and if a positive determination is made, it is determined in step S5102 whether the freeze counter value is greater than 0 (whether a freeze effect has not yet been executed). If the freeze counter value is greater than 0, it is determined in step S5103 whether a reach eye has stopped. In this case, as in the first embodiment, it is determined whether a specific reach eye (reach eye A or reach eye B) has stopped. If a positive judgment is made in step S5103 (if a specific reach symbol is stopped), then in step S5104, it is judged whether the first freeze flag or the second freeze flag is set. If a specific reach symbol is not stopped, then in step S5105, it is judged whether an eleventh replay (a special replay that functions as a reach symbol corresponding to a VB mode win during attack mode) has been won. If a negative judgment is made in steps S5101, S5102, S5104, and S5105, then this freeze release process is terminated.

If a positive judgment is made in step S5104 or step S5105, a freeze release flag is set in the various flags storage area 106d of the RAM 106 in step S5106. The freeze release flag is a flag indicating that an operation to release the freeze effect has been performed. In other words, in this embodiment, as in the first embodiment, stopping a specific reach eye is the operation to release the freeze effect.

In the next step S5107, the release operation command is set as an output command to the display control device 81, and then this freeze release process is terminated. The release operation command is a command for notifying that an operation to release the freeze effect has been performed, and by receiving the release operation command, the display control device 81 can understand that an operation to release the freeze effect has been performed.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 90(a), after executing the freeze release process in step S5001, the freeze return process is executed in step S5002, and then the winning result response process is executed in step S414 (FIG. 78). The freeze release process will be explained in detail later.

Next, the timer interrupt process (processing executed by the CPU 102 of the main control device 101) according to this embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 91(a). Note that the process of step S5201 in FIG. 91(a) is executed between the process of step S108 and the process of step S109 in the timer interrupt process in FIG. 14.

After executing step S108 (timer subtraction process), in step S5201, a settlement switch response process is executed to determine whether the settlement switch 59 has been operated. After executing this process, the process of step S109 (a process of outputting the count results of the number of bets, etc. to the external centralized terminal board 121) is executed.

The settlement switch response process in step S5201 will now be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 91(b). In this process, first in step S5301, it is determined whether or not the settlement switch 59 has been operated based on the detection signal of the settlement detection sensor 59a (FIG. 12). If it is determined that the settlement switch 59 has been operated, it is determined in step S5302 whether or not a game is being played. If it is determined that a game is being played, it is determined in step S5303 whether or not a freeze release flag has been set in the various flags storage area 106d of RAM 106.

The freeze release flag is set when a freeze effect is set to be executed and then the release operation is performed before the freeze effect is executed, so a positive judgment in step S5303 means that a specific reach symbol has stopped after the freeze effect was set to be executed. In this case, the process proceeds to step S5304, and a return operation flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d of RAM 106. This return operation flag indicates that an operation has been performed to return the execution of the released freeze effect, in other words, an operation to cancel the release operation. After step S5304 is executed, or if a negative judgment is made in steps S5301 and S5303, the settlement switch response process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the result of step S5302 is negative, this means that the settlement switch 59 was operated when the game was not being played. In this case, in step S5305, a medal return flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d, and then the settlement switch response process is terminated. The medal return flag indicates that the medal return process should be executed. If the flag is set, the sensor monitoring process in step S107 (FIG. 12) determines that a settlement operation has been performed (the settlement switch 59 has been operated for the purpose of settlement), and executes the medal return process to pay out the same number of medals as the credited virtual medals. The medal return flag is cleared when the medal return process is terminated.

Next, the freeze recovery process in step S5002 (Figure 90(a)) will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 92(a).

In the freeze return process, first, in step S5401, it is determined whether or not the freeze release flag (step S5106 in FIG. 90B) is set. If the freeze release flag is set, the process proceeds to step S5402, where it is determined whether or not the return operation flag (step S5304 in FIG. 91B) is set. If the return operation flag is set, in step S5403, the set release operation flag and return operation flag are cleared. In the following step S5404, a return operation command is set as an output command to the display control device 81, and then this freeze return process is terminated. The return operation command is a command for notifying that a return operation for the released freeze effect, in other words, a cancel operation for canceling the freeze effect, has been performed, and the display control device 81 can know that the freeze effect is being executed by receiving the return operation command. After execution of step S5404 or if a negative determination is made in step S5401, this freeze return process is terminated.

On the other hand, if a negative judgment is made in step S5402 (the unfreeze operation flag is set and the restore operation flag is not set), the process proceeds to step S5405, where it is judged whether the value of the freeze counter FC is 1. Since the freeze counter FC corresponds to the number of games remaining until the specific game (the game in which the freeze effect is executed), this step is essentially a judgment as to whether the current game is the game immediately before the specific game.

If a positive judgment is made in step S5405, the set freeze flag and freeze counter FC are cleared in step S5406. If the freeze flag is cleared in this manner, a negative judgment is made in step S3401 in the rotation effect processing (Figure 76), and the freeze effect is no longer executed. In other words, the execution of the set freeze effect is canceled.

In the following step S5407, a freeze release command is set as an output target to the display control device 81. The freeze release command indicates that the execution of the freeze effect has been released, and by receiving the freeze release command, the display control device 81 can determine that the execution of the freeze effect has been released. After execution of step S5407 or if a negative judgment is made in step S5405, this freeze return process is terminated.

As described above, in this embodiment, if a restore operation is not performed by the immediately preceding game after an operation to release the freeze effect is performed, the execution of the freeze effect is released in the immediately preceding game (see FIG. 92(b)). In other words, the execution of the freeze effect is not released immediately when the release operation is performed, but is released after waiting for the period during which a restore operation is possible to elapse. On the other hand, if a restore operation is performed by the immediately preceding game after an operation to release the freeze effect is performed, the freeze effect is executed in the specific game as originally set without releasing the freeze effect (see FIG. 92(c)). In other words, no special processing is performed to restore the freeze effect, and the freeze effect is simply controlled to be executed as originally set.

In the above configuration, the period during which the return operation is possible is up to the immediately preceding game, but this is not limited to this and can be any period, such as up to two games before the specific game, or until a predetermined time has passed since the release operation is performed. Incidentally, in a configuration in which the freeze effect is performed in the middle of a specific game, the valid period for the return operation may be up to just before the execution timing of the freeze effect in the specific game.

Next, the effect setting process according to this embodiment (processing executed by the CPU 181 of the display control device 81) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 93. Note that the processes in steps S5501 to S5506 in FIG. 93 are performed when a negative judgment is made in step S2009 in the effect setting process in FIG. 51 or after step S2010 is executed.

If a negative judgment is made in step S2009 (if the command received from the main control device 101 does not include a command for when all controls are stopped) or after the processing of step S2010 (processing for setting the performance when all controls are stopped) is executed, in step S5501, it is judged whether or not the command received from the main control device 101 includes a release operation command (step S5107 in FIG. 90).

If a release operation command is included, this means that the release operation was performed after the freeze effect was set to be executed but before the freeze effect was executed. In this case, the process proceeds to step S5502, and a release notification is set to be executed. The release notification is a notification to inform the player that the freeze effect has been released and to instruct the player how to cancel it (how to nullify the release). When the execution of this notification is set, for example, text such as "The freeze stock has been released. If you wish to cancel the freeze release, press the settlement switch" is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65, etc. This allows the player to know that the freeze effect has been released, regardless of whether the release operation was intentional or not, and further allows the player to know how to cancel it.

In step S5502, the release notification is set to be executed for a predetermined period (e.g., one game). As in variant example 3 of the second embodiment, the release notification (notification prompting the operation of the settlement switch 59) should be configured not to be executed at least during the period in which the medal return process is executed when the settlement switch 59 is operated.

After execution of step S5502 or if a negative judgment is made in step S5501, the process proceeds to step S5503, where it is determined whether or not the command received from the main control device 101 includes a recovery operation command (step S5404 in FIG. 92). If a recovery operation command is included, it is determined in step S5504 whether or not a release notification is being executed. If a release notification is being executed, an end setting is made to end the execution of the release notification in step S5505.

After step S5505 is executed or if a negative judgment is made in step S5506, a recovery notification is set to be executed in step S5506. The recovery notification notifies that the release of the freeze effect has been canceled, and when the execution of the notification is set, for example, text such as "Freeze release has been canceled" is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65, etc. After step S5506 is executed, the process proceeds to step S2011, and other processing is executed. In step S2011, settings are made for effects based on commands from the main control device 101 other than when betting, starting, or stopping (for example, effects based on operation of the settlement switch 59, etc.), effects based on signals from sensors (effect switch detection sensor, etc.) connected without going through the main control device 101, settings for error notifications, etc.

<Game flow regarding freeze effects>
Next, the flow of the game regarding the freeze effect will be described with reference to Fig. 94. Here, the case where the execution of the freeze effect is set with the BB win will be described as an example. Note that the description of the same parts as those in the above embodiments will be simplified or omitted as appropriate.

As shown in FIG. 94(a), when a BB is won in a certain game, a freeze effect is set to be executed with a predetermined probability. In this case, the setting is not to execute the freeze effect in the game in which the BB is won, but to execute the freeze effect in a specific game a predetermined number of games after the game in question. Note that in this embodiment, a notification corresponding to the setting to execute the freeze effect is not executed, as in the first embodiment described above.

As shown in FIG. 94(b), if the freeze effect is cancelled in a game prior to the specific game (if the player stops a specific reach symbol), a cancellation notification is issued, and the player is informed that the freeze effect has been cancelled and is instructed on how to cancel it. Then, as shown in FIG. 94(c), if the player operates the settlement switch 59 before the end of the game immediately preceding the specific game, the execution of the freeze effect is not cancelled, and the freeze effect is executed in the specific game. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 94(d), if the player does not operate the settlement switch 59 before the end of the immediately preceding game, the execution of the freeze effect is cancelled, and the freeze effect is not executed in the specific game.

The present embodiment described above provides the following excellent effects:

After the execution of a freeze effect is set, if a specific reach symbol stops, and then the settlement switch 59 is operated by the timing to execute the freeze effect, the set freeze effect is executed, and if the settlement switch 59 is not operated by the timing to execute the freeze effect after the specific reach symbol stops, the set freeze effect is not executed.

According to the above configuration, a player who does not want a freeze effect to be executed can cancel the execution of the freeze effect by stopping a specific reach symbol. In other words, the effort required for cancellation can be reduced, which is convenient for players who want to avoid the freeze effect. On the other hand, a player who accidentally stops a specific reach symbol, regardless of whether they want a freeze effect to be executed, can execute the freeze effect by operating the settlement switch 59. In other words, it becomes possible to cancel the cancellation of the freeze effect. In this way, according to this configuration, it is possible to rescue players who have unintentionally performed the cancellation operation, without compromising the convenience for players who do not want a freeze effect to be executed.

When a specific reach symbol stops (when a release operation is performed), if the settlement switch 59 is not operated within the period during which the return operation is possible, the execution of the set freeze effect is released, and if the settlement switch 59 is operated within the period during which the return operation is possible, the execution of the freeze effect is not released.

For example, if a configuration is such that when a release operation is performed, a release process for the freeze effect is executed, and then when a return operation is performed, an invalidation process for the release process is executed, then both the release process and the invalidation process must be executed. In this regard, with this configuration, when a return operation is performed after a release operation, neither the release process nor the invalidation process is executed, and it is sufficient to simply maintain the initial execution settings as is. This makes it possible to significantly reduce the processing load required for the control process. Also, although a release process is necessary when a return operation is not performed after a release operation, the invalidation process itself is not executed, so the configuration for this can be omitted. This also makes it possible to simplify the configuration.

Furthermore, in a configuration in which the freeze effect is first cancelled and then invalidated by performing a restore operation, the problem arises of how to ensure consistency with the settings made when the BB was won (such as the timing of the freeze effect execution) when the cancelling is invalidated (when the freeze effect is restored), and a solution to this is required. In this regard, with this configuration, when a restore operation is performed after a cancelling operation, it is only necessary to execute the freeze effect according to the settings made when the BB was won, so the above problem does not arise and a simple configuration can be achieved.

Fourth Embodiment
In this embodiment, the execution conditions and the execution manner of the freeze effect are different from those of the above-mentioned embodiments. First, the freeze effect according to this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.

In this embodiment, the fifth and sixth freeze effects are set as freeze effects, and each of these freeze effects is set as a rotation effect that is performed when each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R starts to rotate. When each freeze effect is executed, when the start lever 41 is operated to start the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped, they first rotate a predetermined angle in the opposite direction to the normal rotation direction (forward, downward, circling direction). In this embodiment, the predetermined angle is set as an angle at which one symbol is shifted by one frame, more specifically, an angle (about 15 degrees) that is smaller than the angle at which a symbol arranged in the lower row is shifted to be arranged in the middle row (360 degrees ÷ 21 symbols ≒ 17 degrees). Then, after rotating in the opposite direction by the predetermined angle, the state of being temporarily stopped at that position is maintained for a predetermined period (about 1 sec). As mentioned above, the specified angle is set smaller than the angle at which one symbol is shifted by one frame, so in the paused state, each symbol is positioned at a position shifted from the pay line. By doing this, even if the player misses the reverse rotation, it is easier for them to recognize the shifted state.

Note that multiple types of angles may be provided as the specified angle, and the angle that is likely to be selected may vary depending on the presentation. Also, multiple types of periods during which the specified angle is maintained may be provided, and the period that is likely to be selected may vary depending on the presentation. Furthermore, these angles and periods may be combined and applied to the presentation, or a configuration may be adopted in which the presentation is temporarily stopped at multiple types of angles in stages.

In the fifth freeze effect, the reels rotate in reverse for the above-mentioned specified angle and then pause, and after a specified period of time has elapsed, they rotate in reverse again and then pause with the "red 7" symbols aligned on a specified line. They then rotate forward and transition to normal rotation control, and the stop operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 becomes effective. In other words, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are controlled to stop based on the stop operation, and the symbol corresponding to the game result of the current game stops on the active line.

On the other hand, in the sixth freeze effect, the reels rotate in the reverse direction for the above-mentioned specified angle, pause, and then after a specified period of time has elapsed, they rotate forward and transition to normal rotation control. After that, based on the stopping operation of the stop switches 42 to 44, the symbol corresponding to the game result of the current game stops on the winning line.

The fifth and sixth freeze effects have different execution conditions (occurrence triggers). The execution conditions for each freeze effect will be explained in detail later.

Next, the control process of the main control device 101 in this embodiment will be described. Figure 96 (a) is a flowchart showing the BB winning process, and (b) is a flowchart showing the first specific role process. Note that these figures only show the parts that are different from the BB winning process in Figure 74 and the first specific role process in Figure 33.

If a positive judgment is made in step S3206 (determination process of whether the premonition game count is greater than 0) in the BB winning process, a fifth freeze flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106 in step S6101. The fifth freeze flag corresponds to the fifth freeze effect in FIG. 95, and setting this flag sets the execution of the fifth freeze effect.

In other words, the fifth freeze effect occurs when triggered by the winning of the BB role, similar to the various freeze effects in each of the above embodiments, and is executed when the BB role is won and the execution of the freeze effect is selected in the freeze lottery process of step S3207 (Fig. 74). Note that the fifth freeze effect may be executed not only when the BB role is won, but also when the fifth freeze flag is set in step S3304 (Fig. 76) and the fifth freeze effect is executed when the VB role is won.

After step S6101 is executed, the process proceeds to step S3211 (FIG. 74), where a freeze counter FC is set in the various counter area 106e of the RAM 106. The freeze counter FC determines the number of games that will be played between the BB win and the execution of the freeze effect, in other words, how many games after the BB win the freeze effect will be executed.

Next, the first specific role processing will be explained with reference to FIG. 96(b).

After executing the BB winning process in step S814 in the first specific role process, the sixth freeze effect process is executed in step S6201. As shown in FIG. 97, in the sixth freeze effect process, first, in step S6301, it is determined whether or not a premonition game is in progress. If the number of premonition games has already been set in steps S810 to S813 or steps S820 to S823 in FIG. 33, and the number is in the elapsed period, a positive determination is made in the above step S6301, and the sixth freeze effect process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the result of step S6301 is negative and the game is not a premonition game, the process proceeds to step S6302, where it is determined whether or not a rare combination such as strong cherry, weak cherry, strong watermelon, weak watermelon, Chance A, or Chance B has been won (a single combination that may result in a BB overlap from the player's perspective). This determination is made based on the winning flag that is set in the winning flag storage area 106a of the RAM 106 in step S308 (Figure 16).

If it is determined in step S6302 that a rare role has been won, then in step S6303, a lottery process for the pseudo premonition mode is executed. The pseudo premonition mode makes it appear to the player that the mode has been switched to the premonition mode. In other words, in the premonition mode, a favorable result (such as a BB win) is notified to the player when the number of premonition games has been played, whereas the pseudo premonition mode is difficult to distinguish from the premonition mode in appearance, and is a mode that ends without notifying the player of a favorable result when the number of pseudo premonition games has been played.

In step S6303, a table for the pseudo premonition mode lottery is obtained from the various table storage area 105a of the ROM 105, and a lottery counter is obtained from the various counter area 106e of the RAM 106, and a lottery is held to determine whether or not to execute the pseudo premonition mode. The table for the pseudo premonition mode lottery is set so that the probability of winning the lottery for the pseudo premonition mode differs depending on the type of rare combination that has been won; for example, it is set so that a strong cherry has a higher probability of winning the lottery for the pseudo premonition mode than a weak cherry.

In step S6304, it is determined whether or not the pseudo premonition mode lottery has been won based on the processing result of step S6303. If the lottery has been won, in step S6305, a lottery process is performed to determine the number of games in the pseudo premonition mode. In this process, the number of pseudo premonition games is randomly determined by lottery to be 1 out of a predetermined number of games (e.g., 1 to 20 games). However, in the lottery for the number of pseudo premonition games, 0 games is not selected.

In the following step S6306, the number of pseudo premonition games determined in step S6305 is input to the pseudo premonition counter provided in the various counter area 106e of the RAM 106, and the number of pseudo premonition games is set. Like the premonition counter, the pseudo premonition counter is decremented by 1 in step S1506 of the game number management process (FIG. 46), i.e., when all of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped.

In the following step S6307, a sixth freeze flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106. The sixth freeze flag corresponds to the sixth freeze effect in FIG. 95, and the setting of this flag sets the execution of the sixth freeze effect. In other words, the sixth freeze effect occurs in response to a win of a rare combination, and more specifically, is executed when a rare combination is won without winning the BB combination, and the selection process of the pseudo premonition mode in step S6305 is won.

In the next step S6308, a freeze counter FC is set in the various counter area 106e of the RAM 106, and then in step S6309, a process is executed to set a freeze stock command as an output target to the display control device 81. The freeze stock command includes information indicating that a freeze effect has been previously set to be executed, the type of freeze effect to be executed, and how many games after which the freeze effect will be executed.

In the following step S6310, a process is executed to set the pseudo premonition command as an output target to the display control device 81. The pseudo premonition command includes information on the number of pseudo premonition games. After execution of step S6310, if a negative judgment is made in step S6302 or step S6304, the process for the sixth freeze effect is terminated.

Next, the control processing of the display control device 81 (sub-side control device) in this embodiment will be described. Figure 98 is a flowchart showing the process for notifying transition trigger roles. In this figure, the same step numbers are used for processes similar to the process for notifying transition trigger roles in Figure 60, and their explanations will be omitted. Note that the process for notifying transition trigger roles in Figure 98 differs from the process for notifying transition trigger roles in Figure 60 only in that the processes of steps S6401 to S6403 have been added.

The process for notifying the transition trigger role is executed when it is determined in step S2204 (Fig. 53) that the transition trigger role has been won. As described above, the transition trigger roles include strong cherry, weak cherry, strong watermelon, weak watermelon, Chance A, Chance B, middle bell, strong cherry overlap 1, weak cherry overlap 1, strong watermelon overlap 1, weak watermelon overlap 1, Chance A overlap 1, Chance B overlap 1, middle bell overlap 1, special lip A overlap 1, special lip A overlap 2, single BB 1, and single BB 2, and includes the rare roles in step S6302 (Fig. 97).

As shown in FIG. 98, if a negative judgment is made in the judgment process of step S2806 (a process for determining whether or not a bonus has been won) in the transition trigger role notification process, the process proceeds to step S6401, where it is determined whether or not the currently received start command includes a pseudo premonition command. If a pseudo premonition command is included, the process proceeds to step S6402, where a pseudo flag is set in the various flag storage area 183a of the RAM 183, and then the transition trigger role notification process ends.

On the other hand, if the pseudo precursor command is not included, the process proceeds to step S6403, where it is determined whether or not a pseudo flag is set in the various flag storage area 183a of the RAM 183. If the pseudo flag is set, the transition trigger role notification process is terminated, whereas if the pseudo flag is not set, the process of steps S2807 to S2812 is executed.

In this embodiment, the main control device 101 thus executes the transition process to the pseudo premonition mode, and when the execution of the sixth freeze effect is set, the process from step S2807 onwards (the transition process to the additional pseudo premonition mode) is not executed.

Next, the continuous performance setting process in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 99. In FIG. 99, the same steps as those in the continuous performance setting process in FIG. 61 are given the same step numbers.

In step S2901, it is determined whether the currently received start command includes a precursor command. If a precursor command is not included, the process proceeds to step S6501, where it is determined whether the currently received start command includes a pseudo precursor command.

If it is determined in step S2901 that a premonition command is included, or if it is determined in step S6501 that a pseudo premonition command is included, then in step S2902, the number of premonition games in the premonition mode included in the premonition command or the number of pseudo premonition games in the pseudo premonition mode included in the pseudo premonition command is input into the continuous performance counter. As a result, when the number of remaining games in the premonition mode or pseudo premonition mode corresponds to the start of continuous performance (4 games remaining), continuous performance will start. After the processing of step S2902 is performed, in step S2903, the continuous performance flag is set.

If a negative judgment is made in step S6501, or after the processing of step S2903 has been executed, the process proceeds to step S2904, where it is determined whether or not the continuous performance flag is set. If the continuous performance flag is set, the process of subtracting 1 from the continuous performance counter is performed in step S2905. Then, in step S2906, it is determined whether or not the continuous performance counter is a number (0 to 3) corresponding to continuous performances.

If the continuous performance counter is a number corresponding to the continuous performance, in step S2907, it is determined whether or not the pseudo flag is set. If the pseudo flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S2908, where the main premonition performance table is obtained from the various table storage area 182a. Then, in step S2909, the performance data of the corresponding continuous performance is identified from the main premonition performance table and the continuous performance counter, the corresponding performance data is obtained from the performance data storage area 182b of the ROM 182, and processing is performed to set it as the current continuous performance. The performance data of the continuous performance identified from the main premonition performance table is performance data indicating that the continuous performance will continue until the next game if the continuous performance counter is 1 to 3, and is performance data indicating that the current continuous performance will end successfully if the continuous performance counter is 0.

If it is determined in step S2907 that the pseudo flag is set, the process proceeds to step S2910, where a pseudo premonition effect table is obtained from the various table storage area 182a. Then, in step S2911, the effect data of the corresponding continuous effect is identified from the pseudo premonition effect table and the continuous effect counter, the corresponding effect data is obtained from the effect data storage area 182b of the ROM 182, and a process is performed to set it as the current continuous effect. The effect data of the continuous effect identified from the pseudo premonition effect table is effect data indicating that the continuous effect will continue until the next game or effect data indicating that it will not continue if the continuous effect counter is 1 to 3, and effect data indicating that the current continuous effect will end in failure if the continuous effect counter is 0.

After performing the processing of step S2909 or step S2911, in step S2912 it is determined whether the continuous performance counter is 0. If the continuous performance counter is 0, in step S2913 a process is performed to clear the continuous performance flag and the pseudo flag. If the pseudo flag is not set, that state is maintained. If a negative determination is made in step S2904, step S2906, or step S2912, or after performing the processing of step S2913, this continuous performance setting process is terminated.

Next, the full stop effect setting process in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 100. Note that the full stop effect setting process in FIG. 100 differs from the full stop effect setting process in FIG. 58 only in that steps S6601 to S6603 have been added.

In step S2617, it is determined whether the currently received stop command includes a bonus end command. If the currently received stop command does not include a bonus end command, in step S6601, it is determined whether the currently received stop command includes an unfreeze command. If the unfreeze command is included, in step S6602, a bonus notification process is executed to set a bonus notification effect. In the bonus notification effect, for example, the auxiliary display unit 65 displays the text "V BONUS" and the speaker 64 is controlled to emit a corresponding sound effect (for example, "bonus").

In the following step S6603, the effect data is set so as to change the effect video in the fourth game. Specifically, as in each of the above embodiments, the effect data is set so that the video of FIG. 68(a) is not displayed, and a victory video is displayed. After step S6603 is executed, or if a negative judgment is made in step S6601, the process proceeds to step S2619, and processing for announcing additional bonuses when all reels stop is executed.

<About the game flow>
The flow of the game when the continuous effect is executed will be described. First, the case where the freeze effect execution is not released will be described with reference to Fig. 101. Here, the case where the number of games for the continuous effect is set to 4 will be described.

As already explained, in games 1 to 3 of the consecutive effects, an image of the main character attacking an enemy character is displayed, as shown in Figures 101 (a1) and (a2). If the consecutive effects are triggered by winning BB or VB, then in the fourth game (the final game of the consecutive effects), the fifth freeze effect is executed and the victory image (a3) is displayed. By displaying the victory image in this way, the player can recognize that they have won a favorable result (here, BB or VB).

On the other hand, if the above consecutive effects are triggered by winning a rare combination, the sixth freeze effect is executed in the fourth game, and the defeat image (a4) is displayed. By displaying this image, the player can recognize that he or she has not won a favorable result.

In this way, when announcing the result in the final game of the continuous performance, the continuous performance can be appropriately livened up by executing the freeze performance. In addition, in the fifth freeze performance, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are driven and controlled to rotate in the reverse direction for a predetermined angle, and then rotate further in the reverse direction and pause when the "red 7" symbol is aligned, while in the sixth freeze performance, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are driven and controlled to rotate in the forward direction after rotating in the reverse direction for a predetermined angle. That is, the operation modes of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are different in both freeze performances, and the freeze performance itself is provided with an announcement function that announces whether or not a win has been won. Therefore, when each freeze performance is executed, the player's interest in which operation mode each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R will operate increases, and it is possible to appropriately increase the attention to the freeze performance.

Next, a case where the execution of a freeze effect is cancelled in the middle of a continuous effect will be described with reference to FIG. 102. Here, a case where a BB is won in a certain game, and this triggers the execution of the fifth freeze effect and the continuous effect is set will be described.

If the player stops a specific reach symbol (reach symbol A or reach symbol B) while the first to third games of the consecutive effects are being executed (until the game immediately preceding the fourth game ends) (a2), a release process is performed so that the fifth freeze effect is not executed in the fourth game. At the same time, a bonus notification effect is executed on the auxiliary display unit 65 to notify the player that he or she has won a BB (a3). In the bonus notification effect, a bonus notification video 201 with the text "V BONUS" is displayed.

The bonus notification video 201 is displayed immediately after a specific reach symbol stops, that is, in the game in which the specific reach symbol stops. Furthermore, if a bonus notification effect is executed in the middle of the first to third games (for example, if it is executed in the second game), the bonus notification video 202 is also displayed in the subsequent games (a4). However, the display size of the bonus notification video 202 is made smaller than the initial bonus notification video 201, and is displayed so as to be superimposed on the video of the continuous effect in a specified location (for example, a corner) of the display screen of the auxiliary display unit 65. This allows the player to view the bonus notification video 202 while viewing the video of the continuous effect executed on the auxiliary display unit 65.

Then, in the fourth game, the fifth freeze effect is not executed and the victory video (a5) is displayed. In this case, the victory video is displayed without displaying the video in FIG. 68(a).

In this embodiment, the freeze effect is released when a specific reach symbol stops. Therefore, when a rare combination (not winning a bonus) triggers the transition to the pseudo premonition mode and a continuous effect is executed, the reach symbol, which is the release condition for the freeze effect, does not stop. In other words, when a rare combination (not winning a bonus) triggers the execution of the sixth freeze effect, the execution of the freeze effect is not released.

As described above, in a configuration in which the freeze effect is executed not only when a bonus is won but also when a bonus is not won, if a reach eye stops before the freeze effect is executed after an opportunity to execute the freeze effect occurs, the execution of the freeze effect (a freeze that is executed when a bonus is won) is canceled. In other words, if the result is at least what the player desires (a bonus winning result), and it is assumed that the player knows the result in advance, the freeze effect is not executed. For example, if a freeze effect is executed in overlap with the stopping of a reach eye while the player recognizes or predicts a bonus win from the stopping of a reach eye, the player may feel annoyed, but according to this embodiment, such overlapping execution is suppressed. As a result, it is possible to suppress players who recognize in advance that they will win a bonus from feeling annoyed by the freeze effect, while still livening up the game performance with the freeze effect.

When a specific reach symbol stops (when the execution of the fifth freeze symbol is cancelled), a bonus notification symbol is executed to internally notify the player that he or she has won a bonus. In this case, for example, even if the player is unaware of the reach symbol or does not notice that the reach symbol has stopped, it is possible to inform the player that a bonus has been won through the bonus notification symbol and then cancel the execution of the fifth freeze symbol. This makes it possible to preferably prevent the execution of the fifth freeze symbol from being cancelled even when the player does not recognize or predict that a bonus has been won.

<Other embodiments>
In addition, the present invention is not limited to the description of each of the above-mentioned embodiments and each of the modified examples, and may be implemented, for example, as follows. Incidentally, each of the following configurations may be applied individually to each of the above-mentioned embodiments and each of the modified examples, or may be applied to each of the above-mentioned embodiments and each of the modified examples in a combined form or in part or in whole. In addition, it is also possible to arbitrarily combine all or a part of the various configurations shown in each of the above-mentioned embodiments and each of the modified examples. In this case, it is preferable that the technical significance (effects exerted) of each of the configurations to be combined is guaranteed. Each of the following configurations may be applied individually to a new configuration consisting of a combination of the embodiments and the modified examples, or may be applied in a combined form or in part or in whole.

(1) In each of the above embodiments, when a freeze effect is set to be executed, no notification of that effect (advance notification of the freeze effect execution) is given. However, the configuration may be such that such a notification is given. In this case, the player will be able to cancel the freeze effect after recognizing that the freeze effect will be executed.

(2) In each of the above embodiments, multiple types of freeze effects are targeted for cancellation, but it is also possible to configure the configuration so that only one type of freeze effect can be cancelled. Also, while it is configured so that some freeze effects (the third freeze effect) cannot be cancelled, it is also possible to configure the configuration so that all freeze effects can be cancelled.

(3) In each of the above embodiments, the third freeze effect is not cancelled uniformly, but it may be cancelled or not depending on the results of the role selection. For example, if only BB is won, the execution of the third freeze effect is cancelled in response to a cancelling operation, and if BB and attack mode are both won, the execution of the third freeze effect is not cancelled even if a cancelling operation is performed. In this case, if the freeze effect is executed despite the player performing a cancelling operation, it means that a double win of BB and attack mode is confirmed, which increases the interest.

(4) In each of the above embodiments, the likelihood of canceling the freeze effect (third freeze effect or first to third freeze effects) when a cancel operation is performed may be varied depending on the setting value. The player can use this to guess the setting to see whether the freeze effect will be cancelled, providing an entertainment that goes beyond simply canceling the freeze effect. In this case, a cancellation lottery is held to determine whether the freeze effect will be cancelled when a cancel operation is performed, and the freeze effect is cancelled with a predetermined probability, with the cancellation probability at that time varying depending on the setting value. In addition, a lottery is held to determine whether a specific reach eye (a reach eye that triggers cancellation) can be stopped when a BB is won, and the freeze effect is cancelled if the lottery is won and the specific reach eye is stopped, with the lottery probability at that time (the winning probability that allows the specific reach eye to be stopped) varying depending on the setting value.

(5) In each of the above embodiments, the probability that a specific freeze effect (e.g., the third freeze effect) will be executed (selected) from among multiple freeze effects may vary depending on the setting value. For example, the probability of a specific freeze effect being executed may be higher at high settings or certain setting values than at other setting values. In such a configuration, for example, if a player has already figured out the setting value from other effects, there may be a need to avoid the execution of a freeze effect so that other players do not realize the setting value. In such a case, a configuration that can avoid the execution of a freeze effect can be made to meet the needs of the player.

(6) In each of the above embodiments, the execution of a freeze effect is preset, and then, if the release condition is met before the execution of the effect, the execution of the freeze effect is released. However, the effect to be released is not limited to the freeze effect, and may be a winning confirmation effect (an effect that allows the player to grasp whether a BB has been won or its carryover state) executed on the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like. In other words, by configuring the winning confirmation effect not to be executed when a reach symbol stops due to a player's operation, it is possible to prevent overlapping execution of confirmation effects due to the reaching symbol stopping and the winning confirmation effect. Note that instead of or in addition to the winning confirmation effect, a configuration may be adopted in which an effect that allows the player to predict whether a BB has been won or its carryover state is released.

(7) In each of the above embodiments, if the 11th replay role is won while the VB mode is won, no push order notification is made, and if the 11th replay role is won while the VB mode is not won, a push order that cannot win the 11th replay role is notified. However, it is also possible to have a configuration in which if the 11th replay role is won while the VB mode is won, a push order that can win the 11th replay role is notified, and if the 11th replay role is won while the VB mode is not won, no push order notification is made. In this case, in addition to the push order notification, a configuration may be made in which it is instructed that the execution of the freeze effect will be canceled if the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the indicated push order.

Also, if the 11th replay role is won while the VB mode is won, both a push sequence that will not result in the 11th replay role and a push sequence that will result in the 11th replay role can be notified, and the player can choose which one to follow (whether to cancel the freeze effect or not). In this case, it is preferable to make the notification form (for example, display color) of each notification different so that the player can recognize which corresponds to the cancellation.

(8) In each of the above embodiments, the freeze effect is executed each time it is set to be executed unless the player cancels it. However, when the player performs a cancel operation, this fact may be stored and the freeze effect may be automatically cancelled based on the history. For example, if a player performs a cancel operation a predetermined number of times in succession (e.g., twice) or the ratio of the number of times the freeze effect has been cancelled to the number of times the freeze effect has been set to be executed exceeds a predetermined ratio, it is assumed that the player does not want the freeze effect to be executed, and the freeze effect is automatically cancelled for subsequent freeze effects even if the player does not perform a cancel operation (or the freeze effect execution setting is not made at all). This makes it possible to reduce the effort required for the cancel operation.

However, there is a risk that such an automatic cancellation setting will be passed on to the next player, and that player will not be able to see the freeze effect. Therefore, it is a good idea to set a reset condition (such as no play being performed for a predetermined period of time) and clear the automatic cancellation setting when that condition is met.

(9) In each of the above embodiments, the execution or continuation of consecutive effects may be cancelled when the execution of a freeze effect is cancelled. For example, if the total number of consecutive effects is four, and a specific reach symbol stops in the second game and the execution of the freeze effect is cancelled, consecutive effects from the third game onwards may not be executed. In this case, the bonus notification video 201 of the above fourth embodiment may be displayed and continued until a pattern combination corresponding to a BB or the like stops in an active position or until a transition to a bonus game or the like occurs. Also, a configuration may be adopted in which an effect video other than the bonus notification video 201 is displayed.

(10) In each of the above embodiments, the specific reach eye that is the condition for canceling the freeze effect is set to reach eye A or reach eye B, but among the reach eyes, a reach eye that cannot be stopped when a stop operation is performed by a specific operation mode (DDT hitting method) and can be stopped when a stop operation is performed by an operation mode (operation timing) different from the specific operation mode may be set as the specific reach eye. For example, it is preferable to set reach eye B as the specific reach eye and reach eye A as not the specific reach eye. With such a configuration, the execution of the freeze effect can be released by the stopping of a reach eye that the player intentionally stopped, rather than a reach eye that was accidentally stopped while the player was performing the stopping operation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R so as not to miss out on a winning combination. In other words, since it is assumed that the latter reach symbol indicates a high probability that the player has realized that a bonus has been won when that reach symbol stops, it is possible to configure the freeze effect to be cancelled when such a reach symbol stops, so that the freeze effect can be cancelled in a situation where the player is highly likely to recognise or predict that a bonus has been won.

(11) In each of the above embodiments, in addition to a reach pattern (strong reach pattern, for example, reach pattern A or reach pattern B) that can be stopped only in the case of a BB win, etc., a pattern combination (weak reach pattern or chance pattern) that can be stopped in both the case of a BB win, etc. and a miss (not winning BB, etc.) may be provided. In such a configuration, when a BB, etc. is won and a freeze effect is set to be executed, if a strong reach pattern stops, the execution of the freeze effect may be canceled, and if a weak reach pattern stops, the execution of the freeze effect may not be canceled. According to such a configuration, by further providing a weak reach pattern, the opportunity for a player to expect a BB win, etc. is increased, and interest is improved. In addition, since the execution of the freeze effect is canceled only in the case of a strong reach pattern, it is possible to prevent the freeze effect from being executed in a situation where the player can clearly grasp the BB win, etc., and it is possible to prevent the freeze effect from being canceled only when the player does not grasp the BB win, etc.

As a configuration with the above-mentioned weak reach eyes, it is possible to use a configuration in which the reels 32L to 32R are driven and controlled so that the symbol combination corresponding to the weak reach eye stops in an effective position when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated at a specified operation timing, without being triggered by the winning of a specific role (such as a rare role). It may also be possible to have a configuration in which the symbol combination can be stopped in the winning game or a subsequent game when a specific role other than BB or VB is won. In addition, it is also possible to have a configuration in which the execution of the freeze effect is cancelled when either a strong reach eye or a weak reach eye stops.

(12) In the first to third embodiments, a bonus notification effect may be executed as in the fourth embodiment. Specifically, after a freeze effect is set, if a specific reach symbol stops before the freeze effect is executed (if an operation that triggers the cancellation of the freeze effect is performed), the bonus notification effect is executed. With this configuration, even if the player does not notice that a reach symbol has stopped, for example, it is possible to cancel the execution of the freeze effect after informing the player that a BB has been won, etc. In other words, it is possible to preferably prevent the execution of the freeze effect from being cancelled even if the player is not aware that a BB has been won, etc.

The bonus notification effect may be performed when the execution of the freeze effect is released, or when the execution of the freeze effect is released. In addition, in each embodiment, instead of the bonus notification effect, a reach eye notification effect that notifies that a reach eye has stopped may be executed.

(13) In each of the above embodiments, the freeze effect occurs at the start of the game, but it may occur while the game is being played (in the middle of the game). In this case, the freeze effect may not be executed if a reach symbol stops by the execution timing of the freeze effect in the game in which the freeze effect is executed, or the freeze effect may not be executed if a reach symbol stops by a specified timing prior to the execution timing (a timing a specified period prior to the execution timing).

(14) In the first embodiment, the freeze effect is deactivated when a specific reach eye stops. However, the freeze effect may be deactivated when an effect that allows the player to recognize or predict the execution of the freeze effect is executed on the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like. For example, regardless of whether the freeze effect is set to be executed or not, the freeze effect is deactivated when the player performs a predetermined operation, and the freeze effect is deactivated when an effect that allows the player to recognize or predict the execution of the freeze effect (for example, an effect that displays the text "Freeze has been stocked") is executed. With this configuration, a player who desires a freeze effect can know that the freeze effect is set to be deactivated when the freeze effect is not executed despite being set to be executed. In other words, this can be used as an opportunity to clear the deactivation setting. This configuration can also be applied to the second and third embodiments.

(15) In the first embodiment, a special reach eye that can only stop in a BB winning game may be provided. In this case, the execution of the freeze effect may be cancelled when the special reach eye stops in the BB winning game, while the freeze effect may not be cancelled even if another reach eye stops in a game after the BB winning game and before the specific game. Conversely, the freeze effect may not be cancelled even if the special reach eye stops in the BB winning game, and the freeze effect may be cancelled when a reach eye other than the special reach eye or a specific reach eye among the reach eyes other than the special reach eye stops in a game after the BB winning game and before the specific game. This also applies to the first and second stage operations in the second embodiment and the release operation and return operation (cancel operation) in the third embodiment.

(16) In the first embodiment, there may be a first reach and a second reach that is more difficult to stop, and the freeze effect may be cancelled when the second reach stops, but not cancelled when the first reach stops. Also, the freeze effect may be cancelled when the second reach stops once, and when the first reach stops two or more times. In other words, a cancellation operation with a high level of difficulty may be weighted more heavily than an operation with a low level of difficulty, assuming that the player has performed the operation with the intention of cancelling. The same applies to the first and second stage operations in the second embodiment, and the cancellation operation and return operation (cancel operation) in the third embodiment.

(17) In the first embodiment, the symbols that stop at the effective positions of the reach symbols that are the release operation and the reach symbols that are not the release operation may overlap. For example, the left reel 32L and the middle reel 32M in the above-mentioned reach symbols have the same stop symbols that constitute the reach symbols, and only the right reel 32R has a different stop symbol. In this case, the player can sense that the reach symbols will stop (BB win or its carryover state) when the left reel 32L and the middle reel 32M are stopped, and can select whether or not to stop the reach symbols that are the release operation (whether or not to cancel the freeze effect) on the right reel 32R. Also, the reach symbols may be configured to occur when two reels (e.g., the left reel 32L and the middle reel 32M) or one reel (e.g., the left reel 32L) are stopped, and the player can select whether or not to stop the symbols that are the release operation when stopping the remaining reels.

(18) In the first embodiment, the freeze effect may be released by an operation other than the operation of stopping a specific reach eye (for example, pressing and holding a switch that performs the final stop operation among the stop switches 42 to 44, moving the start lever 41 in a specific direction (upward), operating the effect switch 66, etc.). This also applies to the first and second stage operations in the second embodiment, and the release operation and return operation (cancellation operation) in the third embodiment. Note that, when the freeze effect is released by the effect switch 55, a sensor that detects whether or not the switch 55 is operated may be electrically connected to the main control device 101, or the display control device 81 may be configured to control the execution of the freeze effect.

(19) In the first embodiment, the freeze effect is executed without being released if the release operation is not performed by the time of the specific game (the timing of execution of the freeze effect). However, the freeze effect may also be not released if the release operation is not performed by a predetermined timing before the execution timing of the freeze effect (for example, up to two games before the specific game). This configuration can also be applied to the second and third embodiments. In this case, when applied to the third embodiment, the freeze effect can be released if the return operation (operation to cancel the release) is not performed by the above-mentioned predetermined timing.

The freeze effect may also be cancelled if a cancellation operation is performed in one or more predetermined games during the period in which the freeze effect is set to be executed. In this case, only some of the games are subject to operation monitoring, rather than the entire period from when the freeze effect is set to be executed to when the effect is executed. As a result, the player only needs to select whether or not to perform a cancellation operation in some of the games, and for example, a player who wants to execute a freeze effect does not need to be careful not to cancel the cancellation operation throughout the entire period. This makes it easier for the player to concentrate on the game. Also, by only monitoring some of the games, it is possible to reduce the processing load of the control process.

(20) In the first embodiment, the freeze effect is deactivated when a specific reach symbol (some reach symbols) is stopped. However, the freeze effect may be deactivated when a reach symbol is stopped regardless of the type of reach symbol. However, in a gaming machine in which a bonus has been won or the bonus has been carried over, and a combination of symbols corresponding to a reach symbol is stopped relatively easily without the player being particularly aware of it, the freeze effect may be excessively restricted from being executed. Therefore, in order to ensure an opportunity to execute the freeze effect, it is preferable to use the configuration of the first embodiment. This also applies to the third embodiment. In the second embodiment, the freeze effect may be deactivated by the settlement switch 59 when a specific reach symbol is stopped.

(21) The first embodiment described above can also be seen as a configuration in which, when a stop operation is performed (first operation is performed) at a timing when the reach eye does not stop, a preset freeze effect is executed in a specific game, and when a stop operation is performed (second operation is performed) at a timing when the reach eye stops, the execution of the freeze effect is cancelled. In this case, the first operation and the second operation may be different, and the specific operation mode is not limited to the above. For example, the operation time of the switch used for the final stop operation among the stop switches 42 to 44 may be different (the second operation is a long press), or a different operation means may be used. Furthermore, each of the first operation and the second operation is not limited to a single operation, and may be made up of multiple operations.

(22) In the first embodiment (variation 1) described above, the cancellation notification is executed only in specific cases, but the cancellation notification may be executed each time a cancellation operation is performed. In this case, a player who wishes to cancel the freeze effect and performs a cancellation operation can confirm that the cancellation operation has been accepted.

(23) In the first embodiment (variation 1) described above, if the number of games FG from when the freeze effect is set to be executed until the operation to cancel it is executed is greater than a predetermined number of games, a notification is given that a reach symbol has stopped. However, instead of such a notification, a video presentation or the like that allows the player to recognize or predict that a BB has been won or that the BB has been carried over may be executed. Alternatively, a notification may not be executed.

(24) In the first embodiment (variation 1) described above, if a release operation is performed by a predetermined timing after the freeze effect has been set and before the freeze effect is executed, a release notification may not be issued, but if the release operation is performed after the predetermined timing, a release notification may be issued. In such a configuration, if the release operation is performed late, a release notification is issued on the basis that it is highly likely that the player performed the operation without knowing about the existence of the freeze effect or that its execution can be released. This makes it possible to appropriately inform a player who performed the operation without knowing about the existence of the freeze effect and that its execution can be released. On the other hand, if the release operation is performed early, a release notification is not issued on the basis that it is highly likely that the player performed the operation with knowledge. This makes it possible to prevent the above notification from being bothersome to players who performed the operation with knowledge.

(25) In the second embodiment, as in the modified example 3 of the first embodiment, after the BB win or the effect that allows the player to recognize the win state is executed on the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like, the execution of the freeze effect may be cancelled by operating the settlement switch 59. In this case, the player can select whether or not to execute the freeze effect after grasping the BB win. For example, a player who loses interest in the freeze effect after discovering the BB win and no longer wants the freeze effect to be executed can avoid the execution of the freeze effect by operating the settlement switch 59 (cancellation operation) after the above effect. On the other hand, a player who is highly interested in the freeze effect and wants to see the effect can have the freeze effect executed by not performing the cancellation operation. In such a configuration, a cancellation operation notification (such as "You can cancel the freeze stock by pressing the settlement switch") that teaches the cancellation operation may be performed after the execution of the above effect on the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like, or may be performed during the effect (simultaneous with the effect).

Also, in the third embodiment, the freeze effect may be cancelled if the auxiliary display unit 65 or other device displays a BB win or a display that allows the player to recognize the win state, and the settlement switch 59 is not operated by the time the freeze effect is executed. Even in this case, the player can select whether or not to execute the freeze effect after understanding that the BB win has been executed.

(26) In the second embodiment, as in variant 4 of the first embodiment, instead of cancelling the freeze effect, it may be configured to change to another effect. This also applies to the third embodiment.

(27) In the second embodiment, the freeze effect is cancelled when the settlement switch 59 is operated after the reach eye stops. However, the freeze effect may be switched to cancel or not depending on the number of games or the period from when the reach eye stops to when the settlement switch 59 is operated. In this case, as in the modified example 5 of the first embodiment, the freeze effect may be cancelled when the number of games is equal to or less than a predetermined number of games or the period is equal to or less than a predetermined period, and the freeze effect may not be cancelled when the number of games is greater than the predetermined number of games or the period is longer than the predetermined period. In addition, the freeze effect may be switched to cancel or not depending on the number of games or the period from when the freeze effect is set to be executed to when the settlement switch 59 is operated, or the number of games or the period from when the freeze effect is set to be executed to when the reach eye stops.

(28) In the second embodiment described above, the operation of stopping the reach eyes (first-stage operation) and the operation of the settlement switch 59 (second-stage operation) are required to cancel the freeze effect, but these operations are not limited to those described above and may be any operation performed by the player. However, considering that the player can choose whether or not to cancel the execution of the freeze effect after understanding that a BB has been won, it is preferable that the first-stage operation be an operation that triggers the execution of an effect that allows the player to recognize or predict a BB win or its carryover state.

In addition, the first and second stage operations do not necessarily have to be different operations and may be the same operation. In this case, the execution of the freeze effect can be cancelled by simply repeating the same operation. However, since the execution of the freeze effect can be cancelled even if the player repeats the operation casually, it is preferable to have different operations from the viewpoint of preventing the player from cancelling the freeze effect unintentionally. Also, a configuration requiring three or more stages of operation to cancel the freeze effect may be adopted.

(29) In the second embodiment described above, the first stage operation is configured to be an operation using the stop switches 42 to 44, but it may also be an operation that does not use the stop switches 42 to 44. In this case, in order to prevent erroneous operations during play, it is preferable to use an operating means other than the stop switches 42 to 44 and the start lever 41. Also, the second stage operation may be an operation using the stop switches 42 to 44 and the start lever 41.

(30) In the second embodiment (variation 1) described above, the presence or absence of a notification for the release operation may be switched depending on the number of games or the period from when the execution of the freeze effect is set to when the reach eye stops. In this case, the notification for the release operation may not be executed when the number of games is less than a predetermined number of games, and may be executed when the number of games is more than the predetermined number of games.

(31) In the second embodiment (variation 2) described above, the notification for the release operation when the freeze effect is being executed may be configured to have different notification modes for the release operation when the freeze effect is not being executed. In this case, it is possible to provide a game feature that allows the player to detect a BB win (freeze occurrence) from the difference in notification modes.

(32) In the third embodiment described above, when a specific reach symbol stops after the execution of a freeze effect is set, a release process for the set freeze effect may be executed, and then, when the settlement switch 59 is operated by the execution timing of the freeze effect set by the initial setting, a return process for the freeze effect (a reset process for the execution of the freeze effect) may be executed. In this case, in order to ensure consistency between the initially set freeze effect and the reset freeze effect (consistency in the execution timing, type of freeze effect, etc.), it is preferable to retain information such as the execution timing set by the initial setting process during the release process, rather than discarding it (the update process continues for information that requires updating, such as the freeze counter FC). In this way, when the freeze effect is reset, the initial setting can be used to execute the freeze effect.

(33) In the third embodiment described above, the operation to release the freeze effect (the operation to stop a specific reach symbol) and the operation to cancel the release (the operation of the settlement switch 59) are different operations, but these operations may be configured to be the same operation. In this case, the release of the freeze effect can be canceled simply by repeating the same operation. However, since the release of the freeze effect can be canceled even if the player repeats the operation casually, it is preferable to use different operations in order to prevent erroneous operations.

(34) In the fourth embodiment described above, a fifth freeze effect and a sixth freeze effect are provided, and freeze effects that operate differently depending on whether a BB win or the like is the trigger and whether a rare combination is the trigger are executed, but a configuration in which freeze effects that operate in the same manner may also be used.

(35) In the fourth embodiment described above, the execution of the sixth freeze effect triggered by the winning of a rare combination is not cancelled, but it may be cancelled. Specifically, if a predetermined effect that allows the player to recognize that a BB win or the like has not occurred is executed before the execution of the sixth freeze effect after a rare combination is won (after the trigger for the sixth freeze effect occurs), the execution of the sixth freeze effect is cancelled. Not only when a player recognizes or predicts a BB win or the like in advance, but also when a player recognizes in advance that a BB or the like has not been won, the player may feel annoyed when the freeze effect is executed again. Therefore, this configuration makes it possible to more appropriately suppress the player from feeling annoyed by the freeze effect.

The predetermined effect may be, for example, a reel control that prevents a picture combination corresponding to a BB win (such as a set of red sevens or a predetermined reach symbol) from stopping at a valid position even if the player performs a stop operation at the timing when the above picture combination would stop at a valid position, or a reel control that prevents the above picture combination from stopping at a valid position when the BB win state or its carryover state is not available and allows a predetermined picture combination to stop at a valid position, but when the BB win state or its carryover state is available, regardless of the timing of the stop operation.

(36) In the fourth embodiment described above, when the bonus notification image 201 is displayed, the bonus notification image 202 with a small display size is also displayed thereafter. However, the bonus notification image 202 may not be displayed. In other words, when the bonus notification image 201 is displayed, the bonus notification may not be performed in the subsequent consecutive effects. This is also true when the bonus notification effects are applied to the first to third embodiments described above.

(37) The configuration of the second or third embodiment may be applied to the fourth embodiment. That is, the fifth freeze effect may be cancelled if the settlement switch 59 is operated after the reach eye stops, or the fifth freeze effect may not be cancelled if the settlement switch 59 is operated after the reach eye stops, and the fifth freeze effect may be cancelled if the settlement switch 59 is not operated after the reach eye stops.

(38) In the first embodiment, instead of stopping a specific reach eye (performing an operation to stop a specific reach eye), the freeze effect may be cancelled by operating the settlement switch 59. With this configuration, when a player finishes playing, it is possible to prevent the freeze effect set before the end from remaining. For example, if the freeze effect remains, the freeze effect is executed as soon as the next player starts playing, and the player who finished playing may later realize that he or she has won the BB, which may upset the player. In this regard, in the present configuration, when the freeze effect is set to be executed, the freeze effect is automatically cancelled when the player operates the settlement switch 59 to finish playing, so that it is possible to prevent the freeze effect from being executed as soon as the next player starts playing. Note that in the above configuration, the BB win may also be cancelled (nullified) together with the cancellation of the freeze effect.

(39) In the second embodiment (variation 1), the notification for the release operation (press the settlement switch 59 to release the freeze stock) is not executed during the period in which the medal return process is executed. However, the number of medals to be paid out in the case where the medal return process is executed may be grasped, and whether or not to execute the notification for the release operation may be switched based on the grasped result. For example, after the reach eye stops, the number of credits for each game (or the total number of credits and bets) is grasped. Then, if the grasped number of credits is less than a predetermined number (for example, 0), a command to execute the notification for the release operation is set in the main control device 101, so that the notification for the release operation is executed. On the other hand, if the grasped number of credits is more than the predetermined number, the above command is not set, and the notification for the release operation is not executed. Even with this configuration, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience of the player operating the settlement switch 59 due to the notification for the release operation, resulting in the medal return process being executed. Also, in this configuration, even if the game is paused, if the number of credits is below a predetermined number, a notification for the release operation is executed, and the frequency of the execution of the notification for the release operation can be increased. Conversely, if the number of credits grasped is below a predetermined number (for example, 0), the notification for the release operation is not executed, and if the number of credits grasped is greater than the predetermined number, the notification for the release operation is executed. Note that each of these configurations can also be applied to the restoration notification in the third embodiment (when the user wishes to cancel the freeze release, the user presses the settlement switch).

(40) In the second embodiment described above, if the settlement switch 59 is operated during a period when the medal return process is not being executed, the release flag is turned on and the execution of the freeze effect is released. However, the execution of the freeze effect may also be released when the settlement switch 59 is operated during a period when the medal return process is being executed. In this case, if the settlement switch 59 is operated during a period when the medal return process is being executed in a situation where the reach eye has stopped after the execution of the freeze effect has been set, both the release of the freeze effect and the medal return process will be executed.

In addition, in the above configuration, when the settlement switch 59 is operated, instead of both canceling the freeze effect and executing the medal return process, the configuration may be such that only the freeze effect is cancelled. In other words, if the settlement switch 59 is operated in a situation where the freeze effect can be cancelled, the freeze effect is cancelled with priority. With this configuration, when the settlement switch 59 is operated with the intention of cancelling the freeze effect, it is possible to prevent the medal return process from also being executed. Also, the freeze effect may not be cancelled, and only the medal return process may be executed.

The configuration of performing both the release of the freeze effect and the medal return process, or of prioritizing one of them, can also be applied to the configuration in the first embodiment where the freeze effect is released by operating the settlement switch 59, and to the return operation (cancellation operation for releasing the freeze effect) in the third embodiment.

(41) In the second embodiment, the number of medals to be paid out when the medal return process is executed may be grasped, and whether or not to cancel the execution of the freeze effect may be switched on based on the grasped result. For example, the number of credits (or the total number of credits and bets) when the reach eye is stopped is grasped. Then, if the grasped number of credits is more than a predetermined number (for example, 0), the execution of the freeze effect is not canceled. On the other hand, if the grasped number of credits is equal to or less than the predetermined number, the execution of the freeze effect is canceled. This configuration can also prevent an operation for the purpose of canceling the freeze effect from being performed in a situation where medals are paid out. Conversely, if the grasped number of credits is equal to or less than a predetermined number (for example, 0), the freeze effect may not be canceled, and if the grasped number of credits is greater than the predetermined number, the freeze effect may be canceled. Note that each of these configurations can also be applied to the configuration in which the freeze effect is canceled by operating the settlement switch 59 in the first embodiment, and to the return operation in the third embodiment.

(42) In each of the above embodiments, the execution of one preset freeze effect is cancelled by executing the release operation. However, the configuration may be such that the execution of a freeze effect is not presupposed to be pre-set, and the execution of subsequent freeze effects is cancelled (freeze effects are no longer executed) by executing the release operation. In that case, the number of freeze effects that are not executed is not limited to one, but may be multiple. For example, the configuration may be such that after the release operation is executed, no freeze effects are executed until the release operation for that release is executed.

(43) In each of the above embodiments, the configuration may be such that each time the settlement switch 59 is operated, a switch is switched on or off to execute a freeze effect. For example, when the settlement switch 59 is operated for the first time in a situation where execution of a freeze effect is set, execution of the freeze effect is cancelled, and when the settlement switch 59 is operated for the second time, execution of the freeze effect is restored, and when the settlement switch 59 is operated again, execution of the freeze effect is cancelled again.

(44) In each of the above embodiments, when the execution of a freeze effect is set, the freeze effect may be executed by operating the settlement switch 59 (if the settlement switch 59 is not operated, the set freeze effect will not be executed).

(45) In each of the above embodiments, a so-called A+ART type slot machine was used as an example of a gaming machine, but the present invention can be widely applied to slot machines that execute freeze effects, and can also be applied to normal type (so-called A type) slot machines, for example.

(46) In the freeze effect, the red 7 symbol alignment is temporarily stopped, but it may not be stopped, or the symbol combination that is temporarily stopped may be changed.

(47) Although the configuration is such that no medals are paid out when a transition role (first BB, second BB, or CB) is won, the configuration may be such that medals are paid out.

(48) Although a slot machine having three reels and corresponding stop switches arranged in parallel has been described, the present invention is not limited to such a configuration and may be, for example, a slot machine having five reels and corresponding stop switches arranged in parallel. From the viewpoint of preventing erroneous operations when stopping the reels, at least two reels and corresponding stop switches are sufficient. Also, although a slot machine in which the number of active lines is set to one when the number of bets is three has been described, the present invention is not limited to such a configuration and may be, for example, five active lines.

(49) Although a specific example of a slot machine 10 has been shown, the present invention may be applied to a gaming machine that combines a slot machine and a pachinko machine. In other words, instead of the medal insertion and medal payout functions of a slot machine, the present invention may be a gaming machine that has a ball insertion and ball payout function like a pachinko machine (a so-called ball-using reel gaming machine). If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, the gaming hall can handle only balls as gaming value, which can eliminate problems seen in current gaming halls where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed, such as the burden on facilities due to the separate handling of medals and balls as gaming value, and restrictions on the location of gaming machines.

For example, in a pachinko machine or a reel-type game machine using balls, the setting values that change the payout rate and the like may be configured to have multiple stages, and the above-mentioned inventions may be applied as suggestions or instructional effects for these setting values. In this case, in a pachinko machine that has a high probability state and a low probability state where the probability of a jackpot is high and low, the advantageous zone in the slot machine 10 may be applied as the high probability state, and in a pachinko machine that has a high ball entry state and a low ball entry state where the rate of balls entering a predetermined ball entry section is high and low, the advantageous zone in the slot machine 10 may be applied as the high ball entry state, and the above-mentioned inventions may be applied.

<Inventions extracted from the above embodiments>
The following describes characteristic configurations extracted from each of the above-mentioned embodiments, while indicating effects, etc., as necessary. Note that in the following, for ease of understanding, the corresponding configurations in the above-mentioned embodiments are appropriately indicated in parentheses, etc., but the present invention is not limited to the specific configurations indicated in parentheses, etc.

The inventions shown in the following feature groups have been made with a problem to be solved by the invention, which is based on the background technology that "Pachinko machines, slot machines, etc. are known as a type of gaming machine. In these gaming machines, an internal lottery is held when a predetermined lottery condition is met, and a bonus is awarded to the player depending on the result of the internal lottery. Specifically, in a slot machine, when a start lever is operated with medals as a gaming medium betted, an internal lottery is held and the reels start to spin. If a stop switch is operated while the reels are spinning, the reels stop spinning. If the reels stop corresponding to the result of the internal lottery, a bonus corresponding to the result is awarded (see, for example, JP 2008-295707 A)." The problem to be solved by the invention is that "In the gaming machines exemplified above, it is necessary to improve the entertainment value of the game, and there is still room for improvement in this regard."

<Features Group A>
Feature A1. A plurality of rotating bodies (reels 32L, 32M, and 32R) on which a plurality of types of pictures are applied in the circumferential direction;
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that allows some of the patterns on each of the rotating bodies to be viewed;
A start operation means (start lever 41) that starts rotation of each of the rotating bodies when operated;
a stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the stop operation means is operated;
A drive control means (a function of executing a reel control process by the main control device 101) that starts rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the start operation means is operated and stops rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the stop operation means is operated;
A lottery means (a function of executing lottery processing by the main control device 101) for performing a lottery to determine whether or not to grant a special benefit to a player based on the operation of the start operation means;
a bonus awarding means (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) capable of awarding a bonus corresponding to a predetermined result when a lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and a picture combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position visible through the display unit;
A gaming machine comprising:
The drive control means starts rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the start operation means is operated, and stops rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the stop operation means is operated, as a normal game operation.
A specific drive control means (a function of executing a rotation effect process by the main control device 101) for controlling each of the rotating bodies so that a specific game action (freeze effect) in which the start or progress of the normal game action is restricted is performed;
A specific game action setting means (a function of executing a BB mode winning process or a VB mode winning process by the main control device 101) for setting the specific game action to be performed in a specific game subsequent to the game in which the specific trigger (BB winning or VB winning) occurs when the specific trigger occurs;
A specific game action execution means (a function of executing a rotation effect process by the main control device 101) for executing the specific game action when the specific game is executed in a situation where the specific game action setting means is set;
a release means (a function of executing a freeze release process or a freeze return process by the main control device 101) capable of releasing the setting of the specific game action or the execution of the specific game action by the specific game action execution means based on the establishment of a predetermined condition after the execution of the specific game action is set by the specific game action setting means and before the specific game action is executed;
A gaming machine comprising:

In the above configuration, when a specific trigger occurs, a specific game action different from the normal action (normal game action) of each orbiting body is performed. The specific game action can enhance the game presentation and enhance the presentation effect, but on the other hand, since it limits the start or progress of the normal game action, it also imposes a restriction on the player that prevents the game from progressing for a certain period of time. For this reason, some players may not want to execute the specific game action. In this respect, in the present configuration, when the specific trigger occurs, the specific game action is set to be executed in a specific game after the game in which the specific trigger occurred, thereby ensuring a time leeway between setting the execution of the specific game action and actually executing it. Then, if a predetermined condition is met during this period, the setting of the specific game action or the execution of the set specific game action is canceled. This makes it possible to play while avoiding the execution of the specific game action. On the other hand, if the above-mentioned predetermined condition is not met, the specific game action is executed as originally set. In other words, it is possible to suppress the player from feeling bothered by the specific game action while ensuring the effect of exciting the game by the specific game action.

In this feature, the "cancellation means capable of canceling the setting of the specific game action or the execution of the specific game action by the specific game action execution means" can also be expressed as "cancellation means capable of preventing the specific game action in the specific game from being executed."

Feature A2. The gaming machine described in Feature A1, characterized in that the predetermined condition is met when a predetermined operation is performed by the player.

With the above configuration, the conditions for canceling a specific game action are met by the player's operation, making it possible for the player to decide whether or not to execute a specific game action.

Feature A3. The gaming machine described in Feature A1, characterized in that the predetermined condition is met when a player performs a predetermined operation using the stop operation means.

The gaming machine of feature A1 above allows the player to play the game by operating the start operation means to start the rotation of the rotating body and operating the stop operation means to stop the rotation of the rotating body. Under this premise, the game can be cancelled without requiring the player to perform an overly special operation by configuring the game machine so that a cancellation condition for a specific game action is met by performing a predetermined operation using the stop operation means.

Feature A4. A gaming machine according to any one of Features A1 to A3, characterized in that the predetermined condition is met when a specific, predetermined symbol combination stops at the active position.

In the above configuration, if a specific pattern combination stops in a valid position, the specific game action is cancelled, but if such a pattern combination does not stop, the specific game action is not cancelled. In other words, because the configuration is such that only certain stop operations function as cancellation operations for the specific game action, it is possible to prevent erroneous operations that cancel the specific game action without the intention of cancelling it, and it is possible to implement a cancellation that properly reflects the player's intention.

Furthermore, from the player's perspective, the stopping of a specific pattern combination in a valid position is a signal that the specific game operation has been released, and so the player can determine whether or not the release condition has been met. In particular, the gaming machine of feature A1 above, which is the premise of this configuration, is configured so that a bonus is or is not awarded depending on the pattern combination that stops in a valid position, so it is expected that players will be watching the stopped patterns with great interest. Under such a premise, by adopting this configuration, it is possible to create a configuration that makes it difficult for players to miss whether or not the execution of a specific game operation has been released.

Feature A5. The gaming machine described in Feature A4, wherein the specific pattern combination is a pattern combination that corresponds to a reach eye.

For example, it is conceivable that a player may lose interest in the subsequent presentations after sensing that a bonus has been won. For such a player, if a specific game action is executed again, the game progress may be restricted and the player may feel annoyed. In this regard, in this configuration, the gaming machine determines whether or not the player is likely to recognize the bonus win based on whether or not a reach symbol stops. If it is determined that the player is likely to recognize the bonus win, the machine is configured to automatically control the execution of the scheduled specific game action so that it can be canceled. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the specific game action from being executed in a situation where the player is aware of the bonus win. On the other hand, if a reach symbol does not stop and it is determined that the player is not likely to recognize the bonus win, the specific game action is executed as originally planned, thereby making it possible to appropriately liven up the game. In other words, while ensuring the effect of the specific game action in livening up the game, it is possible to restrict the execution of the action in a situation where the player is likely to feel annoyed by the action, and to appropriately prevent the action from becoming annoyed.

In addition, in this configuration, the stopping of reach eyes can also be seen as a cancellation operation for canceling the execution of a specific game action. In other words, a player who does not wish to execute a specific game action can avoid the execution of the specific game action by stopping the reach eyes. In this case, with this characteristic configuration, the cancellation of the specific game action is achieved at the same time as the player is informed that he or she has won a bonus, so there is no need to perform a dedicated operation for cancellation again, and it is possible to reduce the hassle associated with the cancellation operation.

This feature can also be expressed as "a game state transition means (function of executing a winning result corresponding process by the main control device 101) that transitions to an advantageous state (BB, VB mode) that is advantageous to the player when the lottery result of the lottery means becomes a predetermined specific transition result (BB win or VB win) and a transition pattern combination (a pattern combination corresponding to BB role or VB mode) corresponding to the specific transition result stops at the valid position, and when the lottery result becomes the specific transition result, the winning state of the specific transition result is carried over until the transition pattern combination stops at the valid position, and the specific pattern combination is different from the transition pattern combination, and is a special pattern combination (a pattern combination corresponding to a reach eye) that can be stopped when the specific transition result is in the winning state or in the carryover state, and cannot be stopped when the specific transition result is not in the winning state or in the carryover state."

Feature A6. There are multiple types of picture combinations that correspond to reach eyes.
The gaming machine described in feature A5, wherein the predetermined condition is met when some of the picture combinations corresponding to the plurality of types of reach eyes stop at the valid positions, and is not met when other picture combinations stop at the valid positions.

In the above configuration, the reach symbols that trigger the establishment of a predetermined condition are limited to a certain number of reach symbols, which makes it possible to prevent excessive restrictions on the execution of specific gaming actions.

Feature A7. The lottery means is for drawing lots for winning combinations,
The bonus awarding means is capable of awarding a bonus corresponding to a predetermined combination when the lottery result of the lottery means is a winning combination of a predetermined combination (such as a cherry) and a predetermined combination of patterns corresponding to the predetermined combination stops at the active position,
When the stop operation means is operated in a specific operation mode (first operation mode) while the predetermined combination is won, the predetermined pattern combination can be stopped at the valid position, whereas when the stop operation means is operated in an operation mode (second operation mode) different from the specific operation mode, the predetermined pattern combination cannot be stopped at the valid position.
The gaming machine described in feature A6, characterized in that some of the picture combinations cannot be stopped at the valid position when the stop operation means is operated in the specific operation mode, but can be stopped at the valid position when the stop operation means is operated in an operation mode different from the specific operation mode.

According to this configuration, the reach symbol that allows the specific game action to be cancelled is a reach symbol that does not stop in the so-called DDT playing method. In this case, the execution of the specific game action can be cancelled by the stopping of a reach symbol that the player intentionally stops, not by an accidental stop while the player is performing the stopping operation of each revolving body so as not to miss out on a winning combination. In other words, since it is assumed that the latter reach symbol is likely to indicate that the player has sensed a bonus win when the reach symbol stops, by making it possible to cancel the execution of the specific game action by the stopping of such a reach symbol, it is possible to prevent the execution of the specific game action from being cancelled even when the player has not sensed a bonus win.

Feature A8. The specific pattern combination (11th replay role) stops at the valid position when the stop operation means is operated in a first stop operation mode, and does not stop at the valid position when the stop operation means is operated in a second stop operation mode different from the first stop operation mode;
A gaming machine described in any of features A4 to A7, characterized in that it is equipped with a mode notification means (a function of executing push order processing by the main control unit 101) that executes a mode notification (push order notification) that enables a player to recognize at least one of the first stop operation mode and the second stop operation mode when the execution of the specific game operation is set by the specific game operation setting means.

According to the above configuration, the player is instructed on the operation method for canceling the specific game action or the operation method for avoiding said cancellation, so that anyone can cancel the specific game state, regardless of their skill level. In addition, since the above instruction is given in a situation in which the execution of the specific game action is set, it can also function as a notification to inform players who do not want to execute the specific game action of the need for a cancellation operation. In other words, the method for canceling can be informed in a situation in which the player needs to perform the cancellation operation, which prevents the player from forgetting to cancel and also reduces the occurrence of situations in which the player becomes confused because they do not know how to cancel.

Feature A9. A game state transition means (a function of executing a winning result corresponding process by the main control device 101) is provided to transition to an advantageous state (BB, VB mode) advantageous to the player when the lottery result of the lottery means is a predetermined specific transition result (BB win or VB win) and a transition pattern combination (a pattern combination corresponding to BB role or VB mode) corresponding to the specific transition result stops at the valid position,
When the lottery result is the specific transition result, the winning state of the specific transition result is carried over until the picture combination for the transition stops at the valid position,
A gaming machine described in any of features A1 to A8, characterized in that the specified condition is met when an effect that allows the player to recognize or predict that the specific transition result is a winning state or a carryover state thereof (an effect that essentially confirms a bonus win, such as a reach pattern stop, an effect that notifies or suggests a bonus win, or a premium effect) is executed.

For example, it is conceivable that a player may lose interest in the subsequent presentations after sensing that a specific transition result has been won, and for such a player, if a specific game action is executed again, the game progress may be restricted and the player may feel annoyed. In this regard, in this configuration, the gaming machine determines whether or not the player is likely to recognize the winning state, etc., based on whether or not a presentation that allows the player to recognize or predict that the specific transition result is a winning state or a carryover state has been executed. If it is determined that the player is likely to recognize the winning state, the machine is configured to automatically control the execution of the scheduled specific game action so that it can be canceled. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the specific game action from being executed in a situation where the player is aware of the winning state, etc. On the other hand, if the presentation is not executed and it is determined that the player is not likely to recognize the winning state, etc., the specific game action is executed as originally planned, thereby making the game more exciting. In other words, while ensuring the effect of the specific game action in livening up the game, it is possible to restrict the execution of the action in situations where the player is likely to find the action annoying, and to effectively prevent the action from becoming annoying. In addition, with this configuration, the specific game action is released at the same time as the specific transition result is detected, so there is no need to perform a dedicated operation to release it again, and it is possible to reduce the annoyance associated with the release operation.

Feature A10. When the release is performed by the release means, a release notification execution means (a function for executing the process of step S3813 by the main control device 101) capable of executing a release notification (freeze stock has been released) that allows the player to recognize that the specific game action will not be executed;
A grasping means for grasping the timing when the predetermined condition is satisfied (a function for executing the processes of steps S3802 to S3806, S3803, and S3812 by the main control device 101);
A notification switching means (a function of executing the process of step S3812 by the main control device 101) that switches whether or not the cancellation notification is to be executed by the cancellation notification execution means based on the result of the determination by the determination means;
A gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A9, characterized in that it is equipped with:

The notification that a specific game action has been released is a notification that the release operation has been accepted, which is convenient for a player who wishes to release a specific game action and has satisfied the release condition. However, on the other hand, for a player who has not intended to release and has accidentally satisfied the release condition, the notification is that a specific game action that could have been seen has been prevented from being seen, which may cause disappointment for the player. In this regard, the present configuration grasps the timing of the satisfaction of a predetermined condition (release condition), and switches whether or not to issue the above notification based on the result. This makes it possible to issue the above notification after determining whether or not the satisfaction of the release condition is based on the player's intention. Therefore, it is possible to notify a player who intentionally released the game that the release operation has been accepted, while suppressing disappointment for a player who unintentionally released the execution of a specific game action.

Feature A11. The gaming machine described in Feature A10, characterized in that the grasping means grasps the number of games or the period from when the execution of the specific gaming action is set by the specific gaming action setting means to when the predetermined condition is met.

In the above configuration, whether or not to issue a release notification is switched depending on the number of games and the period from when the execution of the specific game action is set until the release condition is met. This allows the release notification to be switched based on whether the release condition is met promptly after the specific game action is set. This makes it possible to appropriately issue a release notification depending on whether the release condition is met based on the player's will.

Feature A12. The gaming machine described in Feature A10 or Feature A11, characterized in that the notification switching means executes the release notification when the timing of the occurrence grasped by the grasping means is earlier than a predetermined timing that is earlier than the execution timing of the specific game action set by the specific game action setting, and does not execute the release notification when the timing of the occurrence grasped by the grasping means is after the predetermined timing.

In the above configuration, if the cancellation condition is met promptly after the specific game action is set, it is assumed that a player who knows that the execution of the specific game action can be cancelled and how to meet the cancellation condition has done so with the intention of cancelling, and a notification is issued that the specific game action has been cancelled. On the other hand, if the cancellation condition is met late after the specific game action is set, it is assumed that a player who does not know that the execution of the specific game action can be cancelled and how to meet the cancellation condition has accidentally met the cancellation condition without the intention of cancelling, and the above notification is not issued. This makes it possible to appropriately determine whether or not the cancellation was intentional, and to decide whether or not to issue a notification.

When this feature is applied to feature A11 above, the configuration of this feature can also be expressed as "the notification switching means causes the cancellation notification to be executed by the cancellation notification execution means when the number of games or the period grasped by the grasping means is less than a predetermined number of games or less than a predetermined period, and causes the cancellation notification to not be executed by the cancellation notification execution means when the number of games or the period grasped by the grasping means is equal to or greater than the predetermined number of games or the predetermined period."

Feature A13. A grasping means for grasping the timing when the predetermined condition is satisfied;
a release switching means for switching whether or not to execute the release by the release means based on a result of the determination by the determination means;
A gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A12, characterized in that it is equipped with:

In the above configuration, the specific game action is not cancelled uniformly when a predetermined condition (cancellation condition) is met, but rather the timing at which the cancellation condition is met is ascertained, and based on that result, a decision is made as to whether or not to cancel the specific game action. This makes it possible to determine whether or not the cancellation condition is met based on the player's will before cancelling the above. This makes it possible to prevent cancellations that are undesirable to the player.

This feature may be configured to grasp the number of games or the period from when the execution of a specific gaming action is set to when a predetermined condition is met, following feature A11 above. Also, it may be configured to execute cancellation if the timing of the execution of the predetermined condition is early, and not execute cancellation if the timing of the execution is late, following feature A12 above.

Feature A14. A game state transition means (a function of executing a winning result corresponding process by the main control device 101) is provided to transition to an advantageous state (BB, VB mode) advantageous to the player when the lottery result of the lottery means is a predetermined specific transition result (BB win or VB win) and a transition pattern combination (a pattern combination corresponding to BB role or VB mode) corresponding to the specific transition result stops at the valid position,
When the lottery result is the specific transition result, the winning state of the specific transition result is carried over until the picture combination for the transition stops at the valid position,
The gaming machine described in feature A1 or feature A2 is characterized in that the specified condition is met when a specified operation (operation of settlement switch 59) is performed by the player after a presentation that the player can recognize or predict is a winning state of the specific transition result or a carryover state of the specific transition result (such as a reach pattern stop, a presentation that notifies or suggests a bonus win, or a premium presentation or other presentation that essentially confirms a bonus win) is executed.

In the above configuration, when the lottery result is a specific transition result or is in a carryover state, an effect that allows the player to recognize or predict this is executed. Therefore, by watching this effect, the player can internally understand that the specific transition result has been won. Then, after such an effect is executed, the player performs a predetermined operation, and a predetermined condition (cancellation condition) is established. For this reason, for example, a player who has become less interested in the specific game action after sensing that the specific transition result has been won and no longer wishes to perform the specific game action can avoid the execution of the specific game action by performing a predetermined operation after the above effect. On the other hand, a player who is highly interested in the specific game action and still wants to see the specific game action even after sensing that the specific transition result has been won can have the specific game action executed by not performing a predetermined operation. In other words, it becomes possible for the player to select whether or not to execute the specific game action again after understanding that the specific transition result has been won.

In addition, with this configuration, the presentation that allows the player to know if a specific transition result has been won and the specific game action are not optional, and both can be executed. This makes it possible to flexibly respond to the desires of players who want to see both.

Feature A15. The gaming machine described in Feature A14 is characterized in that it is equipped with an operation notification execution means (a function for executing the process of step S4603 by the display control device 81) that executes an operation notification (pressing the settlement switch to release the frozen stock) that enables the player to recognize the operation mode of the predetermined operation when the performance is executed or when it is executed.

In the above configuration, the player is instructed on the operations required for cancellation, making it possible for the player to cancel the execution of a specific game action even if the player does not know the cancellation method beforehand. In addition, when the above-mentioned effect is executed, that is, when it becomes possible to cancel the specific game action, an operation notification is executed, making it possible for a player who does not want to execute a specific game action to be informed of the cancellation method in a situation where they would like to know.

Feature A16: A first notification execution means as the operation notification execution means;
A gaming machine as described in feature A15, characterized in that it is equipped with a second notification execution means for executing the operation notification based on the establishment of a predetermined execution condition when the execution of the specific game operation is not set by the specific game operation setting means.

For players who wish to cancel a specific game action, the execution of the operation notification is convenient because it informs them of what to do when the cancellation operation is required. However, on the other hand, for players who did not predict the execution of a specific game action from the above-mentioned presentation or who missed the above-mentioned presentation, it may function as advance notice of the execution of a specific game action, which may diminish the appeal of the specific game action, which is to surprise the player. In this respect, in the present configuration, the operation notification is executed even when the execution of a specific game action is not set, so that the execution of the specific game action is not univocally determined by the execution of the operation notification. As a result, even if the operation notification is executed when the above-mentioned presentation is executed, it is possible to prevent the notification from becoming an advance notice of the specific game action. In other words, it is possible to properly inform the player of the cancellation operation while preventing the presentation effect of the specific game action from decreasing.

This feature may be changed to "a gaming machine according to feature A14, which is characterized in that it is provided with an operation notification execution means (a function for executing the process of step S4603 by the display control device 81) for executing an operation notification that enables the player to recognize the operation mode of the predetermined operation (pressing the settlement switch will release the frozen stock), and the operation notification execution means executes the operation notification based on the establishment of a predetermined execution condition when the execution of the specific game action is not set by the specific game action setting means." In other words, it may be configured not to have a first notification execution means but to have a second notification execution means (not to execute the operation notification when the execution of the specific game action is set, and to execute the operation notification only when the execution of the specific game action is not set).

Feature A17. The gaming machine described in Feature A16, characterized in that the notification modes of the operation notification executed by the first notification execution means and the operation notification executed by the second notification execution means are indistinguishable.

For example, if the notification manner of each operation notification differs, there is a risk that the execution of a specific game action may be detected from the difference, but with this configuration, it is possible to prevent such inconvenience from occurring and enhance the effect of the above feature A16.

Note that the feature "the notification manner of each of the operation notifications is indistinguishable" can also be expressed as "the notification manner of each of the operation notifications is common."

Feature A18. A grasping means for grasping the timing when the predetermined condition is satisfied;
a release switching means for switching whether or not to execute the release by the release means based on a result of the determination by the determination means;
A gaming machine according to any one of features A14 to A17, characterized in that it is equipped with:

In the above configuration, the specific game action is not cancelled uniformly when a predetermined condition (cancellation condition) is met, but rather the timing at which the cancellation condition is met is ascertained, and based on that result, a decision is made as to whether or not to execute the specific game action. This makes it possible to determine whether or not the cancellation condition is met based on the player's will before cancelling the above. This makes it possible to prevent cancellations that are undesirable to the player.

This feature may be configured to grasp the number of games or the period from when the execution of a specific gaming action is set to when a predetermined condition is met, following feature A11 above. Also, it may be configured to execute cancellation if the timing of the execution of the predetermined condition is early, and not execute cancellation if the timing of the execution is late, following feature A12 above.

Feature A19. The gaming machine described in Feature A1 or Feature A2, characterized in that the predetermined condition is met when a plurality of operations are performed by the player, including a first operation (an operation to stop a reach symbol) and a second operation by the player that is different from the first operation (operation of the settlement switch 59).

According to the above configuration, the predetermined condition is met by multiple operations, so that, for example, even if the first operation is performed by chance, the execution of the specific game action will not be cancelled by itself. This makes it possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the execution of the specific game action is cancelled even though the player has no intention of cancelling it.

Any of the configurations described in features A15 to A19 above may be applied to this feature. In this case, further effects can be achieved by applying each configuration.

Feature A20. The gaming machine according to Feature A1 or Feature A2, wherein the release means executes the specific game action if the specific condition is satisfied before the execution timing of the specific game action set by the specific game action setting means after the specified condition is satisfied, and prevents the specific game action from being executed if the specific condition is not satisfied before the execution timing after the specified condition is satisfied.

In the above configuration, when the execution of a specific game action is set, the specific game action will not be executed unless the specific condition is met after the predetermined condition is met. Therefore, a player who does not wish to execute a specific game action can cancel the execution of the specific game action by meeting only the predetermined condition among the above conditions. On the other hand, if the specific condition is met after the predetermined condition is met, the specific game action will be executed. Therefore, even if a player who wishes to execute a specific game action accidentally meets the predetermined condition, the specific game action can be executed by meeting the specific condition. In other words, it is possible to cancel the cancellation of the specific game action. In this way, with this configuration, it is possible to cancel the specific game action, while also providing relief in the event that the cancellation operation is performed by mistake.

Feature A21. The gaming machine described in Feature A20, wherein the release means releases the setting of the specific game action or the execution of the specific game action by the specific game action execution means if the specific condition is not satisfied by a predetermined timing prior to the execution timing after the specific condition is satisfied.

In the above configuration, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the execution of a specific game action is cancelled, and when the specific condition is satisfied thereafter, the cancellation is invalidated. Instead of cancelling the execution of the specific game action when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the execution of the specific game action is cancelled after a period during which cancellation (cancellation of cancellation) is possible has elapsed. For example, if the configuration is such that the cancellation process of the specific game action is executed once when the predetermined condition is satisfied, and then the invalidation process of the cancellation process is executed when the specific condition is satisfied, it is necessary to execute the cancellation process and the invalidation process, respectively. In this respect, in the present configuration, when the specific condition is satisfied after the predetermined condition is satisfied, neither the cancellation process nor the invalidation process is executed, and it is sufficient to simply maintain the initial execution setting as it is. Therefore, the processing load required for the control process can be significantly reduced. In addition, although the cancellation process is necessary when the specific condition is not satisfied after the predetermined condition is satisfied, the invalidation process itself is not executed, so the configuration for this can be omitted. Therefore, it is also possible to simplify the configuration.

Furthermore, in a configuration in which a specific game action is temporarily cancelled and then invalidated when a specific condition is met, the problem arises of how to ensure consistency with the initial settings made by the specific game action setting means (such as the timing of execution of the specific game action) when the cancellation is invalidated (when the specific game action is restored), and measures to this end are required. In this regard, with the present configuration, when a predetermined condition is met and then a specific condition is met, it is sufficient to execute the specific game action according to the initial settings made by the specific game action setting means, so the above problem does not arise and a simple configuration can be achieved.

This feature can also be expressed as "the release means does not release the execution of the specific game action if the specific condition is satisfied by a predetermined timing prior to the execution timing after the specified condition is satisfied, and releases the execution of the specific game action if the specific condition is not satisfied by the predetermined timing."

Feature A22. A game state transition means (a function of executing a winning result corresponding process by the main control device 101) is provided to transition to an advantageous state (BB, VB mode) advantageous to the player when the lottery result of the lottery means is a predetermined specific transition result (BB win or VB win) and a transition pattern combination (a pattern combination corresponding to BB role or VB mode) corresponding to the specific transition result stops at the valid position,
When the lottery result is the specific transition result, the winning state of the specific transition result is carried over until the picture combination for the transition stops at the valid position,
The gaming machine described in feature A20 or feature A21, characterized in that the specified condition is met when an effect that allows the player to recognize or predict that the specific transition result is a winning state or a carryover state thereof (an effect that essentially confirms a bonus win, such as a reach pattern stop, an effect that notifies or suggests a bonus win, or a premium effect) is executed.

According to the above configuration, overlapping of the performance that allows the player to recognize the specific transition result and the specific game action is suppressed, and the specific game action can be suppressed from being executed while the player is aware in advance of winning the specific transition result. For example, it is possible that the interest in the specific game action decreases after the player realizes that the specific transition result has been won, and such a player may feel annoyed if the specific game action is executed again. In this respect, according to the present configuration, the execution of such a performance establishes a predetermined condition, and if the specific condition is not established thereafter, the specific game action is not executed, so it is possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of the above inconvenience. On the other hand, for a player who is highly interested in the specific game action and still wants to see the specific game action even after realizing that the specific transition result has been won, the specific game action can be executed by establishing the specific condition after the establishment of the predetermined condition. In other words, according to the present configuration, it is possible to suppress the cancellation that is undesirable for the player without compromising the convenience for the player who does not want to execute the specific game action.

Feature A23. A gaming machine according to any one of features A20 to A22, characterized in that it is equipped with a cancellation notification execution means (a function for executing the process of step S5502 by the display control device 81) that executes a cancellation notification that enables a player to recognize that a cancellation operation for canceling the execution of the specific game action has been performed or that the specific game action will not be executed when the predetermined condition is met.

In the above configuration, by executing the release notification, a player who wants to release the execution of a specific game action can be informed that the release operation has been accepted and that no further operation is required. On the other hand, a player who does not want to release the action is notified that a specific condition needs to be met, which can prevent the inconvenience of a specific game action being released against the player's will.

Feature A24. A gaming machine according to any one of Features A20 to A23, characterized in that it is equipped with a specific notification execution means (a function of executing the process of step S5502 by the display control device 81) that can cause the specific gaming action to be executed when the predetermined condition is met, or that executes a specific notification that enables the player to recognize the operation for that purpose.

With the above configuration, even if the player does not know in advance that a specific game action can be executed or the operations required for that, it is possible to appropriately cancel the release of the specific game action when the player does not want to release the specific game action. Note that when this feature is applied to the above feature A23, the release notification and the specific notification may be performed simultaneously or separately.

Feature A25. A gaming machine according to any one of features A20 to A24, characterized in that it is provided with a means for establishing the predetermined condition when a first operation (operation of stop switches 42 to 44 to stop reach eyes) is performed by a player, and establishing the specific condition when a second operation (operation of settlement switch 59) different from the first operation is performed by the player.

For example, if the operation that establishes a predetermined condition (first operation) and the operation that establishes a specific condition (second operation) are the same operation, a player who wishes to cancel the execution of a specific game action may not be sure whether the first operation has been accepted by the gaming machine when performing the first operation, and may then experience an inconvenience in that if the player were to repeat the same operation again, the cancellation would be canceled by the operation that was intended to be cancellation. In this regard, with the present configuration, the two operations are different, so that the cancellation is not canceled even if the first operation is repeated, thereby preventing the occurrence of the above inconvenience.

Feature A26. A plurality of types of the specific game actions (first freeze effect to third freeze effect) are set,
The specific game action setting means selects one of the plurality of types of specific game actions and sets the execution of the selected specific game action when the specific trigger occurs;
A gaming machine described in any of features A1 to A25, characterized in that the release means is provided with a means (a function of executing a freeze release process by the main control unit 101) that prevents the setting or execution of a specific specific game action (third freeze effect) from being released even if the specified condition is satisfied, when the specific game action set for execution by the specific game action setting means is a specific specific game action (third freeze effect) among the multiple types of specific game actions.

According to the above configuration, even if the release condition for a specific game action is met, the execution of some specific game actions is not released, which prevents excessive restrictions on the execution of specific game actions. This ensures opportunities to perform specific game actions and ensures the significance of providing specific game actions. Furthermore, for example, by setting specific game actions that are not subject to release as specific game actions that are expected to be of high interest to players, it is possible to guarantee their execution even if the player accidentally meets the release condition, and to prevent the player from becoming greatly disappointed.

Feature A27: The plurality of types of specific game actions include a first specific game action (a first freeze effect, a second freeze effect) and a second specific game action (a third freeze effect) having a lower selection probability than the first specific game action;
A gaming machine described in feature A26, characterized in that the specific specific game action is the second specific game action.

In this configuration, by configuring whether or not a specific game action is subject to cancellation depending on its selection probability (occurrence probability), it is possible to distinguish whether or not each specific game action can be cancelled in relation to the level of interest of the player. As a result, even if a player mistakenly meets the cancellation condition for a specific game action that is expected to interest the player highly, it is possible to guarantee that the action will be performed, and it is possible to prevent the player from being greatly disappointed.

Feature A28. A game state transition means (a function of executing a winning result corresponding process by the main control device 101) is provided to transition to an advantageous state (BB, VB mode) advantageous to the player when the lottery result of the lottery means is a predetermined specific transition result (BB win or VB win) and a transition pattern combination (a pattern combination corresponding to BB role or VB mode) corresponding to the specific transition result stops at the valid position,
When the lottery result is the specific transition result, the winning state of the specific transition result is carried over until the picture combination for the transition stops at the valid position,
A gaming machine described in any of features A1 to A27, characterized in that it is equipped with an alerting means for alerting that the specific transition result is a winning result when the release is performed by the release means or when the release is performed when the specific transition result is in a winning state or in a carried-over state.

According to the above configuration, when canceling a specific game action, the player can be informed that he or she has won a specific transition result. This allows the player to be made aware that a specific transition result has been reached before canceling the execution of the specific game action, and more effectively prevents the execution of the specific game action from being cancelled even when the player is not aware that the result has been reached.

It is possible to apply the technical ideas shown in any one of the configurations of features B1 to B19, features C1 to C23, features D1 to D16, features E1 to E12, and features F1 to F17 individually to each of the configurations of features A1 to A28 above, or to apply each technical idea in combination. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Characteristics Group B>
Feature B1. A plurality of rotating bodies (reels 32L, 32M, and 32R) on which a plurality of types of pictures are applied in the circumferential direction;
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that allows some of the patterns on each of the rotating bodies to be viewed;
A start operation means (start lever 41) that starts rotation of each of the rotating bodies when operated;
a stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the stop operation means is operated;
A drive control means (a function of executing a reel control process by the main control device 101) that starts rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the start operation means is operated and stops rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the stop operation means is operated;
A lottery means (a function of executing lottery processing by the main control device 101) for performing a lottery to determine whether or not to grant a special benefit to a player based on the operation of the start operation means;
a bonus awarding means (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) capable of awarding a bonus corresponding to a predetermined result when a lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position visible through the display unit;
A gaming machine comprising:
The game state includes a first game state (normal game state) and a second game state (BB state or VB mode) which is more advantageous to a player than the first game state,
A transition determination means (a function of executing a winning result response process by the main control device 101) for determining whether a predetermined transition condition (BB winning or 4th or 5th re-play winning) is established or not when the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined specific transition result (BB winning or VB winning);
a game state transition means (a function of executing a winning result response process by the main control device 101) for transitioning a game state from the first game state to the second game state when the transition determination means determines that the transition condition is satisfied;
a first effect execution means (a function of executing a reel control process by the main control device 101) for executing a first effect (a stop display of a specific reach pattern) that allows a player to recognize that the specific transition result has been achieved, when a predetermined condition is established by a predetermined timing before the transition to the second gaming state after the lottery result of the lottery means becomes the specific transition result (when a stop operation for stopping a reach pattern is performed);
A second effect execution means (a function of executing a rotation effect process by the main control device 101) that executes a second effect (freeze effect) different from the first effect, which is recognizable by a player as a specific transition result, after the predetermined timing and before the transition to the second game state;
A second performance limiting means (a function of executing a freeze release process and a freeze return process by the main control device 101) capable of limiting the execution of the second performance by the second performance executing means when the first performance is executed by the first performance executing means;
A gaming machine comprising:

In the above configuration, the first and second effects are set as effects that allow the player to recognize that a specific transition result has been reached, that is, as confirmation effects of the specific transition result. Diversifying the confirmation effects in this way broadens the range of effects and makes it possible to improve interest. However, a confirmation effect has the characteristic that a player can understand the specific transition result if even one confirmation effect is performed, and if multiple such effects are performed, some players may find it annoying and may actually reduce the effect of the effect. In this regard, in the present configuration, after the lottery result is a specific transition result, if a predetermined condition is met by a predetermined timing before the transition to the second game state (advantageous state), the first effect is executed as the confirmation effect, and the execution of the second effect is restricted. This makes it possible to prevent the first and second effects from being executed in duplicate for one win to the specific transition result.

Feature B2. The gaming machine described in Feature B1, wherein the second effect restriction means does not execute the second effect if the specified condition is met by the specified timing.

With the above configuration, when the first performance is executed due to the satisfaction of a predetermined condition, the second performance is not executed, which makes it possible to effectively prevent the execution of multiple confirmed performances.

Feature B3. When the lottery result of the lottery means is the specific transition result, an execution timing setting means (a function of executing a BB mode winning process and a VB mode winning process by the main control device 101) is provided to set the execution timing of the second performance;
The gaming machine according to feature B2, wherein the predetermined timing is the execution timing set by the execution timing setting means.

According to the above configuration, when the result of the lottery by the lottery means is a specific transition result, the execution timing of the second performance is set, and the set timing becomes the deadline for allowing the specified condition to be satisfied. With this configuration, it is possible to ensure a long grace period for satisfying the condition (the condition for not executing the second performance) while appropriately securing the execution period of the second performance when the specified condition is not satisfied.

Feature B4. A gaming machine according to Feature B2 or Feature B3, characterized in that it is equipped with a notification execution means (a function of executing the process of step S3813 by the main control device 101) that executes a predetermined notification (freeze stock has been released) that allows the player to recognize that the second performance will not be executed when the second performance restriction means prevents the second performance from being executed.

In the above configuration, if the second performance is not executed when there is a possibility that it will be executed, a notification is issued to inform the player of this. This prevents the player from suspecting a malfunction of the gaming machine, for example, when the second performance is executed on an adjacent gaming machine but not on the player's own gaming machine. In addition, by issuing the notification, the existence of the second performance can be notified to players who have satisfied the specified conditions without knowing about the existence of the second performance or that the second performance can be executed.

Feature B5: A grasping means for grasping the timing when the predetermined condition is satisfied (a function for executing the processes of steps S3802 to S3806, S3803, and S3812 by the main control device 101);
A notification switching means (a function of executing the process of step S3812 by the main control device 101) that switches whether or not the predetermined notification is to be executed by the notification execution means based on the result of the determination by the determination means;
The gaming machine according to feature B4, characterized in that it is equipped with:

In the above configuration, the timing at which the predetermined condition is met is ascertained, and whether or not to issue the predetermined notification is switched based on the result. This makes it possible to determine whether or not the player who met the predetermined condition knew that the second performance could not be executed is the player who issued the notification. For example, by configuring the system so that the notification is not issued to such players, it is possible to prevent the notification from interfering with the game, while notifying other players of the existence of the second performance. Note that if the predetermined condition is met by the fulfillment of multiple conditions, the "timing of fulfillment" in this feature can be interpreted as the timing at which the final condition is met.

Feature B6. The gaming machine described in Feature B5, characterized in that the grasping means grasps the number of games or the period from when the lottery result of the lottery means becomes the specific transition result until the predetermined condition is met.

In the above configuration, whether or not to issue a specified notification is switched depending on the number of games or the period from when the lottery result becomes a specific transition result until the specified condition is met. This makes it possible to switch the notification based on whether the specified condition is met promptly after the specific transition result is reached.

Feature B7: When the lottery result of the lottery means is the specific transition result, an execution timing setting means (a function of executing a BB mode winning process and a VB mode winning process by the main control device 101) is provided for setting the execution timing of the second performance;
The gaming machine described in feature B5 or feature B6, wherein the notification switching means executes the predetermined notification when the timing of the specified condition grasped by the grasping means is before the execution timing of the second performance set by the execution timing setting means and after a specific timing that is before the execution timing, and does not execute the predetermined notification when the timing of the specified condition grasped by the grasping means is before the specific timing.

In the above configuration, if the specified condition is met late, a specified notification is executed, as it is highly likely that the player established the second effect without knowing about its existence or that it can be cancelled. This makes it possible to properly inform the player who established the effect without knowing about it of the existence of the second effect, etc. On the other hand, if the specified condition is met early, the notification is not executed, as it is highly likely that the player established the effect with knowledge. This makes it possible to prevent the notification from being annoying to players who established the effect with knowledge.

When this feature is applied to feature B6 above, the configuration of this feature can also be expressed as "the notification switching means executes the predetermined notification when the number of games or the period grasped by the grasping means is equal to or greater than a predetermined number of games or a predetermined period, and does not execute the predetermined notification when the number of games or the period grasped by the grasping means is less than the predetermined number of games or the predetermined period."

Feature B8. The game machine is provided with an operation means (adjustment switch 59) that is different from the start operation means and the stop operation means and can be operated by a player;
A gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B7, wherein the predetermined condition is established when a predetermined operation is performed by the operating means.

According to the above configuration, the operation means used to establish the predetermined condition is different from the start operation means and the stop operation means that are easily touched by the player, so that it is possible to prevent the player from unintentionally performing the predetermined operation.

Feature B9. The gaming machine described in Feature B1, wherein the second effect restriction means does not execute the second effect if a predetermined condition is met by the predetermined timing and a specific condition different from the predetermined condition is met (if the settlement switch 59 is operated).

In the above configuration, if both the predetermined condition and the specific condition are met, the second performance is not executed. In this case, a player who only needs the first performance only needs to meet both the predetermined condition and the specific condition, and a player who actually wanted to see the second performance but accidentally met the predetermined condition does not need to meet the specific condition after the predetermined condition is met. Similarly, a player who wants to see both the first and second performances can execute both final performances by meeting only the predetermined condition. In other words, this configuration makes it possible to prevent overlapping execution of final performances, while also rescuing players who accidentally met the predetermined condition when they wanted to see the second performance, and to meet the needs of players who want to see both the first and second performances.

Feature B10. The gaming machine described in Feature B9 is characterized in that it is equipped with a specific notification execution means (a function for executing the process of step S4603 by the display control device 81) that executes a specific notification (pressing the settlement switch to release the freeze stock) that allows the player to recognize that the second performance can be prevented from being executed when the predetermined condition is met.

The above configuration makes it possible to prompt the player to perform an operation to prevent the second performance from being executed (an operation to satisfy the second condition), thereby making it possible to effectively prevent the execution of multiple confirmed performances.

Feature B11. The specific condition is established when a specific operation is performed by a player.
The gaming machine described in feature B10, wherein the specific notification is a notification that indicates that the second presentation will no longer be executed when the specific operation is performed and that enables the player to recognize the operation manner of the specific operation.

In the above configuration, the player is informed of the specific operation to prevent the second performance from being executed, so the player does not have to worry about the operation, and it is possible to more effectively prevent the execution of the final performance in duplicate.

Feature B12. The gaming machine described in Feature B10 or Feature B11, characterized in that the specific notification is not executed if the predetermined condition is not met.

With the above configuration, the specific notification serves as advance notice that the second performance will be executed, making it possible to prevent the specific notification from essentially becoming a confirmed performance.

Feature B13. The game machine is provided with an operation means (adjustment switch 59) that is different from the start operation means and the stop operation means and can be operated by a player;
The gaming machine according to any one of features B9 to B12, wherein at least one of the predetermined condition and the specific condition is established by an operation using the operating means.

With the above configuration, at least one of the predetermined condition and the specific condition is established by an operation using an operation means other than the start operation means and the stop operation means that are easily touched by the player, so that it is possible to prevent the player from unintentionally establishing those conditions.

Feature B14. The gaming machine described in Feature B1, characterized in that the second performance restriction means executes the second performance if the predetermined condition and a specific condition different from the predetermined condition are met by the predetermined timing (if the settlement switch 59 is operated), and does not execute the second performance if the predetermined condition is met by the predetermined timing and the specific condition is not met.

In the above configuration, if only the predetermined condition is met by the specified timing, the second performance is not executed, and if both the predetermined condition and the specific condition are met by the specified timing, the second performance is executed. In this case, a player who only needs the first performance can execute the first operation and not execute the second operation. On the other hand, a player who actually wanted to see the second performance but accidentally met the predetermined condition can simply meet the specific condition after the predetermined condition is met. Similarly, a player who wants to see both the first and second performances can also meet both the predetermined and specific conditions. In this way, with this configuration, it is possible to rescue players who accidentally met the predetermined condition even though they wanted to see the second performance, while suppressing the overlapping implementation of the final performance, and to meet the needs of players who want to see both the first and second performances.

Feature B15. The gaming machine described in Feature B14 is characterized in that it is equipped with a specific notification execution means (a function for executing the processing of step S5502 by the display control device 81) that executes a specific notification that enables the player to recognize that the second performance will not be executed when the predetermined condition is met.

In the above configuration, by executing the specific notification, a player who has selected to execute the first performance can be informed that the second performance will not be executed and that no operation is required to establish a specific condition thereafter. On the other hand, a player who wants to see both the first and second performances is notified that a specific condition needs to be established, which also increases convenience for such players.

Feature B16. A gaming machine according to Feature B14 or Feature B15, characterized in that it is capable of executing the second performance when the predetermined condition is met, or is equipped with a specific notification execution means (a function of executing the process of step S5502 by the display control device 81) that executes a specific notification that enables the player to recognize the operation for that purpose.

With the above configuration, even if the player does not know beforehand that both the first and second effects can be executed or the operations required for that, the player can appropriately perform the necessary operations when he or she wants to see both effects. Note that when this feature is applied to the above feature B15, the notification of the same feature and this feature may be performed simultaneously, or each may be performed separately.

Feature B17: The game machine is provided with an operation means (adjustment switch 59) that is different from the start operation means and the stop operation means and that can be operated by a player;
The gaming machine according to any one of features B14 to B16, wherein at least one of the predetermined condition and the specific condition is established by an operation using the operating means.

With the above configuration, at least one of the predetermined condition and the specific condition is established by an operation using an operation means other than the start operation means and the stop operation means that are easily touched by the player, so that it is possible to prevent the player from unintentionally establishing those conditions.

Feature B18. A gaming machine according to any one of Features B1 to B17, characterized in that the predetermined condition is met when a predetermined operation is performed by the player.

According to the above configuration, the player can perform a specific operation to switch between the first and second effects, allowing the player to select the effect they want to see while preventing overlapping confirmed effects.

Feature B19. The gaming machine described in Feature B18, wherein the predetermined operation is an operation using the stop operation means.

In the gaming machine of this configuration, the rotation of the rotating body is started by operating the start operation means, and the rotation of the rotating body is stopped by operating the stop operation means, thereby progressing the game. Under this premise, by configuring the machine to determine whether the first or second presentation is to be prioritized by a predetermined operation using the stop operation means, it is possible to easily perform the selection operation while playing the game normally, making it possible to achieve a configuration that makes it easy to perform the selection operation.

Note that the technical ideas shown in any one of the features A1 to A28, features C1 to C23, features D1 to D16, features E1 to E12, and features F1 to F17 can be applied individually to each of the features B1 to B19 above, or the technical ideas can be applied in combination. When applying the technical ideas in combination, they can also be combined across feature groups.

<Characteristics Group C>
Feature C1. A plurality of rotating bodies (reels 32L, 32M, and 32R) on which a plurality of types of pictures are applied in the circumferential direction;
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that allows some of the patterns on each of the rotating bodies to be viewed;
A start operation means (start lever 41) that starts rotation of each of the rotating bodies when operated;
a stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the stop operation means is operated;
A drive control means (a function of executing a reel control process by the main control device 101) that starts rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the start operation means is operated and stops rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the stop operation means is operated;
A lottery means (a function of executing lottery processing by the main control device 101) for performing a lottery to determine whether or not to grant a special benefit to a player based on the operation of the start operation means;
a bonus awarding means (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) capable of awarding a bonus corresponding to a predetermined result when a lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position visible through the display unit;
A gaming machine comprising:
The game state includes a first game state (normal game state) and a second game state (BB state or VB mode) which is more advantageous to a player than the first game state,
A transition determination means (a function of executing a winning result response process by the main control device 101) for determining whether a predetermined transition condition (BB winning or 4th or 5th replay winning) is established or not when the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined specific transition result (BB winning or VB winning);
a game state transition means (a function of executing a winning result response process by the main control device 101) for transitioning a game state from the first game state to the second game state when the transition determination means determines that the transition condition is satisfied;
A specific effect setting means (a function of executing a BB mode winning process or a VB mode winning process by the main control device 101) sets a specific effect (freeze effect) that allows a player to recognize that the specific transition result has been achieved in a specific game that is later than the game in which the specific transition result has been achieved and that is prior to the second game state, in the case where the lottery result of the lottery means is the specific transition result, so that the specific transition result can be achieved when the lottery result of the lottery means is the specific transition result;
a specific effect execution means (a function of executing a rotation effect process by the main control device 101) for executing the specific effect in the specific game when a first operation (a stop operation at a timing when a reach eye does not stop) is performed by a player in a specific situation in which the execution of the specific effect is set by the specific effect setting means;
A specific effect limiting means (a function of executing a freeze release process by the main control device 101) capable of limiting the execution of the specific effect when a second operation (a stop operation at the timing when the reach eye stops) different from the first operation is performed by the player in the specific situation;
A gaming machine comprising:

In the above configuration, a specific effect is set as an effect when the lottery result of the lottery means is a specific transition result. This specific effect allows the player to recognize that the specific transition result has been reached, and functions as a confirmation effect for the specific transition result. Therefore, by looking at the confirmation effect, the player can sense that the specific transition result has been reached internally. However, there are players who sense that the specific transition result has been reached from other effects, etc., and think that there is no need to see the confirmation effect again, and it is desirable to meet the needs of such players. In this regard, in the present configuration, when a specific transition result is reached in the lottery process, a confirmation effect is set to be performed in a specific game after the game in which the result was reached, thereby ensuring a time grace period between setting the execution of the confirmation effect and actually executing it. Then, by utilizing this period and executing the second operation within the period, the execution of the confirmation effect is restricted. Therefore, it is possible to meet the needs of players who do not want to see the confirmation effect. On the other hand, if the first operation is executed within the above period, the confirmation effect is executed as originally set, which is also convenient for players who want to see the confirmation effect. In other words, if each player selects and executes the first operation and the second operation according to their preferences and state of mind at each time, they can change whether or not the confirmation effect is executed, making it possible to realize a gaming machine that is easy for any player to play.

Feature C2. The drive control means starts the rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the start operation means is operated, and stops the rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the stop operation means is operated, as a normal game operation;
A specific drive control means (a function of executing a rotation effect process by the main control device 101) controls each of the rotating bodies so that a specific game action (freeze effect) in which the start or progress of the normal game action is restricted is performed,
A gaming machine according to feature C1, characterized in that the specific presentation is the specific gaming action.

Specific game actions can enhance the game presentation and improve the presentation effect, but on the other hand, they also restrict the start or progress of normal game actions, imposing restrictions on the player that prevent the player from progressing in the game for a certain period of time. For this reason, some players may not wish to perform specific game actions. By applying the configuration of feature C1 above to such a configuration, it can be made useful for players who do not wish to perform specific game actions.

Feature C3. The gaming machine according to Feature C1 or Feature C2, wherein the specific effect restriction means prevents the specific effect from being executed when the second operation is performed in the specific situation.

According to the above configuration, by performing the second operation, it is possible to prevent the previously set confirmation effect from being executed, making it a useful configuration for players who do not want the confirmation effect.

Feature C4: The specific performance execution means executes a first specific performance as the specific performance;
a second specific effect execution means for executing a second specific effect (short freeze effect) which is different from the first specific effect and which allows a player to recognize that the second operation has been performed in the specific situation,
The gaming machine according to feature C3, wherein the second specific effect has a shorter duration than the first specific effect or is an effect that can be ended by the player's operation.

For example, if the configuration were to cancel the execution of the confirmation effect itself when the second operation is performed, even players who accidentally perform the second operation would not be able to see the confirmation effect, which would cause the inconvenience of making it difficult to detect the specific transition result due to an incorrect operation. Therefore, this configuration takes such players into consideration and is configured to execute a different confirmation effect (second specific effect) with a shorter effect period than the initially set confirmation effect (first specific effect) when the second operation is performed. In this case, even for players who do not want the confirmation effect, it is less annoying than if the first specific effect were to be executed. In other words, this configuration allows players who unintentionally perform the second operation to see the confirmation effect, while also being considerate of players who do not want the confirmation effect.

This configuration is particularly effective when the first specific effect is a specific game action (one that cannot be ended by the player's will), as in feature C2 above. In this case, the second specific effect may be a specific game action, or may be an effect other than a specific game action (for example, an image effect that can be ended by the player's will). In the former case, the second specific effect may be a specific game action with a shorter effect period (execution period) than the specific game action as the first specific effect (for example, the first specific effect is a long freeze and the second specific effect is a short freeze). On the other hand, in the latter case, the second specific effect does not necessarily have to be a shorter effect period (execution period) than the specific game action as the first specific effect, and may be one that can be ended by the player's will. This feature can also be expressed as "providing a specific notification execution means for executing a specific notification (short freeze effect) that is different from the specific effect and notifies the player that the specific transition result has been won when the second operation is performed in the specific situation, and the specific notification can be ended by the player's operation."

Feature C5. A game device includes an operation determination unit that determines whether the first operation or the second operation has been performed in one or more predetermined games prior to the execution timing of the specific effect in the specific situation,
The gaming machine described in feature C3 or feature C4, wherein the specific effect restriction means prevents the specific effect from being executed when the operation determination means determines that the second operation has been performed.

In the above configuration, the entire period from when the execution of a specific effect is set to when that effect is executed is not the subject of operation monitoring, but only some of the games. As a result, the player only needs to select whether or not to perform the second operation in some of the games, and for example, a player who wants to execute a specific effect does not need to be careful not to perform the second operation throughout the entire period. This makes it easier for the player to concentrate on the game. Also, by only monitoring some of the games, it is possible to reduce the processing load of the control process.

This feature may further include the feature that "the specific performance restriction means executes the specific performance when the operation determination means determines that the first operation has been performed."

Feature C6: When the second operation is performed, a cancellation notification execution means (a function for executing the process of step S3813 by the main control device 101) capable of executing a cancellation notification (freeze stock has been cancelled) that allows the player to recognize that the specific performance will not be executed;
A grasping means for grasping the execution timing of the second operation (a function for executing the processes of steps S3802 to S3806, S3803, and S3812 by the main control device 101);
A notification switching means (a function of executing the process of step S3812 by the main control device 101) that switches whether or not the cancellation notification is to be executed by the cancellation notification execution means based on the result of the determination by the determination means;
A gaming machine according to any one of features C3 to C5, characterized in that it is equipped with:

For a player who performed the second operation with the intention of canceling a specific effect, the notification that the cancel operation has been accepted is convenient. However, for a player who performed the second operation by accident without the intention of canceling, the notification is that a specific effect that could have been seen has been prevented, which may lead to disappointment for the player. In this respect, in this configuration, the timing of the execution of the second operation is grasped, and whether or not the above notification is made is switched based on the result. This makes it possible to make the above notification after determining whether the execution of the second operation is based on the player's intention, and to notify a player who intentionally canceled the execution of a specific effect that the cancellation operation has been accepted while suppressing disappointment for a player who unintentionally canceled the execution of the specific effect. Note that, if the second operation is made up of multiple operations, the "execution timing" in this feature can be interpreted as the execution timing of the final operation.

Feature C7. The gaming machine described in Feature C6, characterized in that the grasping means grasps the number of games or the period from when the execution of the specific effect is set by the specific effect setting means to when the second operation is executed.

In the above configuration, whether or not to issue a cancellation notification is switched depending on the number of games or the period from when the execution of the specific effect is set until the second operation is executed. This makes it possible to switch the cancellation notification based on whether the second operation is performed promptly after the execution of the specific effect is set. This makes it possible to appropriately issue a notification depending on whether or not the operation is intended to not execute the specific effect.

Feature C8. The gaming machine according to Feature C6 or Feature C7, wherein the notification switching means executes the release notification when the execution timing of the second operation grasped by the grasping means is earlier than a predetermined timing that precedes the execution timing of the specific effect set by the specific effect setting means, and does not execute the release notification when the execution timing of the second operation grasped by the grasping means is after the predetermined timing.

In the above configuration, if the second operation is performed promptly after the special effect is set, it is assumed that a player who knows that the execution of the special effect can be cancelled and knows how to do so has performed the second operation with the intention of cancelling it, and a notification is issued that the special effect will not be executed. On the other hand, if the second operation is performed late after the special effect is set, it is assumed that a player who does not know that the execution of the special effect can be cancelled and knows how to cancel it has performed the second operation by chance without the intention of cancelling it, and the above notification is not issued. This makes it possible to appropriately determine whether or not the cancellation was intentional, and to decide whether or not to issue a notification.

When this feature is applied to feature C7, the configuration of this feature can also be expressed as "the notification switching means causes the cancellation notification to be executed by the cancellation notification execution means when the number of games or the period grasped by the grasping means is less than a predetermined number of games or less than a predetermined period, and causes the cancellation notification to not be executed by the cancellation notification execution means when the number of games or the period grasped by the grasping means is equal to or greater than the predetermined number of games or the predetermined period."

Feature C9. A grasping means for grasping the execution timing of the second operation;
A gaming machine described in any of features C3 to C8, characterized in that the specific performance restriction means is provided with a release switching means for switching whether or not to prevent the specific performance from being executed based on the result of the determination by the determination means.

In the above configuration, the execution of the second operation does not uniformly disable the specific effect, but rather the timing of the execution of the second operation is grasped, and based on the result, the execution of the specific effect is switched to whether or not to be disabled. This makes it possible to disable the execution of the specific effect after determining whether the execution of the second operation is based on the player's intention, and to prevent the occurrence of cancellations that are undesirable to the player.

This feature may be configured to know the number of games or the period from when the execution of the specific effect is set to when the second operation is executed, following feature C7 above. Also, this feature may be configured to cancel when the second operation is executed early, and not cancel when the execution timing is late, following feature C8 above.

Feature C10. The gaming machine described in Feature C1 or Feature C2, characterized in that the specific effect restriction means prevents the specific effect from being executed when the second operation and a third operation (operation of the settlement switch 59) that is the same as the second operation or different from the second operation are performed in the specific situation.

In the above configuration, the execution of the special effect is cancelled not only when the second operation is performed, but also when both the second operation and the third operation are performed. This means that even if a player accidentally performs the second operation, the special effect is not immediately cancelled, preventing the player from cancelling it unintentionally. On the other hand, a player who does not wish to have the special effect executed can avoid the execution of the special effect by executing both the second operation and the third operation.

In this feature, the third operation may be the first operation. If a player who has mistakenly performed the second operation wishes to correct it and express a desire to execute a specific effect, it will be easy for the player to understand if the correction can be made using the first operation, which was originally positioned as the operation to desire the execution of the specific effect.

Feature C11. The specific performance execution means executes a first specific performance as the specific performance;
a second specific effect execution means for executing a second specific effect (short freeze effect) that is different from the first specific effect and that allows a player to recognize that the second operation or the third operation has been performed in the specific situation,
The gaming machine according to feature C10, wherein the second specific effect has a shorter duration than the first specific effect or is an effect that can be ended by a player's operation.

According to this configuration, it is possible to obtain the same effect as the above-mentioned feature C4. In addition, this configuration is particularly effective when the first specific effect is a specific game action (one that cannot be ended by the player's will) as in the above-mentioned feature C2. In this case, the second specific effect may be a specific game action, or may be an effect other than a specific game action (for example, an image effect that can be ended by the player's will). In the former case, the second specific effect may be a specific game action with a shorter effect period (execution period) than the specific game action as the first specific effect (for example, the first specific effect is a long freeze and the second specific effect is a short freeze). On the other hand, in the latter case, the second specific effect does not necessarily have to be a shorter effect period (execution period) than the specific game action as the first specific effect, and may be one that can be ended by operating the start operation means.

Feature C12. The gaming machine described in Feature C11, wherein the second specific effect execution means executes the second specific effect in a game prior to the specific game.

For example, if the first and second specific effects are executed simultaneously, the player will have to choose between them. In that case, it is possible to execute the first and second specific effects simultaneously, but this may increase the control load and make it difficult for the player to understand. In this regard, with the present configuration, the first specific effect is executed in a game prior to the specific game, which prevents the above inconvenience from occurring and provides a convenient configuration for players who want to see both effects.

Feature C13. A gaming machine according to any one of features C10 to C12, characterized in that it is provided with an operation notification execution means (a function for executing the process of step S4603 by the display control device 81) that executes an operation notification (pressing the settlement switch will release the freeze stock) that allows the player to recognize that the specific effect will not be executed if the third operation is performed when the second operation is performed in the specific situation.

In the above configuration, when the second operation is performed, the player is notified that performing the third operation will prevent the specific effect from being executed. This allows a player who accidentally performs the second operation without intending to cancel to be careful not to perform the third operation, making it possible to prevent cancellations that are undesirable to the player.

Feature C14. A grasping means for grasping the execution timing of the third operation;
A gaming machine described in any of features C10 to C13, characterized in that it is provided with a release switching means for switching whether or not to execute the release by the specific performance restriction means based on the result of the determination by the determination means.

In the above configuration, the execution of the third operation does not uniformly disable the specific effect, but rather the timing of the execution of the third operation is grasped, and based on the result, the execution of the specific effect is switched to whether or not to be disabled. This makes it possible to disable the execution of the specific effect after determining whether or not the execution of the second and third operations is based on the player's intention, making it possible to prevent the occurrence of cancellations that are undesirable to the player.

This feature may be configured to know the number of games or the period from when the execution of the specific effect is set to when the third operation is executed, following feature C7 above. Also, this feature may be configured to cancel when the execution timing of the third operation is early, and not cancel when the execution timing is late, following feature C8 above.

Feature C15. The gaming machine according to Feature C1 or Feature C2, characterized in that the specific effect restriction means executes the specific effect if a third operation different from the second operation is performed after the second operation is performed in the specific situation and before the execution timing of the specific effect set by the specific effect setting means, and prevents the specific effect from being executed if the third operation is not performed after the second operation is performed in the specific situation and before the execution timing.

In the above configuration, when the execution of a specific effect is set, the specific effect will not be executed unless the third operation is executed after the second operation is executed. Therefore, a player who does not want the specific effect to be executed can cancel the execution of the specific effect by performing only the second operation of the above operations, and the effort required for cancellation can be reduced. On the other hand, if the third operation is executed after the second operation is executed, the specific effect will be executed. Therefore, even if a player who wants to execute a specific effect accidentally performs the second operation, the specific effect can be executed by performing the third operation. In other words, it is possible to cancel the cancellation of the specific effect. In this way, with this configuration, it is possible to simplify the cancellation operation for players who do not want the specific effect to be executed, while providing relief to players who want the specific effect to be executed even if the cancellation operation is performed by mistake.

Feature C16. The gaming machine according to Feature C15, wherein the specific effect restriction means includes a means for canceling the execution of the specific effect (a function for executing the processing of steps S5402 to S5407 by the main control device 101) if the third operation is not performed by a predetermined timing prior to the execution timing of the specific effect set by the specific effect setting means after the second operation is performed in the specific situation.

In the above configuration, in order to realize a mechanism in which the execution of a specific effect is cancelled when the second operation is performed, and the cancellation is then invalidated when the third operation is performed, the execution of the specific effect is not cancelled when the second operation is performed, but rather the execution of the specific effect is cancelled after a period during which cancellation (cancellation of cancellation) is possible has elapsed. For example, if the configuration is such that the cancellation process of the specific effect is executed once when the second operation is performed, and then the cancellation process is invalidated when the third operation is performed, it is necessary to execute the cancellation process and the invalidation process respectively. In this respect, in the present configuration, when the third operation is performed after the second operation, neither the cancellation process nor the invalidation process is executed, and it is sufficient to simply maintain the initial execution setting as it is. Therefore, the processing load required for the control process can be significantly reduced. In addition, although the cancellation process is necessary when the third operation is not performed after the second operation, the invalidation process itself is not executed, so the configuration for it can be omitted. Therefore, it is also possible to simplify the configuration.

Furthermore, in a configuration in which the special effect is first cancelled and then invalidated by executing the third operation, the problem arises as to how to ensure consistency with the initial settings made by the special effect setting means (such as the timing of execution of the special effect) when the cancellation is invalidated (when the special effect is restored), and measures to address this are required. In this regard, with this configuration, when the second and third operations are executed, the special effect is simply executed according to the initial settings made by the special effect setting means, so the above problem does not arise and a simple configuration can be achieved.

This feature can also be expressed as "the specific performance restriction means does not cancel the execution of the specific performance if the third operation is performed by a predetermined timing before the execution timing of the specific performance set by the specific performance setting means after the second operation is performed in the specific situation, and cancels the execution of the specific performance if the third operation is not performed by the predetermined timing."

Feature C17: The specific performance execution means executes a first specific performance as the specific performance;
a second specific effect execution means for executing a second specific effect (short freeze effect) which is different from the first specific effect and which allows a player to recognize that the second operation has been performed in the specific situation,
The gaming machine according to feature C15 or C16, wherein the second specific effect has a shorter duration than the first specific effect or is an effect that can be ended by a player's operation.

According to this configuration, it is possible to obtain the same effect as the above-mentioned feature C4. In addition, this configuration is particularly effective when the first specific effect is a specific game action (one that cannot be ended by the player's will) as in the above-mentioned feature C2. In this case, the second specific effect may be a specific game action, or may be an effect other than a specific game action (for example, an image effect that can be ended by the player's will). In the former case, the second specific effect may be a specific game action with a shorter effect period (execution period) than the specific game action as the first specific effect (for example, the first specific effect is a long freeze and the second specific effect is a short freeze). On the other hand, in the latter case, the second specific effect does not necessarily have to be a shorter effect period (execution period) than the specific game action as the first specific effect, and may be one that can be ended by operating the start operation means.

Feature C18. A gaming machine according to any one of Features C15 to C17, characterized in that it is provided with a cancellation notification execution means (a function for executing the process of step S5502 by the display control device 81) that executes a cancellation notification that enables a player to recognize that a cancellation operation for canceling the execution of the specific effect has been performed or that the specific effect will not be executed when the second operation is performed in the specific situation.

In the above configuration, by executing the cancellation notification, a player who wants to cancel the execution of a specific effect can be informed that the cancellation operation has been accepted and that no further operations are required. On the other hand, a player who does not want to cancel is notified that a third operation needs to be performed, which can prevent the inconvenience of a specific game action being cancelled against the player's will.

Feature C19. A gaming machine according to any one of Features C15 to C18, characterized in that it is capable of executing the specific performance when the second operation is performed in the specific situation, or is equipped with a specific notification execution means (a function of executing the process of step S5502 by the display control device 81) that executes a specific notification that enables the player to recognize the operation for that purpose.

With the above configuration, even if the player does not know in advance that a special effect can be executed or the operations required for that, it is possible to appropriately cancel the release of the special effect when the player does not want to release the special effect. Note that when this feature is applied to the above feature C18, the release notification and the special notification may be performed simultaneously or separately.

Feature C20. A gaming machine according to any one of Features C1 to C19, characterized in that the first operation and the second operation are operations using the stop operation means.

The gaming machine of feature C1 above is designed to progress through play by starting the rotation of the rotating body by operating the start operation means, and stopping the rotation of the rotating body by operating the stop operation means. Under this premise, the first operation and the second operation can be performed using the stop operation means, making it possible to easily perform these operations while playing, and the configuration allows for easy implementation of either operation.

Feature C21. The gaming machine described in Feature C20, characterized in that the second operation is an operation in which the timing of the stop operation after each of the rotating bodies starts rotating is different from the first operation.

In the above configuration, the first operation and the second operation can be used separately simply by changing the operation timing of the stop operation means, so that both the first operation and the second operation can be easily performed.

Feature C22. A plurality of types of the specific effects (first freeze effect to third freeze effect) are set,
the specific performance setting means, when the lottery result of the lottery means becomes the specific transition result, selects one of the multiple types of specific performances and sets the execution of the specific performance;
The gaming machine described in any of features C1 to C21, characterized in that the specific effect restriction means is provided with a means (a function of executing a freeze release process by the main control unit 101) that prevents the execution of a specific specific effect not being restricted even if the second operation is executed when the specific effect set for execution by the specific effect setting means is a predetermined specific effect (third freeze effect) among the multiple types of specific effects.

According to the above configuration, even if the restrictive conditions for a specific effect are met, the execution of some specific effects is not restricted, which prevents the execution of the specific effects from being excessively restricted. This ensures opportunities to execute the specific effects, and ensures the significance of providing the specific effects. Furthermore, for example, by setting the specific effects that are not subject to restrictions to be those that are expected to be of high interest to players, it is possible to guarantee their execution even if the player mistakenly establishes the restrictive conditions, and to prevent the player from becoming extremely disappointed.

Feature C23: The plurality of types of specific effects include a first specific effect (a first freeze effect, a second freeze effect) and a second specific effect (a third freeze effect) having a lower selection probability than the first specific effect;
The gaming machine described in feature C22, wherein the specific specific effect is the second specific effect.

In this configuration, by configuring whether or not a particular effect is subject to restriction to vary depending on its selection probability (occurrence probability), it is possible to distinguish whether or not each particular effect can be deactivated in relation to the player's level of interest. This makes it possible to guarantee the execution of a particular effect that is expected to interest the player even if the player mistakenly performs the second operation, and to prevent the player from being greatly disappointed.

It is possible to apply the technical ideas shown in any one of the features A1 to A28, features B1 to B19, features D1 to D16, features E1 to E12, and features F1 to F17 individually to each of the features C1 to C23, or to apply each of the technical ideas in combination. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Feature D group>
Feature D1. A plurality of rotating bodies (reels 32L, 32M, and 32R) on which a plurality of types of pictures are applied in the circumferential direction;
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that allows some of the patterns on each of the rotating bodies to be viewed;
A start operation means (start lever 41) that starts rotation of each of the rotating bodies when operated;
a stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the stop operation means is operated;
A drive control means (a function of executing a reel control process by the main control device 101) that starts rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the start operation means is operated and stops rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the stop operation means is operated;
A lottery means (a function of executing lottery processing by the main control device 101) for performing a lottery to determine whether or not to grant a special benefit to a player based on the operation of the start operation means;
a bonus awarding means (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) capable of awarding a bonus corresponding to a predetermined result when a lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position visible through the display unit;
A gaming machine comprising:
The drive control means starts rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the start operation means is operated, and stops rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the stop operation means is operated, as a normal game operation.
A specific drive control means (a function of executing a rotation effect process by the main control device 101) for controlling each of the rotating bodies so that a specific game action (freeze effect) in which the start or progress of the normal game action is restricted is performed;
A specific game action setting means (a function of executing a BB mode winning process or a VB mode winning process by the main control device 101) for setting the specific game action to be performed in a specific game subsequent to the game in which the specific trigger (BB winning or VB winning) occurs when the specific trigger occurs;
A specific operation means (amount adjustment switch 59) by which a player performs a predetermined game ending operation (an operation for executing a medal return process);
execution decision means for deciding whether or not to execute the specific game action set by the specific effect setting means when the specific operation means is operated in a specific situation in which the execution of the specific effect is set by the specific effect setting means (a function for executing a freeze release process and a freeze return process by the main control device 101);
A gaming machine comprising:

In the above configuration, when a specific opportunity occurs, a specific game action different from the normal action (normal game action) of each orbiting body is performed. The specific game action can enhance the game presentation and enhance the presentation effect, but on the other hand, it also restricts the start or progress of the normal game action, so it also imposes a restriction on the player that he or she cannot proceed with the game for a certain period of time. In other words, some players like the presentation and want to see the specific game action, while others want to avoid the specific game action in order to prioritize game efficiency, so it is desirable to have a configuration that meets the needs of each player. In this regard, in the present configuration, when a specific operation means (an operation means for performing a game end operation) is operated in a specific situation in which the execution of a specific game action is set, it is configured to determine whether or not to execute the set specific game action. Therefore, if the configuration is configured to determine that the specific game action is not to be executed by the operation, a player who does not want the specific game action can avoid the execution of the specific game action by operating the specific operation means. Conversely, if the above operation determines that a specific game action will be performed, a player who desires a specific game action can view the specific game action by operating the specific operation means. In this way, by operating the specific operation means, it becomes possible to customize the gaming machine according to the preferences and mood of each player, making it possible to flexibly respond to the differences in the needs of each player.

In addition, the operation of a specific operation means that is not expected to be used during play is assigned as the operation to decide whether or not to execute a specific game action. For example, if the decision operation is performed using a start operation means or the like, there is a risk that a mistaken operation may result in switching between whether or not to execute a specific game action, but this configuration makes it possible to prevent such inconvenience from occurring. Furthermore, by using the specific operation means for performing an operation to end a game also as the operation means for deciding whether or not to execute a specific game action, it is possible to omit the dedicated operation means for the decision operation and simplify the configuration.

Feature D2. The gaming machine described in Feature D1, characterized in that the execution decision means decides whether or not to execute the specific game action set by the specific performance setting means when the specific operation means is operated during a predetermined specific period (during game execution) during the period in which the specific situation exists.

In the above configuration, the decision operation is not valid throughout the entire period of the specific situation, but is only valid for a limited period of time. This makes it possible to reduce the risk of deciding whether or not to execute a specific game action due to an incorrect operation.

Feature D3. The gaming machine described in Feature D2, characterized in that the specific period is a period during which at least one of the rotating bodies is rotating.

In a configuration in which the specific operation means for ending a game also functions as a decision operation means, it is anticipated that an inconvenience will occur in which a player operates the specific operation means with the intent of ending a game, resulting in a decision as to whether or not to execute a specific game action. In this regard, the present configuration is configured to treat the operation of the specific operation means during game execution as a decision operation. Since it is considered rare for a player who is about to end a game to perform such an operation while the game is being executed, this configuration makes it possible to configure a configuration in which, when a player operates the specific operation means with the intent of selecting whether or not to execute a specific game action, it is decided whether or not to execute a specific game action. This makes it possible to prevent the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience.

Feature D4: The execution determination means determines whether or not to execute the specific game action set by the specific effect setting means when the specific operation means is operated during a first period as the specific period;
A gaming machine described in feature D2 or feature D3, characterized in that it is equipped with an end process execution means (a function of executing a settlement switch response process by the main control unit 101) that executes a predetermined game end process (game waiting period) when the specific operation means is operated during a second period different from the first period.

In a configuration in which the specific operation means for ending a game also serves as the operation means for deciding whether or not to execute a specific game action, mistakes are likely to occur because the target to be operated is the same. In this regard, in this configuration, each function is assigned in correspondence with a period, making it possible to prevent the occurrence of incorrect operations. Note that this feature may further include the feature that "the end process execution means does not execute the game end process if the specific operation means is operated during the first period." In this case, when the specific operation means is operated with the intention of selecting whether or not to execute a specific game action, it becomes possible to avoid not only deciding whether or not to execute a specific game action, but also executing the game end operation.

Feature D5. The gaming machine described in Feature D4 is configured such that progress in the game is not possible while the game ending process is being executed by the ending process execution means.

In the above configuration, game progress is prohibited while the game ending process is being executed, making it possible to properly complete the game ending process. On the other hand, if a player executes the game ending process without intending to end the game, the player will be forced to interrupt the game. In this configuration, the configuration of feature D4 makes it possible to prevent the execution of game ending processes that are undesirable to the player, and to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

Feature D6. The gaming machine described in Feature D4 or Feature D5, wherein the second period is a period during which all of the rotating bodies are stopped.

In the above configuration, the second period is assigned to a period in which the probability that the player will stop playing, i.e., the probability that the specific operation means will be operated with the purpose of ending the game, is high. This allows for a configuration in which a game ending process is executed when the player operates the specific operation means with the purpose of ending the game.

Feature D7: A first notification execution means (a function of executing a freeze release process by the main control device 101, a function of executing the processes of steps S4607 and S5506 by the display control device 81) that executes a first notification (freeze stock has been released) when the specific operation means is operated during the first period;
a second notification execution means for executing a second notification (settlement in progress) different from the first notification when the specific operation means is operated during the second period;
A gaming machine according to any one of features D4 to D6, characterized in that it is equipped with:

According to the above configuration, whether the specific operation means is operated during the first period or the second period, the gaming machine responds to the operation, so the player can know that each operation has been properly accepted. Furthermore, because the notification is different for operations during the first period and operations during the second period, the player can easily know whether the operation of the specific operation means performed by the player was accepted by the gaming machine as an operation to end the game or an operation to determine whether or not to execute a specific game action.

Feature D8. A gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D7, characterized in that it is equipped with a switching operation notification means (a function that executes the processing of steps S4603 and S5502 by the display control device 81) that executes a switching operation notification (pressing the settlement switch will release the freeze stock, and pressing the settlement switch if you want to cancel the release of the freeze) that allows the player to recognize that the execution of the specific gaming action can be switched on or off by operating the specific operation means.

The above configuration allows the player to understand that it is possible to switch between performing and not performing a specific gaming action. This allows the player to switch according to their own preferences, etc., even if they do not know in advance that such switching is possible.

Feature D9. The gaming machine described in Feature D8, characterized in that the switching operation notification means executes the switching operation notification regardless of whether the specific situation exists.

The execution of a switching operation notification is convenient for players who want to switch between the presence and absence of a specific game action, but on the other hand, for players who are unaware that a specific game action has been set to be executed, it may function as advance notice that a specific game action will be executed, which may diminish the appeal of the specific game action, which is to surprise the player. In this regard, with this configuration, the switching operation notification is executed even when the execution of a specific game action has not been set, so the execution of a specific game action is not univocally determined by the execution of the switching operation notification. This makes it possible to prevent the switching operation notification from serving as an advance notice of a specific game action.

Feature D10. The game device includes a termination process execution means for executing a predetermined game termination process when the specific operation means is operated within a predetermined period of time;
The gaming machine according to feature D8 or D9, wherein the switching operation notification means executes the switching operation notification at a period different from the predetermined period.

When a switching operation notification is executed, there is a possibility that the player will be tempted by the notification to operate a specific operation means. In this case, if a game ending process is executed as a result of the operation, the game will be interrupted unnecessarily, which may cause discomfort to the player. In this regard, the present configuration is configured to execute a switching operation notification during a period in which the game ending process is not executed. In this case, even if the player is tempted by the notification to operate a specific operation means, the game ending process will not be executed and game interruption will not occur. This makes it possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

In addition, the feature "The switching operation notification means executes the switching operation notification at a period different from the predetermined period" can also be expressed as "The switching operation notification means does not execute the switching operation notification at the predetermined period."

Feature D11. A gaming machine according to any one of Features D2 to D10, characterized in that the specific period is a period during which all of the rotating bodies are stopped.

According to the above configuration, when a player finishes playing, it is possible to prevent the specific game action set before the end from remaining. For example, if a specific game action remains, the specific game action will be executed as soon as the next player starts playing, and the player who finished playing may later realize that the specific transition result has occurred and may feel upset. In this regard, in this configuration, when the execution of a specific game action is set by the specific game operation means, when the player operates the specific operation means to finish playing, a decision is made as to whether or not to execute a specific effect. At this time, for example, by configuring it to decide not to execute a specific effect, it is possible to automatically cancel the execution of the specific game action when the player operates the specific operation means to finish playing. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the specific game action from being executed as soon as the next player starts playing, and to prevent the player who finished playing from feeling upset.

This feature may further include a feature that "includes a means for canceling or invalidating the winning state of the specific transition result when the specific operation means is operated during the specific period." In this case, the winning state of the specific transition result is canceled together with the execution of the specific game action, so that it is possible to prevent the game state from transitioning to the second game state immediately after the next player starts playing. This prevents a player who has finished playing from realizing after the fact that the specific transition result has occurred and becoming upset.

Feature D12. A gaming machine according to any one of Features D1 to D11, characterized in that the execution decision means decides not to execute the specific game action set by the specific game action setting means when the specific operation means is operated in the specific situation.

According to the above configuration, when the execution of a specific game action is set, a player who does not want the specific game action can cancel the execution by operating the specific operation means. In other words, it becomes possible for the player to avoid the execution of the specific game action according to his or her will. Note that this feature may further include the feature that "if the specific operation means is not operated in the specific situation, the execution decision means decides that the specific game action set by the specific game action setting means is to be executed."

Feature D13. A gaming machine according to any one of Features D1 to D11, characterized in that the execution decision means decides that the specific game action set by the specific game action setting means is to be executed when the specific operation means is operated in the specific situation.

According to the above configuration, when the execution of a specific game action is set, a player who desires to perform the specific game action can execute the specific game action by operating a specific operation means. Note that this feature may further include the feature that "if the specific operation means is not operated in the specific situation, the execution determination means determines that the specific game action set by the specific game action setting means will not be executed."

Feature D14: A release means (a function of executing a freeze return process by the main control device 101) is provided that can release the execution of the specific game action set by the specific game action setting means when a predetermined condition (stop of a reach eye) is established in the specific situation,
A gaming machine described in any of features D1 to D11, characterized in that when the specific operation means is operated after the specified condition is satisfied in the specific situation, the execution determination means determines that the execution of the specific game action set by the specific game action setting means will not be released by the release means.

According to the above configuration, if a player who wants to perform a specific game action accidentally fulfills a predetermined condition, the player can cancel the release of the specific game action by operating the specific operation means. In other words, this configuration makes it possible to rescue a player who has accidentally fulfilled the condition to cancel a specific game action.

Feature D15: A storage means (credit function) for storing and storing a number of virtual game media up to a predetermined number that is a plurality of numbers;
A settlement operation means (a settlement switch 59) that can be operated by a player;
a payout means (a function of executing a medal return process by the main control device 101) capable of paying out at least a number of game media corresponding to the number of the virtual game media stored in the storage means when the settlement operation means is operated;
Equipped with
A gaming machine described in any of features D1 to D14, wherein the specific operation means is the settlement operation means.

This configuration can be a practically preferable embodiment for realizing the configuration described in any one of features D1 to D14 above. When this feature is applied to the configuration described in any one of features D4, D5, D6, or D10, a number of gaming media corresponding to the number of virtual gaming media is paid out as a game end process. In this case, it is possible to preferably prevent the game from being interrupted by the payout process. Furthermore, when the payout is performed as a game end process, the stored memory of the number of virtual gaming media is lost against the player's will, forcing the player to take the trouble of re-inserting gaming media. This configuration can also reduce the trouble of such re-insertion.

Feature D16. A plurality of rotating bodies (reels 32L, 32M, and 32R) on which a plurality of types of pictures are applied in the circumferential direction;
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that allows some of the patterns on each of the rotating bodies to be viewed;
A start operation means (start lever 41) that starts rotation of each of the rotating bodies when operated;
a stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the stop operation means is operated;
A drive control means (a function of executing a reel control process by the main control device 101) that starts rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the start operation means is operated and stops rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the stop operation means is operated;
A lottery means (a function of executing lottery processing by the main control device 101) for performing a lottery to determine whether or not to grant a special benefit to a player based on the operation of the start operation means;
a bonus awarding means (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) capable of awarding a bonus corresponding to a predetermined result when a lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position visible through the display unit;
A gaming machine comprising:
The drive control means starts rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the start operation means is operated, and stops rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the stop operation means is operated, as a normal game operation.
A specific drive control means (a function of executing a rotation effect process by the main control device 101) for controlling each of the rotating bodies so that a specific game action (freeze effect) in which the start or progress of the normal game action is restricted is performed;
A specific game action setting means (a function of executing a BB mode winning process or a VB mode winning process by the main control device 101) for setting the specific game action to be performed in a specific game subsequent to the game in which the specific trigger (BB winning or VB winning) occurs when the specific trigger occurs;
A specific operation means (settlement switch 59) by which a player performs a predetermined game ending operation;
An execution switching means (a function of executing a freeze release process and a freeze return process by the main control device 101) for switching whether or not to execute the specific game action set by the specific effect setting means when the specific operation means is operated in a specific situation in which the execution of the specific effect is set by the specific effect setting means;
A gaming machine comprising:

This feature makes it possible to obtain the same effect as feature D1. Note that any of the configurations described in features D2 to D15 may be applied to this feature. In this case, further effects can be achieved by applying each configuration.

It is possible to apply the technical ideas shown in any one of the configurations of features A1 to A28, features B1 to B19, features C1 to C23, features E1 to E12, and features F1 to F17 individually to each of the configurations of features D1 to D16 above, or to apply each of the technical ideas in combination. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Features Group E>
Feature E1. A plurality of rotating bodies (reels 32L, 32M, and 32R) on which a plurality of types of pictures are applied in the circumferential direction;
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that allows some of the patterns on each of the rotating bodies to be viewed;
A start operation means (start lever 41) that starts rotation of each of the rotating bodies when operated;
a stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the stop operation means is operated;
A drive control means (a function of executing a reel control process by the main control device 101) that starts rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the start operation means is operated and stops rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the stop operation means is operated;
A lottery means (a function of executing lottery processing by the main control device 101) for performing a lottery to determine whether or not to grant a special benefit to a player based on the operation of the start operation means;
a bonus awarding means (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) capable of awarding a bonus corresponding to a predetermined result when a lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position visible through the display unit;
A gaming machine comprising:
a storage means (credit function) for storing and storing a number of virtual game media up to a predetermined number set as a plurality of numbers;
A settlement operation means (a settlement switch 59) that can be operated by a player;
a payout means (a function of executing a medal return process by the main control device 101) capable of paying out at least a number of game media corresponding to the number of the virtual game media stored in the storage means when the settlement operation means is operated;
A specific effect execution means (a function of executing a rotation effect process by the main control device 101) for executing a specific effect (freeze effect) based on the lottery result of the lottery means;
A specific performance limiting means (a function for executing a freeze release process by the main control device 101) capable of limiting the execution of the specific performance for at least one of the specific performances after the settlement operation means is operated;
Equipped with
The specific performance restriction means is
A limit determination means (a function of executing a settlement switch corresponding process by the main control device 101) that determines whether or not to limit the execution of the specific performance based on the game status when the settlement operation means is operated;
A restriction execution means (a function for executing a freeze release process and a freeze return process by the main control device 101) that restricts the execution of the specific performance when the restriction determination means determines that the execution of the specific performance is to be restricted;
A gaming machine comprising:

In the above configuration, it is possible to restrict the execution of a specific effect by operating the settlement operation means. This allows a player who does not want to execute a specific effect to avoid the execution of the specific effect. In this case, in this configuration, the settlement operation means, which is originally an operation means for executing the settlement process (a process for paying out a number of game media corresponding to the number of virtual game media stored), is configured to also serve as an operation means for restricting the execution of a specific effect. This eliminates the need to provide a dedicated operation means for restriction, making it possible to simplify the configuration. In this case, if the start operation means, for example, is configured to also serve as an operation means for execution restriction, there is a concern that a player who does not want to restrict a specific effect may mistakenly perform a restriction operation during play, since the operation means is used frequently during play. In this regard, in this configuration, a settlement operation means that is expected to be used less frequently during play is used. This reduces the risk of mistakenly performing a restriction operation during play, and makes it possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of an execution restriction that is undesirable for the player.

In addition, in this configuration, rather than restricting the execution of a specific effect uniformly whenever the settlement operation means is operated, the configuration switches between restricting and not restricting depending on the game situation at the time of operation. For example, in a situation in which the settlement process is executed by operating the settlement operation means, the configuration is such that no execution restriction is imposed even if the settlement operation means is operated, thereby preventing overlapping execution of the settlement process when a player operates the settlement operation means to avoid a specific effect. In other words, it is possible to switch between whether or not the settlement operation means functions as an operation means for restricting execution depending on the game situation at each time, and to encourage operation at a timing appropriate for the execution restriction.

Feature E2. The gaming machine described in Feature E1, wherein the gaming status is the payout status of gaming media by the payout means.

In the above configuration, whether or not to restrict the execution of a specific effect is determined based on the payout status of gaming media by the payout means when the settlement operation means is operated. For example, in a situation where gaming media are paid out by the payout means or the number of paid out gaming media is equal to or greater than a predetermined number, it is possible to not restrict the execution of a specific effect. This makes it possible to preferably prevent overlapping with the settlement process when a player operates the settlement operation means in order to avoid a specific effect.

Feature E3. The restriction determination means is
A first means for determining whether or not the game media is to be paid out by the payout means when the settlement operation means is operated (a function for executing a settlement switch response process by the main control device 101);
A second means (a function of executing a freeze release process by the main control device 101) for determining whether or not to limit the execution of the specific performance based on the determination result of the first means;
The gaming machine described in feature E2 is characterized by being equipped with:

In the above configuration, whether or not to restrict the specific effect is determined based on whether or not gaming media will be paid out by the payout means when the settlement operation means is operated. For example, by configuring the specific effect not to be restricted from being executed when a payout is made even if the settlement operation means is operated, it is possible to suitably prevent overlapping execution of the settlement process when a player operates the settlement operation means to avoid a specific effect.

The "second means for determining whether or not to limit the execution of the specific effect based on the determination result of the first means" in this feature can also be expressed as "a second determination means for determining not to limit the execution of the specific effect when the first means determines that the payout means is in a situation to execute a payout process, and for determining to limit the execution of the specific effect when the first means determines that the payout means is in a situation not to execute a payout process."

Feature E4. The restriction determination means is
a first means for grasping the number of game media to be paid out by the payout means when the settlement operation means is operated;
A second means for determining whether or not to limit the execution of the specific performance based on the result of the determination by the first means;
The gaming machine described in feature E2 is characterized by being equipped with:

In the above configuration, whether or not to limit a specific effect is determined based on the number of game media paid out when the settlement operation means is operated. For example, in a situation where the number of payouts is large, by configuring the game so that the execution of a specific effect is not limited even if the settlement operation means is operated, it is possible to prevent a large amount of game media from being paid out when a player operates the settlement operation means to avoid a specific effect, thereby preventing a long period of interruption of play.

The "second means for determining whether or not to restrict the execution of the specific effect based on the result of the determination by the first means" of this feature can also be expressed as "second means for determining to restrict the execution of the specific effect if the number of gaming media determined by the first means is equal to or less than a predetermined number, and for determining not to restrict the execution of the specific effect if the number of gaming media determined by the first means is greater than the predetermined number." In this case, the "predetermined number" may be 0 or a number greater than or equal to 1.

Feature E5. A first notification execution means (a function of executing a freeze release process by the main control device 101) that executes a first notification (freeze stock has been released) when the settlement operation means is operated and the limit determination means determines that the execution of the specific performance is to be limited;
A gaming machine described in any of features E1 to E4, characterized in that it is provided with a second notification execution means which executes a second notification (settlement in progress) different from the first notification when the settlement operation means is operated and the restriction determination means determines that the execution of the specific presentation is not to be restricted.

In a configuration in which the settlement operation means is used both for settlement and for restricting the execution of specific effects, when a player operates the settlement operation means, he or she may not know which operation the gaming machine has accepted, which can lead to confusion. In this regard, with this configuration, different notifications are issued depending on whether the execution of a specific effect is restricted or not, so the player can easily understand which operation has been accepted based on the difference in these notifications.

In this feature, the first notification and the second notification may have a common notification mode. For example, when both the payout process (settlement process) of the gaming medium by the payout means and the execution restriction of the specific presentation are performed based on the operation of the settlement operation means, a settlement notification (settlement in progress) that allows the player to recognize that the settlement process is being performed and a restriction notification (freeze stock has been released) that allows the player to recognize that the execution of the specific presentation is restricted are both performed, while when only the settlement process is performed based on the operation of the settlement operation means, only the settlement notification is performed. In this case, while the restriction notification only affects the presentation in the former case, the settlement notification is related to the profits of the player and the gaming facility and is therefore more important than the restriction notification, so it is preferable to use a notification mode in which the latter is more noticeable.

Feature E6: A predetermined notification execution means (a function of executing the process of step S4603 by the display control device 81) that executes a predetermined notification (pressing the settlement switch to release the freeze stock) when the game situation is such that the restriction determination means determines that the execution of the specific performance is to be restricted,
A gaming machine described in any one of features E1 to E5, characterized in that the specified notification is one that allows a player to recognize that the execution of the specific effect can be restricted by operating the settlement operation means.

In the above configuration, a predetermined notification is executed that allows the player to recognize that the execution of a specific effect can be restricted by operating the settlement operation means, so that the player can appropriately perform the operation to restrict the specific effect even if he does not know in advance that the execution of a specific effect can be restricted by operating the settlement operation means. However, when such a notification is issued, there is a possibility that the player will see the notification and immediately operate the settlement operation means, so in this configuration, the notification is issued in a game situation in which the restriction of a specific effect is permitted. This makes it possible to suppress unnecessary operations in situations where restrictions are not implemented.

Feature E7: A predetermined notification execution means (a function of executing the process of step S4603 by the display control device 81) is provided that executes a predetermined notification (pressing the settlement switch to release the freeze stock) that allows the player to recognize that the execution of the specific effect can be restricted by operating the settlement operation means,
A gaming machine described in any of features E1 to E5, characterized in that the specified notification execution means executes the specified notification in a situation where the settlement operation means is operated but the payout means does not pay out gaming media.

In the above configuration, a predetermined notification is executed that allows the player to recognize that the execution of a specific effect can be restricted by operating the settlement operation means, so that the player can appropriately perform the restriction operation of the specific effect even if the player does not know in advance that the execution of the specific effect can be restricted by operating the settlement operation means. However, if such a notification is issued, there is a possibility that the player will immediately operate the settlement operation means upon seeing the notification, so in this configuration, the notification is issued in a situation where the payout process (settlement process) of the gaming medium is not performed even if the settlement operation means is operated. This makes it possible to suppress the operation of the settlement operation means (operation for the purpose of restricting the execution of a specific effect) in a situation where the gaming medium is paid out by the payout means. Therefore, when a player operates the settlement operation means with the aim of avoiding a specific effect, it is possible to suitably suppress the overlapping execution of the settlement process.

Feature E8. A predetermined notification execution means (a function of executing the process of step S4603 by the display control device 81) is provided that executes a predetermined notification (pressing the settlement switch to release the freeze stock) that allows the player to recognize that the execution of the specific performance can be restricted by operating the settlement operation means,
A gaming machine described in any of features E1 to E5, characterized in that the predetermined notification execution means executes the predetermined notification when the number of gaming media paid out by the payout means when the settlement operation means is operated is less than a predetermined number.

In the above configuration, a predetermined notification is executed that allows the player to recognize that the execution of a specific effect can be restricted by operating the settlement operation means, so that the player can appropriately perform the operation to restrict the execution of a specific effect even if the player does not know in advance that the execution of a specific effect can be restricted by operating the settlement operation means. However, when such a notification is issued, there is a possibility that the player will immediately operate the settlement operation means upon seeing the notification, so in this configuration, the notification is issued when the number of game media paid out is small. This makes it possible to suppress the operation of the settlement operation means (operation aimed at restricting the execution of a specific effect) in a situation where a large amount of game media is paid out. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the long period of interruption of play caused by the payment of a large amount of game media when the player operates the settlement operation means in order to avoid a specific effect.

Feature E9. A gaming machine according to any one of Features E1 to E8, characterized in that the restriction execution means does not execute the specific effect when the restriction determination means determines that the execution of the specific effect should be restricted.

In the above configuration, a player who does not want to execute a specific effect can avoid the execution of the specific effect by operating the settlement operation means. This makes it possible to provide a configuration that is convenient for players who do not want to execute a specific effect.

Feature E10. The drive control means starts the rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the start operation means is operated, and stops the rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the stop operation means is operated, as a normal game operation;
A specific drive control means (a function of executing a rotation effect process by the main control device 101) controls each of the rotating bodies so that a specific game action (freeze effect) in which the start or progress of the normal game action is restricted is performed,
A gaming machine described in any one of features E1 to E9, wherein the specific presentation is the specific gaming action.

Specific game actions can enhance the game presentation and improve the presentation effect, but on the other hand, they also restrict the start or progress of normal game actions, imposing restrictions on the player that prevent the player from progressing in the game for a certain period of time. For this reason, some players may not wish to perform specific game actions. By applying any of the above features E1 to E9 to such a configuration, it can be made a useful configuration for players who do not wish to perform specific game actions.

Feature E11. A plurality of rotating bodies (reels 32L, 32M, and 32R) on which a plurality of types of pictures are applied in the circumferential direction;
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that allows some of the patterns on each of the rotating bodies to be viewed;
A start operation means (start lever 41) that starts rotation of each of the rotating bodies when operated;
a stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the stop operation means is operated;
A drive control means (a function of executing a reel control process by the main control device 101) that starts rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the start operation means is operated and stops rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the stop operation means is operated;
A lottery means (a function of executing lottery processing by the main control device 101) for performing a lottery to determine whether or not to grant a special benefit to a player based on the operation of the start operation means;
a bonus awarding means (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) capable of awarding a bonus corresponding to a predetermined result when a lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position visible through the display unit;
A gaming machine comprising:
a storage means (credit function) for storing and storing a number of virtual game media up to a predetermined number set as a plurality of numbers;
A settlement operation means (a settlement switch 59) that can be operated by a player;
a payout means (a function of executing a medal return process by the main control device 101) capable of paying out at least a number of game media corresponding to the number of the virtual game media stored in the storage means when the settlement operation means is operated;
A specific effect execution means (a function of executing a rotation effect process by the main control device 101) for executing a specific effect (freeze effect) based on the lottery result of the lottery means;
A specific performance limiting means (a function for executing a freeze release process by the main control device 101) that limits the execution of the specific performance for at least one of the specific performances after the settlement operation means is operated;
A predetermined notification execution means (a function for executing the process of step S4603 by the display control device 81) that executes a predetermined notification (pressing the settlement switch to release the freeze stock) that allows the player to recognize that the execution of the specific performance can be restricted by operating the settlement operation means;
Equipped with
The predetermined notification execution means executes the predetermined notification in a situation where the settlement operation means is operated but the payout means does not pay out gaming media.

In the above configuration, it is possible to restrict the execution of a specific effect by operating the settlement operation means. This allows a player who does not want to execute a specific effect to avoid the execution of the specific effect. In this case, in this configuration, the settlement operation means, which is originally an operation means for executing the settlement process (a process of paying out a number of game media corresponding to the number of virtual game media stored), is configured to also serve as an operation means for restricting the execution of a specific effect. This eliminates the need to provide a dedicated operation means for restriction, making it possible to simplify the configuration. In this case, if the start operation means, for example, is configured to also serve as an operation means for execution restriction, there is a concern that a player who does not want to restrict a specific effect may mistakenly perform a restriction operation during play, since the operation means is used frequently during play. In this regard, in this configuration, a settlement operation means that is expected to be used less frequently during play is used. This reduces the risk of mistakenly performing a restriction operation during play, and makes it possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of an execution restriction that is undesirable for the player.

In the above configuration, a predetermined notification is executed that allows the player to recognize that the execution of a specific effect can be restricted by operating the settlement operation means, so that the player can appropriately perform the restriction operation of the specific effect even if the player does not know in advance that the execution of the specific effect can be restricted by operating the settlement operation means. However, if such a notification is issued, there is a possibility that the player will immediately operate the settlement operation means upon seeing the notification, so in this configuration, the notification is issued in a situation where the payout process (settlement process) of the gaming medium is not performed even if the settlement operation means is operated. This makes it possible to suppress the operation of the settlement operation means (operation for the purpose of restricting the execution of a specific effect) in a situation where the gaming medium is paid out by the payout means. Therefore, when a player operates the settlement operation means with the aim of avoiding a specific effect, it is possible to suitably suppress the overlapping execution of the settlement process.

Feature E12. A plurality of rotating bodies (reels 32L, 32M, and 32R) on which a plurality of types of pictures are applied in the circumferential direction;
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that allows some of the patterns on each of the rotating bodies to be viewed;
A start operation means (start lever 41) that starts rotation of each of the rotating bodies when operated;
a stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the stop operation means is operated;
A drive control means (a function of executing a reel control process by the main control device 101) that starts rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the start operation means is operated and stops rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the stop operation means is operated;
A lottery means (a function of executing lottery processing by the main control device 101) for performing a lottery to determine whether or not to grant a special benefit to a player based on the operation of the start operation means;
a bonus awarding means (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) capable of awarding a bonus corresponding to a predetermined result when a lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position visible through the display unit;
A gaming machine comprising:
a storage means (credit function) for storing and storing a number of virtual game media up to a predetermined number set as a plurality of numbers;
A settlement operation means (a settlement switch 59) that can be operated by a player;
a payout means (a function of executing a medal return process by the main control device 101) capable of paying out at least a number of game media corresponding to the number of the virtual game media stored in the storage means when the settlement operation means is operated;
A specific effect execution means (a function of executing a rotation effect process by the main control device 101) that executes a specific effect (freeze effect) based on the lottery result of the lottery means;
A specific performance control means (a function for executing a freeze release process by the main control device 101) capable of controlling the execution of the specific performance for at least one of the specific performances after the settlement operation means is operated;
Equipped with
The specific performance regulation means includes:
A regulation determination means (a function of executing a settlement switch corresponding process by the main control device 101) for determining whether or not to regulate the execution of the specific performance based on the game status when the settlement operation means is operated;
A restriction execution means (a function of executing a freeze release process and a freeze return process by the main control device 101) that restricts the execution of the specific performance when the restriction determination means determines that the execution of the specific performance is to be restricted;
A gaming machine comprising:

This configuration makes it possible to obtain the same effect as feature E1. Note that any of the configurations described in features E2 to E10 may be applied to this feature. In this case, further effects can be achieved by applying each configuration.

It is possible to apply the technical ideas shown in any one of the features A1 to A28, features B1 to B19, features C1 to C23, features D1 to D16, and features F1 to F17 individually to each of the features E1 to E12 above, or to apply each of the technical ideas in combination. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Feature Group F>
Feature F1. A plurality of rotating bodies (reels 32L, 32M, and 32R) on which a plurality of types of pictures are applied in the circumferential direction;
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that allows some of the patterns on each of the rotating bodies to be viewed;
A start operation means (start lever 41) that starts rotation of each of the rotating bodies when operated;
a stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the stop operation means is operated;
A drive control means (a function of executing a reel control process by the main control device 101) that starts rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the start operation means is operated and stops rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the stop operation means is operated;
A lottery means (a function of executing lottery processing by the main control device 101) for performing a lottery to determine whether or not to grant a special benefit to a player based on the operation of the start operation means;
a bonus awarding means (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) capable of awarding a bonus corresponding to a predetermined result when a lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and a picture combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position visible through the display unit;
A gaming machine comprising:
The drive control means starts rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the start operation means is operated, and stops rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the stop operation means is operated, as a normal game operation.
A specific drive control means (a function of executing a rotation effect process by the main control device 101) for controlling each of the rotating bodies so that a specific game action (freeze effect) in which the start or progress of the normal game action is restricted is performed;
A specific game action execution means (a function of executing a BB winning process, a fifth freeze effect process, and a rotation effect process by the main control device 101) capable of executing the specific game action in a specific game subsequent to the game in which the specific trigger occurs when the specific trigger occurs;
Equipped with
The specific opportunity includes a first opportunity corresponding to a first game result (a rare role win) and a second opportunity corresponding to a second game result (a BB win or a VB win) that is more advantageous to the player than the first game result,
A gaming machine characterized in that it is equipped with an execution restriction means (a function of executing a freeze release process and a freeze return process by the main control unit 101) capable of restricting the execution of the specific game action based on the second trigger if a specific presentation (stopping of a reach eye) corresponding to the second game result is executed after the second trigger occurs and before the specific game action is executed.

In the above configuration, in which a specific game action is performed based on multiple triggers, it is possible to restrict the execution of a specific game action when it is at least the result desired by the player (the advantageous second game result) and it is assumed that the player knows the result in advance. For example, if a specific game action is executed in overlap with a specific presentation while the player knows or predicts that the second game result will be from the specific presentation, the player may feel annoyed, but with this configuration, the occurrence of such overlapping execution is suppressed. As a result, it is possible to prevent a player who knows the second game result in advance from feeling annoyed by the specific game action, while still livening up the game presentation by executing the specific game action.

Feature F2. The gaming machine described in Feature F1, characterized in that, in the case of the first gaming result, the specific presentation is not executed during the period from the occurrence of the first trigger to the execution of the specific gaming action.

In the above configuration, the specific effect is not executed when the first game result is reached, so when the specific effect is executed, the player can easily recognize the second game result from the effect. This makes it possible to restrict the execution of the specific game action in a situation where the player is likely to recognize or predict the second game result, and makes it possible to prevent the execution of the specific game action from being restricted even when the player is not aware of the second game result.

Feature F3. A gaming machine according to feature F1 or feature F2, characterized in that the specific effect is an effect that allows the player to recognize that the second game result has been achieved.

In the above configuration, when a specific effect is executed, the player can recognize the second game result from the effect. This makes it possible to restrict the execution of a specific game action in a situation where the player is likely to recognize the second game result, and makes it possible to prevent the execution of a specific game action from being restricted even when the player is not aware of the second game result.

Feature F4. A gaming machine according to any one of Features F1 to F3, characterized in that the specific effect is a predetermined specific combination of symbols stopping at the pay position.

The gaming machine with feature F1, which is the premise of this configuration, is configured so that a bonus is awarded or not awarded depending on the pattern combination that stops in a valid position, so it is expected that the player will be watching the stopped patterns with great interest. By adopting this configuration under such premise, it is possible to prevent the player from missing out on a specific presentation, and it is possible to preferably prevent the player from being restricted from executing a specific game action without being aware that the second game result has been reached.

Feature F5. A gaming machine according to any one of Features F1 to F4, characterized in that it is equipped with a special notification execution means (a function of executing the processing of steps S6601 to S6602 by the display control device 81) that executes a special notification (a bonus notification effect) that notifies the player that the second game result has been achieved when the special effect is executed.

In the above configuration, when a specific effect is executed and the execution of a specific game action is restricted, the player is notified again by a specific notification that the second game result has occurred. In this case, for example, even if the player is unaware of the specific effect or is unable to recognize the second game result from the specific effect, the player can be informed by the specific notification that the second game result has occurred, and the execution of the specific game action can be restricted. This makes it possible to preferably prevent the execution of a specific game action from being restricted even when the player is unaware that the second game result has occurred.

In addition, in this feature, the "specific notification that notifies the player that the second game result has been achieved" can also be expressed as "specific notification that notifies the player that the specific performance has been executed."

Feature F6: The game state includes a first game state (normal game state) and a second game state (BB state or VB mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state;
A transition determination means (a function of executing a winning result response process by the main control device 101) for determining whether a predetermined transition condition (BB winning or 4th or 5th re-play winning) is established or not when the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined specific transition result (BB winning or VB winning);
a game state transition means (a function of executing a winning result response process by the main control device 101) for transitioning a game state from the first game state to the second game state when the transition determination means determines that the transition condition is satisfied;
Equipped with
The second game result is the specific transition result,
A gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F5, characterized in that the specific presentation is a presentation that allows a player to recognize that the result of the lottery by the lottery means has become the specific transition result.

When a player recognizes in advance that a specific transition result (e.g., a bonus win) has occurred and wants to play the second gaming state (e.g., a bonus game) quickly, if a specific gaming action is executed, the game progress may be restricted and the player may feel that the specific gaming action is bothersome. In this regard, the above configuration prevents overlapping execution of a specific effect and a specific gaming action, making it possible to prevent a player who recognizes the specific transition result from the specific effect from feeling that the specific gaming action is bothersome.

Feature F7. The gaming machine described in Feature F6, characterized in that the specific presentation is a pattern combination corresponding to a reach eye stopping at the active position.

The gaming machine with feature F1 above, which is the premise of this configuration, is configured so that a bonus is awarded or not depending on the pattern combination that stops in a valid position, so it is expected that players will look at the stopped patterns with great interest. Under this premise, by configuring the machine so that the execution of a specific gaming action is restricted when a pattern combination that corresponds to a reach eye stops, it becomes possible to restrict the execution of a specific gaming action in a situation where the player is likely to recognize that a specific gaming result has been achieved.

Feature F8. A gaming machine according to any one of Features F1 to F7, characterized in that the execution limiting means includes means capable of limiting the execution of the specific game action based on the first trigger when a predetermined effect that is different from the specific effect and does not result in the second game result is executed after the first trigger occurs and before the specific game action is executed.

For example, not only when the player is aware or predicts in advance that the result is the second game result, but also when the player is aware in advance that the result is not the second game result, the player may feel annoyed when a specific game action is executed again. In this regard, the present configuration is configured to restrict the execution of a specific game action even in such cases, so that it is possible to more effectively prevent the player from feeling annoyed by the specific game action.

Note that in this feature, "not being the second game result" can also be expressed as "not being the second game result." This also applies to feature F9 below.

Feature F9. A gaming machine according to any one of Features F1 to F7, characterized in that the execution limiting means includes means capable of limiting the execution of the specific game action based on the first trigger when a predetermined effect that the player can recognize as being different from the specific effect and not resulting in the second game result is executed after the first trigger occurs and before the specific game action is executed.

For example, not only when the player is aware or predicts in advance that the result is the second game result, but also when the player is aware in advance that the result is not the second game result, the player may feel annoyed when a specific game action is executed again. In this regard, the present configuration is configured to restrict the execution of a specific game action even in such cases, so that it is possible to more effectively prevent the player from feeling annoyed by the specific game action.

Feature F10. The specific game action execution means is capable of executing a first specific game action (sixth freeze effect) as the specific game action when the first trigger occurs as the specific trigger, and is capable of executing a second specific game action (fifth freeze effect) as the specific game action, the second specific game action having a different operation mode from the first specific game action when the second trigger occurs as the specific trigger;
The gaming machine described in feature F8 or feature F9, wherein the execution restriction means restricts the execution of the first specific game action when the specified presentation is executed, and restricts the execution of the second specific game action when the specific presentation is executed.

In the above configuration, since the first specific game action and the second specific game action have different operation modes, the specific game action is provided with a notification function of whether it is the first game result or the second game result. In this case, it is expected that when the specific game action is executed, the player will be highly interested in which operation mode it will be executed in, and it is possible to further enhance the effect of the specific game action in livening up the game. On the other hand, for players who are aware of the results in advance, their interest in the specific game action may decrease and they may find the specific game action annoying. However, according to this configuration, the overlapping execution of the predetermined effect and the first specific game action, and the specific effect and the second specific game action, is suppressed, so it is possible to prevent players who are aware of the game results in advance from finding the specific game action annoying.

Feature F11: A special effect execution means (a function of executing continuous effect setting processing by the display control device 81) is provided for executing a special effect (a fourth game effect in a continuous effect) that allows a player to recognize whether or not the second game result has been achieved in the specific game,
A gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F10, wherein the specific game action execution means is capable of executing the specific game action when the special effect is executed or during the execution of the special effect.

According to the above configuration, a special effect is executed to inform the player whether or not the second game result has been achieved, and the specific game action can be used as an element to liven up the effect. In this configuration, when the special effect is executed, the execution of the specific game action is restricted, so that it is possible to preferably prevent the occurrence of the inconvenience that the specific game action intended to liven up the effect ends up being annoying.

Feature F12. The gaming machine described in Feature F11, wherein the special effect execution means includes a means for restricting the execution of the special effect when the execution of the specific gaming action is restricted by the execution restriction means.

According to the above configuration, when the execution of a specific game action is restricted, the execution of a special effect is also restricted, so that it is possible to more effectively prevent players who are aware in advance that this is the second game result from feeling annoyed.

By applying the configuration of feature F5 to this feature, the following effect can be achieved. For example, if the player does not realize from the specific presentation that it is the second game result, and execution is restricted up to the special presentation without the player knowing that it is the second game result, there is a risk that the player will not be able to grasp whether or not it is the second game result. In this regard, by providing a specific notification, the player is appropriately informed that it is the second game result, making it possible to prevent the occurrence of the above inconvenience.

Feature F13. The gaming machine described in Feature F11, wherein the special effect execution means includes a means for preventing the execution of the special effect from being restricted even if the execution of the specific gaming action is restricted by the execution restriction means.

According to the above configuration, even if the execution of a specific game action is restricted, the special presentation will notify the player as to whether or not the result is the second game result. Therefore, even if the player does not recognize from the specific presentation that the result is the second game result, for example, the occurrence of an inconvenience in which the player is unable to grasp whether or not the result is the second game result can be suppressed.

Feature F14. A gaming machine according to any one of Features F1 to F13, characterized in that the execution restriction means prevents the specific game action based on the second trigger from being executed if the specific presentation is executed after the second trigger occurs and before the specific game action is executed.

According to the above configuration, when a specific presentation is executed, a specific game action in a specific game is not executed. This makes it possible to effectively prevent a player who is aware of the second game result in advance from feeling bothered by the specific game action.

Feature F15. A gaming machine according to any one of Features F1 to F13, characterized in that the execution restriction means prevents the specific game action based on the second trigger from being executed if the specific presentation is executed and a predetermined condition is met (if the settlement switch 59 is operated) after the second trigger occurs and before the specific game action is executed.

In the above configuration, when a specific presentation is executed and a predetermined condition is met, the specific game action is not executed. Therefore, a player who recognizes from the specific presentation that the specific presentation is the second game result and wants to prevent the specific game action from being executed need only further satisfy the predetermined condition. On the other hand, a player who recognizes from the specific presentation that the second game result is reached but still wants to see the specific game action need only not satisfy the predetermined condition. In this way, with this configuration, it is possible to leave it up to the player to decide whether or not to not execute the specific game action, and it becomes possible to selectively choose whether or not to not execute the specific game action depending on each player's level of interest in the specific game action.

Feature F16. The gaming machine according to any one of Features F1 to F13, characterized in that the execution restriction means executes the specific game action based on the second trigger if the specific performance is executed and a predetermined condition is met (settlement switch 59 is operated) after the second trigger occurs and before the specific game action is executed, and does not execute the specific game action based on the second trigger if the specific performance is executed and the predetermined condition is not met.

According to the above configuration, when a specific presentation is executed, the specific game action can be not executed. This can prevent players who recognize that the specific presentation is the second game result and do not want to execute the specific game action from feeling annoyed by the specific game action. In addition, when a specific presentation is executed and a predetermined condition is met, the specific game action can be executed. Therefore, even if a player recognizes that the specific presentation is the second game result, he or she still wants to see the specific game action, he or she can see the specific game action by meeting the predetermined condition. In this way, according to this configuration, while the specific game action is basically not executed by the execution of a specific presentation, the specific game action is executed as an exception when the predetermined condition is met, so that it is possible to prevent players who recognize that the specific presentation is the second game result from feeling annoyed by the specific game action, and to use whether or not to not execute the specific game action according to each player's level of interest in the specific game action.

Feature F17: The first trigger corresponds to the lottery result of the lottery means becoming the first game result;
A gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F16, wherein the second trigger is a trigger corresponding to the lottery result of the lottery means becoming the second game result.

With this configuration, each game result becomes internal, making it a practically preferable embodiment of the configuration described in any of features F1 to F16 above.

Note that the technical ideas shown in any one of the features A1 to A28, features B1 to B19, features C1 to C23, features D1 to D16, and features E1 to E12 can be applied individually to each of the features F1 to F17 above, or the technical ideas can be applied in combination. When applying the technical ideas in combination, they can also be combined across feature groups.

Note that, to each of the configurations of Feature Group A to Feature Group F described above, it is possible to apply the technical ideas shown in the configurations of other Feature Groups A to F individually, or to apply each technical idea in combination. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

The basic configuration of a gaming machine to which the above-mentioned features can be applied is shown below.

Pachinko game machine: A game machine that has an operating means operated by the player, a game ball launching means that launches game balls based on the operation of the operating means, a ball passage that guides the launched game balls to a specified game area, and various game components arranged within the game area, and that awards a special prize to the player when the game ball passes through a specified passage section of each of the game components.

Slot machines and other reel-type gaming machines: A gaming machine equipped with a variable display means that changes and displays a series of symbols consisting of multiple symbols, and then displays the series of symbols at its final stop; the change in symbols is started by operating a start operating means, the change in symbols is stopped by operating a stop operating means or after a predetermined time has passed, and a special gaming state (bonus game, etc.) advantageous to the player is generated on the condition that the final stopped symbol at the time of the stop is a specific symbol.

Ball-operated belt-type game machine (ball-operated reel-type game machine): A game machine equipped with a variable display means that displays a variable pattern sequence consisting of multiple patterns and then displays the final stop of the pattern sequence, in which the pattern variation is started due to the operation of a start operation means, the pattern variation is stopped due to the operation of a stop operation means or after a predetermined time has passed, and a special game state (bonus game, etc.) advantageous to the player is generated on the condition that the final stop pattern at the time of the stop is a specific pattern, and further equipped with a ball receiving tray and an insertion device that performs an insertion process to take in game balls from the ball receiving tray, and a payout device that pays out game balls to the ball receiving tray, and configured so that the operation of the start operation means is valid when game balls are inserted by the insertion device.

10... slot machine as a gaming machine, 26L-26R... display windows as a display section, 32L-32R... reels as a rotating body, 41... start lever as a starting operation means, 42-44... stop switches as a stopping operation means, 59... settlement switch as a specific operation means or settlement operation means, 81... display control device, 101... main control device, 102... CPU constituting various control means such as lottery means.

Claims (1)

A plurality of rotating bodies on which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in a circumferential direction;
A display unit that allows some of the patterns on each of the rotating bodies to be viewed;
A start operation means for starting rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the start operation means is operated;
A stop operation means for stopping the rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the stop operation means is operated;
a drive control means for starting rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the start operation means is operated and for stopping the rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the stop operation means is operated;
a lottery means for holding a lottery to determine whether or not to award a special benefit to a player based on an operation of the start operation means;
a bonus awarding means for awarding a bonus corresponding to a predetermined result when a lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position visible through the display unit;
A gaming machine comprising:
The game state includes a first game state and a second game state which is more advantageous to a player than the first game state,
a means for transitioning a gaming state from the first gaming state to the second gaming state when a lottery result by the lottery means becomes a predetermined specific transition result and a predetermined transition condition is established thereafter ;
a specific setting means for performing specific setting such that, when the lottery result of the lottery means becomes the specific transition result, a specific performance that allows a player to recognize that the specific transition result has occurred is executed after the winning game that has become the specific transition result and before the transition to the second gaming state;
a first means for executing a first specific effect as the specific effect in a specific game after the winning game and before the transition to the second game state when a first operation is performed by a player in a specific situation after the specific setting is performed;
A second means for preventing the first specific effect from being executed in the specific game when a second operation different from the first operation is performed by a player before the execution of the first specific effect in the specific situation;
Equipped with
After the second means determines that the first specific performance is not to be executed, the first specific performance cannot be executed before the transition to the second game state.
After the second means determines that the first specific performance is not to be executed, a second specific performance that is different from the first specific performance and that allows a player to recognize that the specific transition result has been achieved is executed.
The second specific effect can be ended by a player's operation,
A gaming machine characterized in that the second operation is an operation different from the operation of stopping the rotation of the rotating body by the stop operation means .

Images